EU Examples Manual

hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
k e r- s o ft w a k e r- s o ft w a
Examples Manual
Eurocodes
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Legal Notices
Autodesk® Structural Bridge Design © 2019 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or
parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose.
Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder.
Trademarks
The trademarks on the Autodesk Trademarks page are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., and/or its subsidiaries and/or
affiliates in the USA and/or other countries.
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.
Disclaimer
THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC.
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS
ii
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Table of Contents
v. Introduction
1. Setup and Configuration
2. Section Definition
3. Section Analysis
4. Beam Definition
5. Beam Design
6. Analysis - Model Definition
7. Analysis - Load Definition & Solution
8. Transfer of Data
9. Specialist Analysis Techniques
10. Complete Examples
iii
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
iv
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Introduction
This manual is intended to act as a general guide to the solution of typical examples
in Autodesk® Structural Bridge Design. There are ten chapters, each containing a
number of workshop examples that the user can work through using the application,
by following the described procedures. Most workshops are simple and intended for
relatively new users to the system but there are also some more detailed examples
providing an insight into some of the more advanced capabilities of the software.
The main contents page gives the headings of the main sections. These are
hyperlinked in the document so “clicking” on a title will take the user directly to the
appropriate section. The first page of each section shows the contents for that
section, listing the workshops included. This is also a hyperlinked page. Navigation to
particular sections is made easier if the PDF bookmarks are made visible.
Files
Some of the examples require data files to be loaded or opened. All these files can
be found in the following folder:
C:\ProgramData\Autodesk\Structural Bridge Design 20xx\Examples\EN Data Files
At the end of some examples the user is asked to save a data file which may be used
in a subsequent example. To prevent the overwriting of the supplied files different file
names have been used. These files can optionally be used as input instead of the
supplied data files if required.
Semantics
The procedure for each example is given as a series of step by step instructions,
making reference to data form names, field names, user input, menu items, etc. To
enhance the readability of these instructions some basic rules have been followed
when preparing these instructions.
1. Text in Bold with a vertical bar separating words indicates a menu item (eg
Options | Preferences...).
2. Form names ,data field labels and drop down lists are indicated as coloured italic
text such as Define Beam Loading.
3. Text in double quotation marks generally indicates a button found on a data form
or user input (e.g. ...click on the “OK” button).
v
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
1. Setup and Configuration
Contents
1.1. Setup and Templates ................................................................................................ 1-3
1.2. Templates for Other Design Codes ........................................................................... 1-9
1-1
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
1-2
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
1.1. Setup and Templates

Subjects Covered:
Design Code; Company Identity; Templates; Titles; Units; Materials; Preferences;
Outline
Autodesk® Structural Bridge Design may be used numerous times within a project and
certain data will be common to all jobs within this project. In fact some data will be
common to all projects. Much of this data can be set up by defining templates and
setting personal preferences which will stored in template files and the system registry
for each user.
In this example we set up the default company information, design code and personal
preferences, and then create a number of section, beam and project templates that
can be used in further examples given in this manual.
We will create 5 templates:
• A design sections template

• A design beam template for prestressed beams
• A design beam template for steel/concrete composite beams
• A design beam template for reinforced concrete beams
• A basic project template
Procedure
1. Start Autodesk Structural Bridge Design.
2. Use the main menu item Options | Design Code to select “Eurocode + UK
Annexes”.
3. Use the menu item Options |Company Identity to open the Set Company
Identity form.
1-3
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
4. Enter your Organisation Name and your Organisation address.
5. Click on the Load… button to select a bitmap to display as a logo in the

heading of any output that is produced by the program. Browse to the
examples folder and select the “Mylogo.png” file. Alternatively use your own
logo.
6. Click on ✓ OK and confirm that the changes should be saved.
7. Open the Preferences form using the menu item Options | Preferences and
on the General tab ensure that the tick box on the form is ticked so that an
overview is always provided.
8. Note the default folder name for My Templates Folder and change this if
required by clicking on the (click to change) button.
9. On the “Graphics” tab of the Preferences form, tick the box for Reverse
direction of plotted Bending Moments, so that BM diagrams are plotted with
sagging moments (Positive) below the beam and switch on Auto Redraw so
that graphics displays are automatically updated. Note that the colours used
for the chart data series can be defined by the user on this tab.
10. Click on ✓ OK to close this form.
11. Open the Edit Units form using the menu item Options | Edit Units. Use the
Reset Current Units... button and then change the units for velocity to “m/s”.
12. Click on ✓ OK to close this form.
13. To create a Design Section Template follow the following steps:
a. Use the menu item File | New | Single Design Section
1-4
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
b. Use the menu item File | Titles to open the Titles form
c. Set the Job Title field to “ASBD Examples” and set the Job Number to
“1.1”.
d. Enter your initials in the Calculations by: field
e. Click on ✓ OK to close this form.
f. At the bottom of the left hand side navigation pane, ensure that the
Materials group is selected.
g. Create a concrete material by clicking on the button at the top of the

navigation window and select Concrete – Parabola-Rectangle. By
default this concrete has a characteristic cube strength of 50 N/mm2
which is grade C40/50 concrete. Change fck,cube to “40MPa” (40N/ mm2)
and then click on the ✓ OK button to accept this material.
h. Create a second Parabola-Rectangle concrete material with in the

same way as the first, but accept the characteristic cube strength of
“50MPa” (50N/mm2). Click on ✓ OK to accept.
i. Create a Reinforcing Steel – Inclined material by using the button.

Set k to be “1.08” and Characteristic Strain Limit to “0.05” (the upper
bound limit given in Table C.1 of EN 1992-1-1, Annex C for class B
ductility). Click on ✓ OK to accept.
j. Create a Prestressing Steel – Inclined material, setting the Relaxation

Class to “Class 2” if not already set. The default values for strength
1-5
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
relate to strand type Y1860S7 from EN 10138-3 so we will accept all

other default values. Click on ✓ OK to accept.
k. Create a Structural Steel material using the default values. Click on ✓

OK to accept.
l. Save this data to a template using the menu item File | Save As
Template | My Template with the filename “EU Section.sbt”
14. Repeat the above steps from “a” to “l”, using exactly the same materials and
settings for each of the following; saving the templates with the names in
parenthesis:
• File | New | Single Design Beam | Steel Composite (EU Steel

Composite.sbt)
• File | New | Single Design Beam | Pre-tensioned Prestressed (EU
Pretensioned.sbt)
• File | New | Single Design Beam | Reinforced Concrete (EU RC.sbt)
• File | New | Blank Project (EU Project.sbt)
15. Close the program.
Summary
The templates created in this example may be used as default values when any new
section, beam, or project is started. Of course this data may be changed locally at
any time to reflect local requirements without affecting the saved template settings.
For example, the default value for the Ultimate Compressive Strain limit, cu, is set to
0.0035, which is ok for sections in flexure, but we would need to alter this to 0.002 if
the section or component under consideration was mainly in compression.
These templates can be saved as global company templates by saving them into the
“Company Templates” folder which should be a shared folder.
The section or beam templates will relate to a single section or beam but a “project”
may contain a single structure together with any number of sections and/or beams,
either linked or embedded. A linked design section or beam is a single section or
beam, saved as a standalone file, which can be linked to multiple projects to allow for
re-use.
1-6
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
One or more (embedded) design sections or beams can be created within a project
rather than linked to an external file.
1-7
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
1-8
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
1.2. Templates for Other Design Codes

Subjects Covered:
Default materials for different design codes; Templates from existing templates;
Outline
Autodesk Structural Bridge Design may be used for projects that require design
checks to more than one design standard. If this is a requirement it may be
convenient to set up templates that contain material data relating to design
parameters pertaining to other codes of practice. If templates have already been
defined for Eurocodes is a simple procedure to start a new section/beam/project from
the EU templates, change the design code as required and then save as a new
template. In this way the EU material properties are converted to equivalent
properties specific to the new code. It should be noted that the material names remain
unchanged, but these may be edited before saving.
Alternatively, if a complete structure, beam or section is defined using one design

code, and then the design code changes, the appropriate materials are automatically
re-assigned. Other code specific data may be deleted but a warning message is
issued if this is the case.
In this example we use the Design Section template created in example 1.1, called
“EU Section.sbt”, to provide the starting point for a new template called “LRFD
Section.sbt”.
Procedure
1. Start the program.
1. Use the menu item File | New | Create From Template and select the
template file “EU Section”.
2. Use the menu item Options | Design Code |

AASHTO LRFD to change the design code. A
warning/information message should be
issued. Enter “Yes” to continue (twice).
3. In the Titles form, leave the same name in the Job Title field but set the Job
Number to “1.2”.
1-9
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
4. In the Materials navigation window it can be seen that although the design
code has changed the material names still relate to Eurocodes. To change
these it is simply a matter of opening each material in turn, by clicking on it in
the navigation window, and overtyping one of the characters in one of the data
fields before closing the form with ✓ OK. This will result in a more appropriate
name but any name may be entered in this field if required.
5. Save this data to a template using the menu item File | Save As Template |
My Template using the filename “LRFD Section.sbt”.
6. Close the program
Summary
The data created in this example is just an illustration of how templates can be
defined for multi-code projects. It also shows how templates can be saved and used
by other users.
1-10
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
2. Section Definition
Contents
2.1. Simple Edge Section ................................................................................................ 2-3
2.2. Voided Slab .............................................................................................................. 2-7
2.3. Reinforced Concrete Column .................................................................................. 2-11
2.4. Plate Girder ............................................................................................................ 2-15
2.5. Encased Steel Column ........................................................................................... 2-19
2.6. Composite Section.................................................................................................. 2-23
2.7. Pre-stressed section ............................................................................................... 2-27
2.8. Multiple Sections in a Single Project ....................................................................... 2-33
2-1
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
2-2
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
2.1. Simple Edge Section

Subjects Covered:
Titles; Material property changes; Section Definition; Parametric Shapes; Define
shapes; Inserting points; Arcs
Outline
The shape below is created by using a parametric ‘L’ section and then modifying by
inserting points, changing vertex coordinates and changing segments to arcs. Grade
C31/40 concrete is assigned to the section.
Procedure
1. Start the program and begin a new section by using the main menu item File |
New | Create From Template and selecting “EU Sections”.
2. Use the main menu item File |Titles... to set the title as “Grillage Edge Section”
with a sub-title of “Example 2.1”. Click on ✓ OK to close the titles form.
3. At the bottom of the navigation window on the left side, select Materials and
then delete the structural steel (Redundant property) by selecting this material
from the navigation tree and then use the right mouse button menu to select
Delete.
2-3
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
4. Repeat this for the Prestressing Steel.
5. Now select Design Section at the bottom of the navigation window and use the
button at the top of the window to create a new section element as a
Parametric Shape
6. This will display a form (with graphic) showing a rectangular shape. Use the
dropdown list to change the shape from “rectangle” to “L” and set the width to
“1000mm”, the height to “750mm”, the thickness of horizontal to “200mm” and
vertical to “250mm”. Also set the material property to grade C32/40 concrete
by selecting the appropriate property from the drop down list
7. Click on the Convert to User button to change the “Parametric Shape” into a
“Define Shape” which will change the form and graphic to display all the
vertices and coordinates. We will now add some additional points and edit the
coordinates to provide the correct shape boundary
8. Click on the second point in the vertices (Y) list and notice that the circle
around the point at the bottom right of the “L” has turned red. This is the
current point. Select the “+” button to insert a point midway along the bottom
edge of the “L”.
9. Now click on the fifth point in the vertices list and use the “+” button to add a
point midway along the top of the bottom flange.
10. Now click on the eighth point in the vertices list and use the “+” button to add a
point midway along the top edge of the vertical.
11. Change the coordinates in the table to the following:
2-4
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
12. Click on the Arc tick box for the point (as shown) at the centre of the top of the
vertical to create the curve on the top. Change the Name field to “Edge
Section”.
13. Click on ✓ OK to close the User Defined Section Element form.
14. Used the main menu item File | Save as to save the section with a file name
“My EU Example 2_1.sam”.
Summary
Section shapes can be created in a number of ways. There are many predefined
parametric shapes and standard beams stored in the program library, which can be
used unaltered. These can be converted to a general defined shape and modified.
This example shows how to do this and how to assign a particular material to a
section component.
2-5
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
2-6
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
2.2. Voided Slab

Subjects Covered:
Creating Voids, Continuous faces, Reinforcing faces, Manipulation of hook points
Outline
A hole can be created in a section by defining a second component, entirely
contained within the first component and assigning it a “void” property. If a section is
part of a larger section then the torsion property calculations need to know this, so the
continuous faces must be identified. Reinforcement can be defined relative to a face
with a specific diameter, spacing and cover. The section below can be created to
illustrate all these aspects.
Procedure
1. Start the program and start a new section by using the main menu item File |
New | Create From Template and selecting “EU Section”.
2. Use the menu item File |Titles... to set the title as “Voided Slab Section” with a
sub-title of “Example 2.2” and change the job number to 2.2. Click on “OK” to
close the titles form.
3. Select Design Section at the bottom of the navigation window and use the
Parametric Shape.
4. This will display a form (with graphic) showing a rectangular shape. Set the
width to “1200mm” and depth to “900mm” and in the Property field select grade
C32/40 concrete.
2-7
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
5. In the Graphics window click on the two vertical edges (once) and the solid
lines change to dashed lines. This signifies that these are continuous faces. If
the lines are not dashed but bold, then this means they have been clicked on
twice and this signifies the edge is part of the “soffit”. If this happens then click
on the lines again until they become dashed
6. Now set the Hook Point Reference to “0” and the X and Y coordinates also to
“0”. This moves the origin to the centre of the shape.
7. Close this form using the ✓ OK button
8. Use a right mouse click in the navigation window to display the context menu
and select “Notes...”. Type in the note below and then close the notes window
with the ✓ OK button
9. Create a second parametric component using the button, as before, and

change the shape to “Circle” in the Shape Reference field with a diameter of
“550mm”.
10. Again set the Hook Point Reference to “0” and the X and Y coordinates also to
“0”, which will make the two shapes concentric.
11. Leave the Property of this second component as “Void”, as this will form the
hole, and then close the Define Section Element form using the ✓ OK button.
12. Open the Define Reinforcement form by selecting Reinforcement in the

navigation tree.
2-8
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
13. Change the Generate option to “Reinforce Faces” and change Position By to
“Exact Spacing” with a spacing of “100mm”.
14. Set the Bar diameter to “40mm” and then click on the bottom face of the
rectangle in the graphics window to display a secondary data form allowing the
definition of the reinforcement cover. Set this cover to “50mm” and then close
the secondary form using ✓ OK.
15. Note that the reinforcement material property is automatically selected (but
could be changed if a second reinforcement property is defined).
16. Close the Define Reinforcement form using ✓ OK
17. Save the data file using the File | Save as... menu item as “My EU Example
2_2.sam”.
Summary
Voided slab sections are often used to represent the longitudinal stiffness of a grillage
beams. It is important that the torsion properties are calculated correctly and that if
“Cracked” section properties are required then the reinforcement is correctly defined.
2-9
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
2-10
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
2.3. Reinforced Concrete Column

Subjects Covered:
Reinforcement to two covers; Snapping to reinforcement; editing reinforcement cover
and size
Outline
A simple reinforced concrete section is required to represent a section of a column –
as shown below. Initially 25mm bars are placed in the positions shown below. This is
done by placing a bar in each corner, with the appropriate cover, and then using these
bars as “snap” points drawing a number of bars between them. This creates duplicate
bars in the corners but these are automatically deleted when the form is closed.
It is then realised that 32mm bars should have been used instead. The bars are
edited to change the diameter but then the cover needs adjusting back to 46mm.
Procedure
1. Start the program and begin a new section by using the File | New | Create
From Template menu item and selecting “EU Section”.
2. Use the main menu item File |Titles... to set the title as “RC Column Section”
with a sub-title of “Example 2.3” and change the job number to 2.3. Click on ✓
OK to close the titles form.
“Parametric Shape”.
2-11
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
4. This will display a form (with graphic) showing a rectangular shape. Set the
width to “500mm”, depth to “400mm” and property to the C32/40 concrete.
Click on ✓ OK to close this form.
5. Open the Define Reinforcement form by selecting Reinforcement in the

navigation tree.
6. Change the Generate option to “1 bar by 2 covers” and change Diameter to

“25mm”.
7. Click on one of the corners of the rectangle in the graphics window to display a
data form allowing the definition of the reinforcement cover. Set this cover to
“46mm” on both faces and then close the form using ✓ OK
8. Repeat step 9 for the other three corners noting that the cover is automatically
set to the last defined.
9. Change the Generate option to “Draw Bars” and set Position By to “Number”.
Set the No. of bars to “4” and leave the Diameter as “25mm”.
10. In the graphics window toolbar, set the snap option to “Bar/tendon” then click
on the bottom left hand bar in the graphics window followed by the bottom right
hand bar. This will create an extra 4 bars, 2 of which will be superimposed on
the corner bars.
2-12
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
11. Repeat this with the two top corner bars.
12. Change the No. of bars to “3” and draw in the bars along the remaining two
vertical edges in the same way.
13. Close the Define Bars and Tendons form using the “OK” button and a message
should be displayed saying “Superimposed bars have been deleted”.
14. Re-open the Define Reinforcement form by selecting Reinforcement in the

navigation tree
15. Click on the Edit bars... button and then draw a window around all bars in the
graphics window by clicking once in one corner and then clicking again in the
opposite corner of the rectangular section. The bars should turn red and a
secondary Edit Reinforcement form should be displayed. Change the Edit
Option to “Change bar diameter” and set the Bar Diameter to 32mm. Close the
Edit Reinforcement form using the ✓ OK button and the bars are updated.
16. The cover to these bars has then been reduced to 42.5mm so we need to
move the bars to re-establish 46mm cover. This can also be done using the
“Edit Bars...” button but can only be done one face at a time. Click on Edit
bars... and then window round the topmost row of bars. Change the Edit
Option to “Reset Cover” in the Edit Reinforcement data form and set the cover
to “46mm” before closing the form with the ✓ OK button. The cover to these
bars has now been adjusted.
2-13
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
17. This can be repeated for the bottom row of bars and each side row,
remembering to click on the Edit bars... button each time before selecting the
appropriate bars. Close the Define Reinforcement form using the ✓ OK button.
18. Before saving the file we may wish to remove any redundant materials that
were defined by using the template. This is not generally necessary but, if
required, it can easily be done by selection Materials in the navigation window
and then selection the Clear Unassigned task item at the bottom of the
navigation tree window. This will remove any unused materials from the
materials list.
19. The data can then be saved, using the menu item File | Save as..., to a file
called “My EU Example 2_3.sam”.
Summary
This is a simple example that illustrates the creation of a reinforced section which is
then needed to be modified. This is a process that can happen frequently in a real
design cycle. For this simple section it would probably be just as simple to delete the
bars and re-specify them but for more complex sections this may be time consuming.
2-14
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
2.4. Plate Girder

Subjects Covered:
Multiple components; joining components; copying components; rotating components;
using “Shove” to locate components accurately; User defined library shapes.
Outline
The shape below is created by using a parametric ‘I’ section and then adding four
parametric “Angle” shapes as the cleats. Standard structural steel properties are
applied to all components. The section is edited using the join facility to combine the
components into one defined shape.
Procedure
1. Start the program and begin a new section by using the main menu item File |
2. Use the menu item File |Titles... to set the title as “Cleated Plate Girder
Section” with a sub-title of “Example 2.4” and change the job number to 2.4.
Click on ✓ OK to close the titles form.
Parametric Shape which will open the Define Section Element form.
2-15
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
4. Use the dropdown list to change the shape from “Rectangle” to “I” and set the
width of both flanges to “500mm”, the overall height to “900mm”, the thickness
of top & bottom flanges to “40mm” and the thickness of the web to “20mm”.
The Property should also be set to the structural steel material. Click on ✓ OK
to close this form.
5. Resize the graphics window to a reasonable size by clicking on the corner of

the window and with the mouse button held down, drag to the new position.
Zoom the graphics so that the shape fits the new screen size by clicking on the
“fit view” button in the toolbar of the graphics window.
6. Create a second section element as a parametric shape by using the “+” button
at the top of the navigation window. Change the shape from “rectangle” to “L”
and set the width and height to “75mm” and the thicknesses of both horizontal
and vertical to “12mm”. Also set the material to Structural Steel.
7. The angle will appear in red with a small cross shown at the reference point.
Click once on this cross, releasing the mouse button, and drag the shape to a
new location beneath the top flange and to the right of the web, as show below.
Place the angle at this location by clicking the left mouse button again.
8. Use the “rotate” edit button to orientate the angle with the arms pointing to the
right and vertically down (This could also be achieved by entering the angle in
the correct field in the data form).
9. Now use the “Shove Up” and “Shove Left” edit buttons to locate the angle in its
final position.
10. Now use the “Copy” icon in the graphics toolbar to create a second angle
component and repeat 7, 8 and 9 to place it in the top left internal corner.
2-16
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
11. This can be repeated twice more to place angles into the bottom internal
corners such that there are a total of 5 elements in the section.
12. Although this section can be left as five separate components it may
sometimes be desirable to join these components into one shape. This is done
by selecting one of the angle components and then using the “Join” edit toolbar
button to combine it with the component touching or overlapping with it. This is
then repeated with the other three angles to give the one “define shape”
component. (The user may find that clicking just once on the “Join” button
simultaneously joins all of the components together).
13. There is now only one element in the defined section which is a “User Defined”
general section. Change the name to “500 by 900 plate girder” then click on
the button to add it to a library file. This will open a file browser form which
will allow you to choose an existing library file, if it exists, or to create a new
one. We will create a new one by entering a library file name of “My
Useful_Sections.lib” and then clicking on the Save button.
14. Close the User Defined Section Element e data form using the ✓ OK button.
15. Click on ✓ OK to close the Define Section form.
16. Use the menu item File | Save as... to save the section with a file name “My
EU Example 2_4.sam”.
Summary
Sections can be built by combining many different simple components to create more
complicated shapes. For composite sections where the components have different
material properties then the components will remain as individual entities but if the
material is the same they may be joined to form a single shape. This will allow the
section to be stored as a single user defined library section.
2-17
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
2-18
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
2.5. Encased Steel Column

Subjects Covered:
Enclosing one section in another, adjusting material properties; Universal Columns;
Import shape from Autodesk® AutoCAD®; Copying components
Outline
An oval shaped concrete column casing, with major axis 800mm and minor axis
600mm is cast concentrically around a steel Universal Column (356x368x202) as
shown below. The concrete is grade C25/30 and the structural steel has a yield
strength of 355N/mm2 and elastic modulus 210kN/mm2.
The oval outline has previously been created in AutoCAD and saved in a dxf file. This
can be imported into the program before adding the standard steel shape. This shape
is added twice, once with void properties (to create a hole in the concrete) and a
second time with steel properties.
Procedure
1. Start the program and begina new section by using the main menu item File |
2. Use the menu item File |Titles... to set the title as “Encased steel section” with
a sub-title of “Example 2.5” and change the job number to 2.5. Click on ✓ OK
to close the titles form.
3. Select Materials at the bottom of the navigation window and then open the
Property Details for the grade C32/40 concrete by clicking on it in the material
list. Change the Characteristic Cube Strength to “30MPa” (30N/mm2) and then
click the ✓ OK button on the Define Property Details form to ensure that any
changes are saved.
2-19
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
4. Select Design Section at the bottom of the navigation window and right click
anywhere in that window. This will display a pop-up menu from which Import...
should be selected. This will open a file browser in which the file “EU Example
2_5 Elipse.dxf” should be located and opened.
5. Click the Next > button on the Import Section form which has appeared on the
screen. This will display the imported shape in the graphics window and have
created a user defined entry in the navigation tree under Section Elements.
Click on this element to open the User Defined Section Element form which
shows the boundary coordinates and other data for this element.
6. Enter a Name for this component as “Encased Concrete” and set the hook
reference number to “0” with coordinates (0,0).
7. Assign a material property in the Property filed drop down list as the 30N/mm2
(C25/30) concrete.
8. Add a second Section Element using the button at the top of the navigation
window and select Steel Sections from the available list.
9. This will open the Define Section Element form in which “British Sections” is
chosen and a “Universal Column” is selected from the choice of Steel section
range. The serial size is set to “356X368” with a Weight of “202kg”. The hook
Reference point is set to “0” with coordinates set to (0, 0). The material
Property is left as “VOID” as this is going to form the hole that the steel section
will fit into. Change the Name to “Void” then close the Define Section Elements
form with the ✓ OK button.
2-20
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
10. Zoom the image in the graphics window to fit the screen using the “Fit View”
toolbar button.
11. Right mouse click on the “Void” section element in the navigation window and
select copy, to create a second instance of this shape, which will open the
Define Section Element. Set the Property of this third shape to be that of Steel,
the Hook point to 0 with the coordinates at (0,0), and Name to “Steel UC”
12. Close the Define SectionElement form using the ✓ OK button and then use the
menu item File |Save as... to save the section with a file name “My EU
Example 2_5.sam”.
Summary
This method is the easiest way of enclosing one shape within another as the “Merge”
facility used in example 2.7 only works when boundaries overlap with each other.
This process can be repeated several times to create sections such as a concrete
tube enclosed between two concentric steel tubes of different radii.
A second method, which may be necessary in some circumstances, is to create the

encasing component as a single component, without a void component, by applying a
split between the external and internal surfaces (look at the parametric shape of an
annulus as an example). Alternatively the encasement can be made up of a number
of separate components, touching at the boundaries (e.g. a box section made up from
two rectangular webs and two rectangular flanges), although this would not represent
the torsion properties correctly.
2-21
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
2-22
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
2.6. Composite Section

Subjects Covered:
Multiple components with different materials; Standard steel library shapes; Reinforce
faces; Hook Points
Outline
A composite steel girder and concrete slab is shown below. The slab is 200mm thick
and the effective width is 1500mm. Reinforcement is placed in the bottom of the slab
using 12 no. 25mm diam. Bars, equally spaced with 50mm cover to the bottom face.
The steel girder is a standard steel universal beam section classified as
914x419x388. Grade C31/40 concrete is used for the slab and the standard steel and
reinforcement materials are applied respectively. The slab is part of a wider
continuous slab.
Procedure
2. Use the main menu item File |Titles... to set the title as “Composite
steel/concrete Section” with a sub-title of “Example 2.6” and change the job
number to 2.6. Click on ✓ OK to close the titles form.
Parametric Shape which will open the Define Section Element form.
4. Set the width to be “1500mm” and the height to “200mm”. The slab is to be
positioned so that the midpoint of the bottom face is at the origin. This is done
by changing the Hook Point Reference to be “-1” and then setting the
coordinates to (0, 0).
2-23
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
5. The two short edges of the slab are identified as continuous faces by clicking
once on each (they turn to dashed lines) and the material for the slab is set to
grade C32/40 concrete by using the drop down list in the Property field.
Change the element Name to “Slab” before closing the form with the ✓ OK
button
6. Create a second element to represent the steel girder by using the button
at the top of the navigation window and selecting “Steel Sections”. Use the
dropdown list to ensure that the Steel Sections Library is set to “British
Sections” and the Steel section range to “Universal Beam”. Then select the
Serial size as “914x419” and the weight to “388kg”. Select the “Steel” material
from the Property dropdown list.
7. To locate the top of the flange at the centre of the underside of the slab,
change the Hook Point of the steel section to “-5” and set the coordinates to (0,
0).
8. Close the Define Section Element form by clicking on the ✓ OK button.
9. In the Navigation window click on Reinforcement. Set the Generate field to

“Reinforce face(s)”, set the No. of bars to “12”, set the bar Diameter to be
“25mm” and then click on the bottom edge of the slab, which will open a
secondary data form.
2-24
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
10. In this form set the cover to be “50mm” and the number of faces to be “1” and
then click on ✓ OK to draw the bars.
11. Close the Reinforcement data form using the ✓ OK button.
12. Use the menu item File | Save as to save the section with a file name “My EU
Example 2_6.sam”.
2-25
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Summary
Sections can be built by combining many different simple components to create more
complicated shapes. Special libraries have been built containing the major shapes for
steel sections which can be used to build up the section. This covers UK, American,
Australian, European and Japanese standard sections.
2-26
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
2.7. Pre-stressed section

Subjects Covered:
Precast concrete beams; Tendon definition and placement; Section outline from text
file; Initial Prestress forces; Arcs; Merging; Hook points;
Outline
It is required to generate a section of a precast edge beam comprising of a standard
YE3 precast beam (Grade C40/50 concrete) and an insitu slab and edge detail
(Grade C31/40 concrete) as shown below. The section is created using 3
components, 1) a standard precast section from a built in library, 2) a parametric
rectangular section for the slab and 3) a general defined shape with specific
coordinates for the edge detail. These sections will overlap so they must be merged
to eliminate the duplicated material.
Two rows of tendons are placed in the bottom of the beam (11 in the bottom row and
14 in the second) together with two tendons in the top. The bottom row is placed
60mm from the bottom face of the beam with the end tendons 100mm from the
vertical faces. The second row is placed 110mm from the bottom face of the beam
with the edge tendons 60mm from the vertical faces. The top two tendons are placed
800mm from the bottom face and 72mm from the edge faces. Each tendon (Grade
1776) consists of one strand of 15.2mm diameter and is initially stressed to 241kN.
X Y
1 -100 1350
2 -350 1350
3 -400 1100
4 -550 850
5 -554 753
6 -450 690
7 -100 690
8 -100 1350
Procedure
2-27
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
2. Use the main menu item File |Titles... to set the title to be “Prestressed Edge
Section”, set the sub-title to “Example 2.7” and change the job number to 2.7.
Click on ✓ OK to close the titles form.
3. Select Materials at the bottom of the navigation window and delete the
structural steel by selecting the material in the list and using the right mouse
button menu select the Delete option.
4. Open the data form for the Prestress Steel material and set the Characteristic
Tensile Strength to 1776MPa (1776N/mm2). Click ✓ OK on the warning
message. (This gives a force of 241kN when 75% is applied to a 15.2mm
diameter strand).
5. Click the ✓ OK button on both the Define Property Details form to ensure that
any changes are saved.
6. Select Design Section at the bottom of the navigation window
7. Use the button at the top of the navigation window to create a New Section
with this first element being defined by a “Concrete beam Section”. This will
display a data form (with graphic showing a standard bridge beam). Select
“British Sections” from the Concrete Beam Library drop down list and set
Concrete beam range to be “YE beam” and the Shape no. to “YE3”.
2-28
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
8. Assign grade C40/50 concrete to this component by using the drop down
selection of the Property field and manipulate the positions of the components
so that the origin is at the midpoint of the bottom face of the beam. This is
done by setting the Hook Reference point to “-1” and setting the coordinates to
(0, 0). Close this form using the ✓ OK button and select No when prompted so
that default tendons are not automatically defined.
9. Use the button at the top of the navigation window to create a second
section element as a rectangular parametric shape with a width of “600mm”
and a depth of “160mm”. Assign grade C31/40 concrete to this component and
set the Name to “Slab”
10. Now the insitu slab can be positioned by also setting the Hook point to -1 and
the coordinates to (200,870) (allowing 20mm for permanent formwork above
the rebate).
11. The two components overlap, so, to cut out the insitu slab around the beam
click on the Merge button in the graphics widow toolbar. Then close the Define
Section Element form with the ✓ OK button
12. The insitu edge detail now needs to be defined. Create a third component,
using the button at the top of the navigation window and select Section
Element - User Defined.... The coordinates, as defined in the table in the
introduction, can be entered by either typing the coordinates directly into the
shape coordinates table (using the “+” button to add a row), or by entering the
coordinates into a text file such as notepad, copying them to the clipboard <Ctrl
2-29
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
C> and then using the right mouse button menu option in the coordinate table,
pasting them in. Set the section Name to “Edge Detail”.
13. A more accurate shape can be given by fitting arcs where appropriate. Tick
the arc box in rows 3 & 5. Again the edge section overlaps the precast beam
element so cut out the edge section around the beam by clicking on the Merge
button in the graphics widow toolbar and then assign grade C32/40 concrete to
this component before closing the form with the ✓ OK button
14. To define the tendons select “Tendons” in the navigation tree which will open
up the Define Tendons data form.
15. Select “1 tendon by 2 covers” from the dropdown list in the Generate field and
set the area of strand to “181mm2” (the area of a 15.2mm diameter strand). In
the graphics window click on the left vertical face of the precast beam
(becomes bold) and then on the bottom face which displays a secondary form.
Set the Cover to face 1 to “100mm” and Cover to face 2 to “60mm”. Click ✓
OK on the Locate Tendon by 2 covers form. Notice that the force in the tendon
is 241kN (but this could be changed as necessary). Repeat this for the bottom
right corner of the beam. Repeat on the bottom right corner with covers to face
1 and 2 “6mm” and “110mm” respectively and then again on the bottom left.
2-30
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
16. Select “Draw tendons” from the dropdown list in the Generate field and change
the snap option in the graphics window toolbar to “bar/tendon”. Set Position By
to “Number” and No. of tendons to “11”. Now click on the bottom left hand
tendon in the graphics window and then again on the bottom right (generating
11 extra tendons with superimposed tendons in the corners). Repeat this for
the second row but setting the No. of tendons to 14.
17. The top two tendons are created by using “1 tendon by 2 covers” option and
selecting the vertical and bottom edges with covers of “72mm” and “800mm” for
both corners.
18. Close the Define Tendons form using the ✓ OK button. An information
message is displayed informing that superimposed tendons have been
automatically removed. Click OK on this message.
19. Use the main menu item File | Save As to save the data file as “My EU
Example 2_7.sam”.
Summary
This section is now ready for section property calculations and stress analysis. The
example shows the build up of components, using merge, arc, and hook point
facilities as well as illustrating the use of standard library shapes. The edge detail
illustrates the ability to cut and paste geometry from a spread sheet or text file.
Inserting tendons demonstrated that a tendon could be placed with respect to two
faces (which don’t have to be contiguous). The default tendon force is calculated
from the characteristic strength, the initial percentage and the tendon area, although
this will generally be adjusted to take care of losses.
2-31
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
2-32
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
2.8. Multiple Sections in a Single Project

Subjects Covered:
Multiple sections in a project; linked sections, embedded sections, data reports,
Notes, Clear Unassigned materials.
Outline
In the previous examples for defining section we have create 7 separate section files
as shown below. This example will show how to create a single project file (.sst) that
will contain all these sections (with no beams or structure).
The sections could have been created from scratch in a similar way as the single
sections we have created previously, except in a project the “Design Sections”
navigation window allows multiple sections.
However, as these single sections have already been defined we will start a new
project and link these 7 data files into the project. These sections cannot be edited
as linked files, so we will then embed these sections, which will break the link and
allow the data to be edited. An initial investigation on how data reports can be used to
secure audit trails on linked files is shown and the re-linking of the embedded data
back into separate Design section files is discussed
Procedure
1. Start the program and begin a new project by using the main menu item File |
New | Create From Template and selecting “EU Project” from the list.
2. Use the menu item File |Titles... to set the Project Title as “Multi Section
Project” with a sub-title of “Example 2.8”. Also set the Job Number to 2.8 Click
on “OK” to close the Titles form. Open the Materials navigation window and
note there are the five materials as defined in the project template.
3. Open the “Design Sections” navigation window and use the button at the
top to add an Existing Design Section, which will open a file browser.
Navigate to the file “EU Example 2_1.sam” and “open” it, which will load it as a
linked file into the navigation window. Although the data for this section file
cannot be manipulated in any way from the project it can be used in Structure
Property assignments so that section properties are automatically determined.
2-33
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
4. Repeat the step above for the other 6 sections. You should note that the
section name is taken from the “Section Title” defined in the data file.
5. For a quality audit trail it is important to establish where these files have come
from and the last modified date. This information can be found in the “Section
Overview” form which is displayed by simply clicking on the linked file in the
navigation window.
6. To obtain a single report of this information for all the sections in one go it is
possible to use the data reports from the File | Data Reports... menu item. In
the Data Reports form select “Design Sections” and ensure all the sections are
included from the drop down list before hitting the View... button.
7. This will produce a “text only” view in the Results Viewer by default but if the
“PDF View” tab is selected at the bottom of the viewer than a graphic appears
as well.
2-34
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
8. Close the Results Viewer with the Exit button and the Data Reports form with
the ✓ Done button
9. Select Design Sections at the bottom of the navigation window and then click
on the task Embed All Linked Sections
10. This operation embeds all the data from each section file and displays it in a
tree under each section in the same format as the individual section files. This
also includes things like the section notes
2-35
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
11. So if the notes are displayed for section “SS2: Voided Slab Section” it will
display the notes associated with that section regarding the continuous edges.
Close the Notes form with the ✓ OK button
12. Data Reports can now report on the entire data structure for each section if
required, not just the linked file names.
13. If the Materials navigation window is opened you will notice that some
additional materials have appeared. This is because we changed some of the
material properties when building the sections, so they have been added, –
however some of the original properties are unassigned. Select the task Clear
Unassigned to reduce the materials to 6.
14. If you click on a particular material in the navigation tree you will notice that at
the bottom of the navigation pane that it shows the components of the project
that have been assigned to that material. This is for checking purposes.
15. If, and when required, each section may be saved back to a single section file
using the “Link...” option, which will either save to a new file name, or overwrite
the original file, whichever you choose.
1. However, in this example will keep the embedded format so use the main
menu data item File | Save As to save the data file as “My EU Example
2_8.sst”.
16. Close the program
Summary
This Example shows how a project can be used to build up a library of sections in a
single project file by either importing them from existing Design Section files or by
building them up manually (Implied – not shown).
It is also shown how linked files can be embedded to break the file link and import the
raw data.
2-36
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
3. Section Analysis
Contents
3.1. General Section Properties .................................................................................... 3-3
3.2. Torsion and Shear Section Properties ................................................................. 3-13
3.3. Differential Temperature ...................................................................................... 3-19
3.4. ULS Capacity and stresses of an RC Section ...................................................... 3-25
3.5. Crack Width & Stress Calculations for an RC Section .......................................... 3-35
3.6. General Stress Strain Analysis ............................................................................ 3-43
3.7. Stresses at transfer of a prestress section ........................................................... 3-49
3.8. Staged Construction of a Composite Section ....................................................... 3-55
3.9. Bending/Axial Interaction Surfaces/Curves .......................................................... 3-63
3-1
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
3-2
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
3.1. General Section Properties

Subjects Covered:
Gross section properties; Transformed section properties; Net Transformed section
properties; Full plastic moments; Moving the section origin; Reinforcement bar
translation.; Results viewer; PDF results viewer
Outline
The calculation of section properties for three of the sections defined in section 2 will
be considered as follows:
Calculate
• Section properties of the gross section (neglecting
any difference between material properties).
• Section Properties of the transformed section
(transformed to grade C32/40 concrete).
• Transformed bending Inertia Ixx about an axis
Example 2.6 200mm below the bottom of the slab (the global
centroid axis of the complete bridge deck cross
section).
Calculate
• Net transformed Ixx (cracked section properties)
transformed to grade C32/40 concrete.
Example 2.2
Calculate
• Full plastic moment of the section according to
EN1993-1.
Example 2.4
3-3
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Procedure
1. Start the program and use the menu item File | Open to open the file “EU
Example 2_6.sam” created in example 2.6.
2. Use the menu item File | Titles to open the Titles form. Change the Sub-title
to “Example 3.1a and the Job Number to “3.1a”. Click on ✓ OK to close the
Titles form.
3. In the Design Section navigation window right mouse click and choose
Analyse Section | Section Properties which will open the form for section
property calculations. (this is also reached from the navigation window toolbar
as shown
Gross Section Properties

4. Click on the Section properties for drop down and select “Gross Section” from
the list. This will display the results shown below.
3-4
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
5. Click on the Results... button to see the detailed results as text. This can be
saved as a text file or as a Rich Text Format (rtf) file if required
6. Click on the “PDF View” tab at the bottom of the results viewer to display the
results with the graphics in the form of a PDF document. This can then be
saved as a PDF file if required. Page numbering, User defined titles and
margins can be configured using the Preferences button at the top of the
viewer.
7. Close the Results Viewer using the green EXIT button at the top.
Transformed Section Properties

8. Click on the Section properties for drop down and select “Transformed section”.
This will display the results shown below.
3-5
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
9. Click on the Results button to see the detailed results.
10. Close the results viewer.
11. Click on ✓ OK to close the Calculate Section Properties form.
Section Properties about a specified axis

For properties about a specific axis we need to define the origin of the section
at the level of the required axis. One set of properties calculated are about the
global axes.
12. In the Design Section navigation window select the “Slab” element and set the
z coordinate of the hook point to 200mm. ✓ OK to save this change
13. Repeat this for the Steel element
14. Select the “Reinforcement” item in the navigation window.
15. Click on the Edit bars... button.
3-6
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
16. Click once on the graphics window to the bottom left of the section, then move
the mouse until the selection box contains all the bars. Click again to select
the bars which will be highlighted in red. The Edit Reinforcement form will
open.
17. Click on the Edit Option drop down menu and select Y-Z Translation.
18. Change the value in the Translation dimensions – z field to “200”.
19. Click on ✓ OK to move the tendons and close the Edit Reinforcement form.
20. Click on ✓ OK to close the Define Bars and Tendons form with the changes.
21. Analyse the section by clicking on the button dropdown in the navigation
window toolbar and selecting “Section Properties”
22. Click on the Section properties for drop down and select “Transformed section”.
This will display the results shown below.
3-7
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
23. Click on the Results button to see the detailed results and scroll down the page
until the table for Transformed Section area & Properties about global axes (through y=0,z=0): is
shown:
25. Click on ✓ OK to close the Calculate Section Properties form.
26. Use the File | Save As... menu to open the Save As form.
27. Change the filename to “My EU Example3_1a.sam” And click on the “Save”
button.
Net Transformed Section Properties

28. Use the menu item File | Open to open the file “EU Example 2_2.sam” created
in example 2.2.
29. Use the menu item File | Titles to open the Titles form. Change the Sub-title
to “Example 3.1b” and the Job Number to “3.1b”. Click on ✓ OK to close the
Titles form.
30. From the navigation window select the toolbar button dropdown arrow and
select Section Properties which will open the section properties form
31. Click on the Section properties for drop down list and select “Transformed
Section”.
32. Click on the Transformed to drop down list and select “MP1: C32/40 Ecm 33.3”.
This will display the results shown below:
3-8
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
33. Click ✓ OK to close the Calculate Section Properties form.
34. Use the File | Save As... menu to open the Save As form.
35. Change the filename to “My EU Example 3_1b.sam” And click on the “Save”
button.
Plastic Section Properties

in example 2.4
37. Open the Design Section navigation window and use the toolbar button to
select the dropdown arrow and then select Section Properties which will open
the section properties form
38. Click on the Section properties for drop down list and select “Plastic Section”.
Also set the Transformed to: field to the Structural Steel material. The form will
now display the results shown below.
39. Click on the Results button to see the detailed results for the Plastic Modulus of
the Section.
The top of the results file is shown below:

3-9
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
The notes at the top of the results output are related to EN1994 for composite
sections, therefore they do not apply to this steel only section. The reason that
this is present is because there are concrete materials defined in the material
properties.
40. Close the results viewer and the analysis form and then use the Materials
navigation window task to clear unassigned materials. This should leave just
the steel material.
41. Now reanalyse the section for plastic section properties, note that the plastic
resistance moment is the same and then open the results viewer again. This
time the notes regarding EN 1994 are not present.
However, as this is a steel only section we need to comply with clause 5.5 of
EN1993-1. Assuming that the height of the web and the width of the flange are
measured from the edge of the cleat, this section is class 1 so we can therefore
use these properties for a global plastic analysis according to clause 5.6 (2) of
EN1993-1.
42. Close the results viewer and the Calculate Section Properties form by clicking
the ✓ OK button.
43. Use the File | Save As... menu to open the Save As data form and save the
data as “My EU Example 3_1c.sam”.
Summary
The calculation of section properties is very easy, but very powerful as gross,
transformed and cracked section properties can be obtained. The choice of which
property to use will depend on the type of analysis to be performed using these
properties.
Reinforced concrete sections for Ultimate Limit State calculations will generally use
gross properties whereas Composite steel and Prestressed concrete sections will
3-10
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
normally be transformed. Net transformed properties (cracked) are most useful when
considering the deflections of a reinforced concrete structure.
Fully Plastic Moments and Modulus of a steel section are useful as input to a plastic
hinge analysis of a structure and would be applied as “Member Limits” to an
Autodesk® Structural Bridge Design structural analysis.
3-11
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
3-12
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
3.2. Torsion and Shear Section Properties

Subjects Covered:
Torsion Constant; Shear Area; Shear Centre;
Outline
It is required to calculate torsion and shear section properties for three of the sections
defined in section 2 as follows:
Calculate
The torsion constant for this voided slab section (taking
50% of the beam value as it is to be used in a grillage)
The torsion constant as above but ignore the continuous
edges
(Use a torsion grid of 20 by 20)
Calculate
• The transformed torsion constant for this encased
column (transformed to concrete units)
(Use a torsion grid of 100 by 50 for the
concrete and 100 by 200 for the steel column)
Calculate
• The shear areas in both x and y direction
The shear centre coordinates
(Use a grid of 100 by 100)
Poissons Ratio = 0.2
3-13
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Procedure
Example 2_2.sam” created in example 2.2.
Voided Slab
2. Use the menu item File | Titles to open the Titles form. Change the Sub-title to
“Example 3.2a” and the Job Number to “3.2a”. Click on ✓ OK to close the
Titles form.
3. Use the Analysis toolbar button dropdown, at the top of the Design Section
navigation window, and select “Torsion and Shear...” .
4. This will display the Torsion and Shear data form. Click in the Divisions in Y
direction field and enter a value of “20”. Click in the Z direction field and enter a
value of “20”.
5. Click on the Display results for drop down menu and select “Torsion Stress
Function” from the list. Click on the  Analyse button.
6. Click on the Results button to display the Results Viewer. Note that 50% of C =
1.3069E11mm4. Close the viewer.
7. Click the ✓ OK button to close the Torsion And Shear form.
3-14
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
8. In the Design Section navigation window select the rectangular element of the
defined section, then in the graphics window click on the dotted edges of the
section until they are solid lines, making this a discrete section rather than
forming part of a continuous slab.
9. Click on the ✓ OK button to close the Define Section Element form.
10. Use the toolbar button dropdown, at the top of the Design Section
navigation window, to select “Torsion and Shear...”.
11. Click on the  Analyse button then click on the Results button to display the
Results Viewer.
Note that 50% of C = 0.70468E11mm4
12. Click on the ✓ OK button to close the Torsion And Shear form.
13. Use the File | Save As... menu to open the Save File form.
14. Change the filename to “My EU Example 3_2a.sam” and click on the “Save”
button to save the data file.
Elliptically Encased Steel Column

in example 2.5.
16. Use the menu item File | Titles to change the Sub-title to “Example 3.2b” and
the Job Number to “3.2b”. Click on the ✓ OK button to close the Titles form.
navigation window to select “Torsion and Shear...” .
18. Click in the Divisions in Y direction field and enter a value of “100”. Click in the
Z direction field and enter a value of “50”.
19. Click on the  Analyse button in the Torsion and Shear form.
3-15
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Note that the value of C in Concrete units is 1.89E10mm4.
20. Click in the Z direction field and enter a value of “200”. Click in the Element to
be analysed field and enter a value of “3” (this is the steel column).
21. Click on the  Analyse button. Note that the value of C in Steel units is
5.57E6mm4. To convert this to concrete units we multiply by the modular ratio
of the elastic modulus’ = 210/31.4758 = 6.67.
Therefore C of steel section in concrete units is 3.72E7.
The combined C is the sum of the two components = 1.89E10.
This is a lower bound value as it is assumed that in torsion, the two

components are not acting compositely and warping is not constrained.
22. Click on the ✓ OK button to close the Torsion and Shear form.
3-16
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
23. Use the File |Save As... menu to open the Save File form.
24. Change the filename to “My EU Example 3_2b.sam” and click on the “Save”
Shear Centre & Area of RC Edge Section

following the steps in example 2.1.
26. Use the menu item File | Titles to change the Sub-title to “Example 3.2c” and
the Job Number to “3.2c”. Click on the ✓ OK button to close the Titles form.
navigation window, and select “Torsion and Shear...” .
28. In the Torsion and shear form click in the Divisions in Y direction field and enter
a value of “100”. Click in the Z direction field and enter a value of “100”.
29. Click on the Display results for drop down menu and select “Shear Stress
Function” from the list. Click on the  Analyse button.
Note that the shear centre is given on the analysis form at coordinates (210,
206) and is shown by a symbol on the graphic display.The shear area
calculated, 62522mm2, is that associated with a shear force applied parallel to
the z (vertical) axis.The shear stress distribution due to a vertical force of 1kN
can be shown graphically by changing Display results for: to Shear stress ZX
(for vertical shear stresses) or Shear Stress YX (for horizontal shear stresses)
and clicking the  Analyse button.
30. Close the Torsion And Shear data form with the ✓ OK button.
31. To calculate the shear area in the Y (Horizontal) direction, the section must be
rotated around by 90 degrees. This is simply done by clicking once on the
‘Rotate by 90’ toolbar button in the Design Section navigation window
3-17
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
32. Open up the Torsion and Shear Analysis form again, set Display results for: to
“Shear Stress Function” and click on the  Analyse button.
Note that the shear centre is given as (206, -210) which is the same as before
except rotated by 90 degrees.
The shear area is, 92476mm2, and is that associated with a shear force applied
parallel to the horizontal axis in the original section orientation.
33. Click on the ✓ OK button to close the Calculate Torsion and Shear form.
34. Use the File | Save As... menu to open the Save File form.
35. Change the filename to “My EU Example 3_2c.sam” and click on the “Save”
Summary
The first example shows the effect on the torsion constant of including the
specification of continuous edges. This almost doubles the value. The 50% value
would be used in a grillage analysis because the transverse members would also
have a torsion stiffness so the total torsion stiffness is split between longitudinal and
transverse members (hence 50%).
The second example illustrates how to deal with sections made up from multiple
components having different material properties. (If they were of the same material we
could have just joined them). The program cannot deal with composite sections
directly in one pass but if we make a few assumptions, many sections can be
analysed by considering both sections separately and using a modular ratio to
combine them into one torsion constant transformed to one of the materials.
The third example illustrates how to obtain shear stress distribution in a section with
the shear centre coordinates and shear areas.
3-18
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
3.3. Differential Temperature

Subjects Covered:
EN1991 Temperature Profile; Restraining Moments; Primary differential temperature
stresses; User defined profile.
Outline
The composite section shown above has been defined and saved in example 2.6 with
a slight modification to include a 200mm by 200mm upstand on the left hand edge
constructed with grade C32/40 concrete. The previously defined continuous face on
this edge is made non-continuous. A standard temperature gradient, according to
EN1991, is applied to the section but it requires modifying it to take account of the
upstand, as shown above. It is assumed that the temperature in the upstand will be
constant and at the same value as that at the top of the slab. The effect of the
reinforcement is to be included in the calculations.
It is required to determine:
• The overall restraining moments and axial forces for both positive and
negative cases.
• The unrestrained (self equilibrating) primary stresses at the top and

bottom of each of the three components for both positive and negative
cases.
3-19
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Procedure
1. Start the program and click on the menu item File | Open... to open the file “EU
Example 2_6.sam” created in section 2.6 of this guide.
2. Use the menu item File | Titles to change the Sub-title to “Example 3.3 -
Differential Temperature” and the Job Number to “3.3”. Click on ✓ OK to close
the Titles form.
Add Upstand Edge Detail

3. In the Design Section navigation window use the toolbar button to create a
new Section element | Parametric Shape
4. In the Define Section Element Form set both the width and depth to “200mm”
then and position the Hook point “1” coordinates to (-750,200). The material
should be set to grade C32/40 concrete using the drop down list in the Property
column.
5. Set the Name field to “Edge Detail” and click on ✓ OK to close the form.
6. The left hand edge of the slab is made non-continuous by clicking on the slab
element in the navigation window, to get focus, then clicking on the left hand
edge of the slab in the graphics window. This will change it from a dashed to a
solid line. Click on ✓ OK to close the Define Section Element form.
7. Right mouse click anywhere in the Design Section navigation window and
select Analyse Section... | Differential Temperature
Apply Temperature Profile

8. In the Differential Temperature Analysis form ensure the Display radio button is
set to “Profile” and Ignore Reinforcement is unchecked
9. In the Profile part of the form set Type to be “EN 1991-1-5 Fig 6.2 Non Linear”
and the Type of Deck: to “composite decks” and the deck is “Surfaced” with a
depth of “0.1m”
This shows a profile as defined in EN1991-1-5 but the program assumes the
top of the section is the top of the upstand. We therefore need to lower this
profile so the top of it is aligned to the top of the slab. We also need to add a
constant temperature portion from the top of the slab to the top of the upstand.
3-20
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
10. To modify this profile we must now change the Type to “User Defined”
11. In the Heating Differences and Cooling Differences columns of the lower table,
change the height and temperature values to those shown below by adding a
row after the first row and then starting at the bottom of the list and work your
way up with the new values.
12. The calculations are done automatically where the fully restrained “Relaxing
Moments and Axial Forces” are displayed on the data form. Ensure that the
Ignore Reinforcement check box is “unchecked”. The primary self equilibrating
stresses are displayed by changing the Display option to “Stresses”
3-21
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
13. Click on the Detailed Results... button to see all the results including the self
equilibrating stresses.
14. Close the results viewer and the Differential Temperature Analysis form using
the ✓ OK button on the analysis form.
15. Save the data file as “My EU Example 3_3.sam” using the main menu item File
| Save As...
Summary
This example shows how to define a user specific temperature profile on a composite
steel/concrete section.
3-22
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
If a beam, made up from this section and temperature profile, was fully constrained
along its length then the following forces and moments would be induced along the
span:
Temp rise Temp fall
M Sagging F Comp M Sagging F Tension
272kNm 984kN 298kNm -776kN
The self equilibrating Primary Stresses at the top and bottom of each component can
be seen in the results shown above.
3-23
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
3-24
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
3.4. ULS Capacity and stresses of an RC Section

Subjects Covered:
Reinforce faces; 1 bar by 2 covers; Nominal Load; Gamma factors; Biaxial bending;
ULS Shear design; Iterations fail to converge
Outline
Ultimate limit state section capacities, for moments and axial force, are to be
calculated for two of the sections defined in section 2 as follows:
This precast section has 7no. 25mm bars in the

bottom faces with 50mm cover. The end bars have
50mm cover to the vertical faces. Additionally, 2no.
16mm bars are placed in the top of the upstand
with 50mm cover to both faces.
The precast beam is lifted at its ends through the
centroid of the section which generates a nominal
My bending moment of 218kNm due to its self
weight (Gamma ULS = 1.35). Check that the My
ULS capacity of the section exceeds this. What is
the angle of the neutral axis?
The precast beam is stitched to a continuous insitu
slab which forces the neutral axis to be horizontal.
What is the My ULS capacity now?
By keeping the neutral axis horizontal there is an
out of balance Mz moment which is resisted by a
transverse membrane force in the slab. What is the
value of this force if the beam is 10m long?
Save this section for use in other examples.
This column has a characteristic concentric axial

load of 1000kN together with a characteristic Mz
moment of 100kNm. What is the maximum
additional characteristic My moment that can be
applied at ULS. (Gamma ULS = 1.35)
The design moments and forces at ULS are
My = 350kNm
Axial = 1320kN
Shear along z = 180kN
What links of 10mm diameter are required? At what
value of shear force will it be necessary to have
additional links?
3-25
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Procedure
Example 2_1.sam” created in section 2.1 of this manual.
Section 1
2. Use the menu item File | Titles to change the Section Title to “Grillage Edge
Section with Reinforcement”, the Sub-title to “Example 3.4a” and the Job
Number to “3.4a”. Click on ✓ OK to close the Titles form.
Define Reinforcement
3. Open the Define Reinforcement form by clicking on the “Reinforcement” object
in the Design Section navigation window
4. Click on the Generate drop down menu and select “Reinforce Face(s)” from the
list.
5. Click in the No. Of bars field and enter a value of “7”.
6. Click in the Diameter field and enter a value of “25mm”.
7. Click on the sloping bottom face of the section on the graphics window. The
face will be highlighted in red and the Reinforcement along face(s) form will
open.
8. Click in the No. of faces field and enter a value of “2” (the default cover of
50mm is assumed) then click ✓ OK
3-26
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
9. Click on the Generate drop down menu and select “1 bar by 2 covers” from the
list.
10. Click in the Diameter field and enter a value of “16mm”.
11. Click on the left hand vertical and the top curved faces of the section on the
graphics window. Both faces will be highlighted in red and the Locate bar by 2
covers form will open.
12. Enter values of “50mm” in both the Cover to face 1 and Cover to face 2 fields
then click ✓ OK
13. Repeat 11 and 12 for the top right hand corner.
14. Click on ✓ OK to close the Define Reinforcement form.
Define Applied Forces

15. For bridge structures it is possible to define the various components of load
effects to assemble a valid EN 1990 combination with automatically applied
load and psi factors. To do this the correct bridge type must be assigned to the
section. This is done on the Section Overview form which can be accessed
from the “File | Section Overview...” menu item.
16. Set the Bridge Type to be “Road” from the dropdown list
17. Use the toolbar button in at the top of the Design Section navigation
window to create a new loadcase... which will open the Define Loadcase form.
18. Click on the other “+” button near the bottom of the form to add a row to the
table. On the first row of the table, click in the Type column and select “Y
Moment” from the drop down list.
19. Enter a value of “218kNm” in the Characteristic Effect column.
20. Enter a value of “1.35” in the Ultimate | γ column.
3-27
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
21. Click on ✓ OK to close the Define loads form.
Calculate Capacity
22. Use the toolbar button dropdown in the Design Section navigation window
to select “Bending Axial & Shear” which will open the Bending, Axial and Shear
form. Ensure that Analysis type is set to “ULS Persistent/Transient”.
23. Click on the Loadcase drop down menu and select “SL1: Loadcase” from the
list.
24. Click on the Resistance drop down menu and select “Y Moment – Positive”
from the list.
25. Click on the Neutral Axis angle drop down menu and select “Free” from the list.
26. The limiting additional load is 174.01kNm. The neutral angle axis is 35.2°.
3-28
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
27. Click on the Neutral Axis angle drop down menu and select “Fixed horizontal”
from the list. The limiting additional load is now 503.9kNm.
28. The associated Mz moment is -561.1kNm but this bending will be restrained by
the membrane action in the adjoining slab. If this is the centre section of a
10m long beam and we assume a uniformly distributed membrane force acting
in the interface between the edge beam and slab it will be 8* Mz/L2 = 45kN/m
and will be compressive.
29. Click on the ✓ OK button to close the Bending, Axial and Shear form.
30. Save the data file as “My EU Example 3_4a.sam” using the main menu item
File | Save As...
Section 2
31. Open the existing file “EU Example 2_3.sam”, created in section 2.3 of this
manual, by selecting the menu item File | Open .
32. Use the menu item File | Titles to change the the Sub-title to “Example 3.4b”
and the Job Number to “3.4b”. Click on ✓ OK to close the Titles form.
Define Applied Actions

33. Open the Define loadcase form using the toolbar button at the top of the
Design Section navigation Window and select “Loadcase...”
34. Click on the “+” (Insert record) button near the bottom of the form twice to add
2 rows to the table. On the first row of the table, click in the Type column and
select “Axial” from the drop down list. In the Action field select “User Defined”.
In the Characteristic Effect field and enter a value of “1000kN”.
35. On the second row of the table on the Define loads form, click in the Type
column and select “Z Moment” from the drop down list. In the Action field select
“User Defined”. Enter a value of “100kNm” in the Characteristic Effect column.
36. For all rows in the table, enter a value of “1.35” in the Ultimate γ column.
37. Change the Loadcase name to “ULS Capacity” and then click on ✓ OK to close
the Define loadcase form.
to open the Bending, Axial and Shear form. Ensure that Analysis type is set to
“ULS Persistent/Transient”.
39. Click on the Loadcase drop down menu and select “ULS Capacity” from the
list.
40. Click on the Resistance drop down menu and select “Y Moment – Positive”
from the list.
3-29
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
41. The maximum additional Design My moment that can be applied is

473.88kNm. The max characteristic moment is therefore 473.88/1.35 =
351.02kNm
43. Create an additional loadcase using the toolbar button at the top of the
Design Section navigation Window and change the name to “ULS Shear”
44. The ULS design moment (as opposed to nominal moments) are entered
directly into the top part of the table. In the My column (under the Ultimate
group) enter “350”. Enter “1320” in the Ax column and enter “180” in the Vz
column.
45. Click on ✓ OK to close the Define loads form. There should now be the two
loadcases shown in the navigation window
46. Use the toolbar button dropdown in the navigation window to open the
Bending, Axial and Shear form.
47. In this form click on the Resistance drop down menu and select “*Not used*”.
Select “SL2: ULS Shear” in the Loadcase field.
48. Tick the Shear Force Calcs check box.
49. Click on the Results... button to display the Results Viewer.
50. Scroll to the bottom of the Results Viewer to find the Link arrangement. The
links of 10mm diameter that are required at 347.78 for 2 legs and 695.56mm
for 4 legs.
3-30
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
The output shows the maximum spacing for columns is 253.5mm so we would
use single links at 250mm spacing.
51. Minimum reinforcement only is required because V Ed < V_Rd,c ( V Ed =

180kN and V_Rd,c = 248.73). These values can be seen on the Bending, Axial
and Shear form. If the actual shear force exceeds this value then additional
links will be required. The shear force must always be below 506.63kN no
matter how much shear reinforcement is required.
53. Save the data file as “My EU Example 3_4.sam” using the main menu item File
| Save As...
Section 3
54. Use the menu item File | Open to open the pre-prepared data file “EU Example
3_4c.sam”. In the Materials navigation window you will see that there are two
concrete materials and a reinforcement material. The concrete material that is
assigned to the section is the grade C35/45 with a rectangular stress block.
to open the Bending, Axial and Shear analysis form.
56. Ensure that Analysis type is set to “ULS Persistent/Transient”.
3-31
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
57. Click on the Resistance drop down menu and select “Y Moment - Positive”
from the list and ensure that the Loadcase field is set to “*None*”.
58. The iterative procedure fails to converge and a warning message is displayed.
59. Click on the OK button in the warning window and the Control Iterations panel
is displayed.
Note that when considering rectangular stress blocks it is inherently difficult for
the iterations process to converge to a solution using the strain compatibility
methods. We need to reduce the out of balance Mz bending moment and axial
force to values that are as close to zero as possible to obtain an approximate
solution. This can be achieved by manually controlling the iterations as
follows.
60. First of all set the Max strain to the compressive limit, which is usually 0.0035
for flexure calculations. Then use the arrowed buttons to reduce the minimum
strain in increments set by the Spin Increment. You will graphically see the
neutral axis moving up and the residual Internal Axial force reducing. Continue
with this until the axial force just changes sign as shown below.
61. The Spin increment needs to be reduced so that more refined adjustments can
be made to the residual axial internal force. Input a value of “0.000001” in the
Strain / Min / Spin Increment field and click on the arrowed buttons to reduce
the minimum strain further to the value shown below.
3-32
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Ideally the residual axial internal force would be reduced to a value closer to
zero, such that is within the default tolerance of 2kN. However, for this
example this does not seem to be possible as the discontinuity in the stress
block is in the location of the compression reinforcement area. So, we will
accept that we have reduced the residual axial internal force to within 5kN, and
this is a suitable solution.
However, we cannot get any printed results for this so if these are needed then
we need to look at different solutions. Some suggestions are shown below:
• Adjust the iteration tolerance to a value that results in a converged

solution (in this case the out of balance force at the “failure to converge”
is 22.77kN – as can be seen at the top of the analysis form – so a
tolerance of 25kN should work
• Try ignoring the compression reinforcement by ticking the appropriate

box on the analysis form
• Change the material stress strain relationship to either bi-linear or

rectangular-parabolic so there is no abrupt change in concrete stress.
To change the iteration tolerance the following steps can be taken:
62. Right mouse click anywhere in the Design Section navigation widow and select
“Tolerance...” to open the Convergence Tolerance form. Set the value in the
Axial field to “25” and click ✓ OK to close the form.
63. Re-open the Bending, Axial and Shear analysis form and the iterations
converge to a solution where the My capacity is the Limiting additional load.
This then allows the Results... button to be used to get some printable results.
Click ✓ OK on the Bending, Axial and Shear form after the results have been
inspected/saved etc..
3-33
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Summary
This example illustrates four techniques
a. How to calculate section capacities of a non symmetrical section where
natural bending occurs about a principle axis.
b. How to restrain a section so that bending occurs about a given axis and
the resultant (out of balance) moments about a perpendicular axis can
be determined.
c. Consideration of biaxial bending combined with axial forces when
applying a given set of forces and moments to a section and being able
to calculate the allowable addition forces and moments.
d. How to design shear link requirements in a column.
In addition, it shows what happens if a section fails to converge in its iterative solution
and some of the procedures that may be used to resolve this problem.
3-34
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
3.5. Crack Width & Stress Calculations for an RC Section

Subjects Covered:
SLS Limiting stresses; Defining Load Effects; EN1992-1-1; Interpolation between long
and short term modulus; Maximum crack widths; Crack widths between specific bars.
Outline
The calculation of Serviceability limit state stresses and maximum crack widths are to
be calculated for the edge section, with reinforcement defined in section 3, under two
load/design situations.
Design situation 1
• The precast beam is lifted at its ends through the centroid of the section which
generates a nominal My bending moment of 218kNm due to the dynamic effect
on its self weight. Check that the concrete and steel stresses do not exceed
the SLS limits using the characteristic combined capacity.
• Check the crack widths for this design situation using the SLS Frequent
combination of actions (not normally a requirement for this design situation but
shown for completeness).
Design situation 2
• When the section is attached to the cast in place slab the Neutral axis is forced
to be horizontal. The dead load nominal moment is 126kNm (SLS Gamma=
1.0) and the live load moment is 254kNm (SLS Gamma= 1.0). What are the
concrete & reinforcement stresses for this case if an interpolated elastic
modulus is used?
• What is the max crack width (clause 7.3.4) for this case.
• What is the crack width (clause 7.3.4) between the two left most bars in the
bottom face.
3-35
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Procedure
Example 3_4a.sam”
2. Use the menu item File | Titles to change the Sub-title to “Example 3.5” and
the Job Number to “3.5”. Click on ✓ OK to close the Titles form.
Design Situation 1
Define Load Effects
Note that this design situation is about a beam being lifted into position using a
crane, hence we have assumed that the combination is SLS Characteristic rather
than SLS Quasi-Permanent.
3. The existing loadcase will be modified by selecting the loadcases object

“SL1: Loadcase” in the Design Section navigation window which will open the
Define Loadcase form.
4. Select “SLS Characteristic” in the Combination field of the table at the top of
the form and select “Var – Leading” in the Permanent / Variable field of the
Applied forces, if it is not already set to this. Click ✓ OK to close the Define
Loads form
Calculate Stresses
5. From the Design Section navigation window toolbar use the dropdown to
select Bending, Axial and Shear which will open the appropriate analysis
form.
6. Ensure that Analysis type is set to “SLS Characteristic” and select “SL1:
Loadcase” in the Loadcase drop down.
7. Select “*Not used*” in the Resistance drop down.
8. Select “Free” in the Neutral Axis angle drop down and OK the error message
that may appear as it is just a warning.
9. Open the results viewer with the Results button. The tables of Maximum and
Minimum Strains show the concrete and steel stresses to be 20.34N/mm2
and -219.99N/mm2 respectively (we can compare these with the allowable
3-36
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
limits of 19.125N/mm2 for the concrete and -400N/mm2 for the reinforcement
showing an overstress in the concrete (as noted in the error message).
Crack Width Checks

11. Select “SLS Frequent” in the Analysis type field and tick the Crack Width
Calcs tick box. Note that the crack width is 0.158mm before closing the
Bending, Axial and Shear form with ✓ OK.
Design Situation 2
12. Create a second loadcase by using the icon in the Design Section
navigation toolbar and selecting “Loadcase”. Change the name to “Loadcase
2”.
13. Use the “+” button near the bottom of the form to add 2 rows to the table.
14. On the first row of the table, select “Y Moment” from the drop down options in
the Type column.
16. Select “Perm” from the Permanent/Variable drop down options.
17. On the second row of the table, select “Y Moment” from the Type column
drop down options.
19. Select “Var-Leading” in the Permanent/Variable field.
20. The values in the Serviceability γ column for both rows should be set to “1”.
21. In the line of data at the top of the form set the Combination to “SLS
Characteristic”.
22. Close the Define loads form with the ✓ OK button.
3-37
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Stress Checks
23. From the Design Section navigation window toolbar use the dropdown to
select Bending, Axial and Shear which will open the appropriate analysis
form. Click on OK on the information message.
24. Click on the Loadcase drop down and select “SL2: Loadcase: 2” from the list.
Again, click ✓ OK on the error message form.
25. Click on the Neutral Axis angle drop down and select “Fixed horizontal” from
the list.
26. Click on the Resistance drop down and select “*Not used*” from the list.
27. Click on the Set Parameters for drop down and select “Serviceability
Calculations” from the list. This will open the Design Data for Serviceability
Calculations form.
28. Confirm that the Elastic modulus used field is set to “Interpolated” and use ✓
OK to close the form.
29. Click on the Results button to open the Results Viewer.
30. The concrete and reinforcement stresses are shown in the MAXIMUM and
MINIMUM Strains table. The concrete stress is 16.94N/mm2 and the
reinforcement stress is -211N/mm2. Close the Results Viewer.
3-38
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Crack Width Checks

31. In the Bending, Axial and Shear form and select “SLS Quasi-permanent” in
the Analysis type field.
This analysis type can be selected because the edge section is now part of
the structure and permanent dead loads are being considered combined with
live loads.
32. Tick the Crack Width Calcs tick box and open the results viewer. Which
shows that the section is uncracked.
33. Close the Results Viewer and click ✓ OK to close the Bending, Axial and
Shear form.
To force the section to crack we can set the tensile strength of the concrete
material to zero, but bear in mind that this value will also be used in
calculation of the crack spacing – as will be shown in the results
34. In the Materials navigation window select the “C32/40” concrete property
which will open the Define Property Details form.
35. Set the value of Tensile Strength, fctm to “0” and use ✓ OK to close the form.
36. In the Design Section navigation window toolbar use the dropdown to
select Bending, Axial and Shear to analyse again. The maximum crack width
is now 0.127mm.
3-39
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
37. It is also possible to find the crack width between specified bars. We want to
find out the crack width between the two outermost bars at the left hand side
of the beam.
38. To do this draw a box around the two bars. Open the Results Viewer to
display the crack width calculations considering just those bars. The
maximum crack for those bars is 0.0597mm.
39. Close the Results Viewer and use ✓ OK to close the Bending, Axial and
Shear form.
40. Use the File | Save As... menu item to save the data file as “My EU Example
3_5.sam”.
Summary
The first design situation considers the lifting of the beam where it will bend about the
principle axis. The value of the bending moment is greater than just the dead load
bending moment to take into account the dynamic effects of the lifting.
The max concrete stresses can be obtained from the graphics, but the reinforcement
stresses can only be obtained from the results output.
3-40
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
The second design situation illustrates the calculation of stresses and crack widths at
SLS when some of the load is long term permanent load and the rest is instantaneous
live load. The method used is an interpolation between the long and short term
modulus so the stresses calculated are those that would occur at the end of the
structure life. To check the stresses just after construction, the long term modulus
would need to be modified, so as to represent the correct amount of creep, or the user
can choose to use the short term modulus only.
3-41
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
3-42
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
3.6. General Stress Strain Analysis

Subjects Covered:
General stress strain materials
Outline
For the Steel/Concrete composite beam, defined in section 2, it is required to
calculate the bending resistance (sagging and hogging) about the horizontal axis and
to examine the stress distribution due to an axial tensile load of -4000kN and a
sagging bending moment of 4000kNm.
This is done using the “General Stress Strain” analysis type, but before this can be
carried out the material properties need to be defined as “general stress strain” type
material with specific strain limits.
The concrete has the same configuration and strain limits as Eurocode concrete with
the characteristic strength of grade C32/40 concrete.
The structural steel is defined as elastic/plastic with a stress limit set to 355/1.0 =
355N/mm2 (S355 grade steel as defined in EN10025-2).
The reinforcement is modelled as ‘reinforcing steel – inclined’ and specified as a

general stress-strain material of type ‘elastic-plastic with offset’. The stress and strain
limits should be set with the start yield strain set as ±0.002 (stress = ±435N/mm2) and
full yield strain set as ±0.045 (stress = ±466N/mm2).
3-43
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Procedure
1. Start the program and open the data file “EU Example 2_6.sam” using the File
| Open menu item.
2. Use the File | Titles menu item to change the Section Title to “General Stress
Strain Analysis”, the Sub-title to “Example 3.6” and the Job Number to “3.6”.
Click on ✓ OK to close the Titles form.
3. Display the Materials navigation window and add an additional “Defined Stress-
Strain” type material using the button in the toolbar. This should open the
Defined Property Details form.
4. Change the Factored Strength to “21.25” (ie fcd = fck / γc = 31.875/1.5) and
choose “Parabolic-Rectangular” from the dropdown in the Defined Stress-
Strain Type field. This opens a secondary form in which the Set Curve Default
to: field should be set to “Eurocode 2”. Close this secondary form and set the
Modulus of Elasticity to 33.3145GPa and the Property Name to be “Defined
grade C32/40 Concrete” before closing the Define Property Details form with
the ✓ OK button.
5. Add another material as a “Defined Stress-Strain” type. Set the Factored

strength to “355MPa” (ie. 355/1.0) and the Defined Stress-Strain Type to
“Elastic Plastic”. Note that the default strain at yield is +/-0.001775 (giving an
elastic modulus of 200kN/mm2.) Change both tension and compression values
to +/-0.00169048 to give an elastic modulus of 210kN/mm2. Close the
secondary form and ensure that the Strain Limit is set to 0.01. Set the Property
Name to “Defined Structural Steel” before closing the Define Property Details
3-44
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
6. Add a third new material as a “Defined Stress-Strain” type. Set the Factored
strength to “466MPa” and the Defined Stress-Strain Type to “Elastic-Plastic
with offset”. For reinforcement to Eurocodes the compressive full yield stress is
reduced to 466MPa at a strain of 0.045. The compressive start yield stress
435Mpa at a strain of 0.002. Enter this information in the Define Stress-Strain
Relation data form and then close this form using the ✓ OK button. Set the
Strain Limit to 0.04501 and the Property Name to “Defined Reinforcement”
before closing the Define Property Details form. Click ✓ OK on the Define
Property Details form.
7. This has now completed the new material property definition so close the
Define Material Properties form with the ✓ OK button.
8. This file is now going to be saved as a template that can be used as a starting
point for other general stress strain section analyses.
9. Use the menu item File| Save as Template | My Template... to open the save
template form and save it as “My EU Example 3_6.sbt” in the folder that holds
all the “My Template” files (which can be found using the Options |
Preferences menu item).
10. Change to the Design Section navigation window
11. Select the “slab” element in the navigation tree, which will open the Define
Section Element form. Change the property to be the “Defined grade C32/40
Concrete” property and close the form with the ✓ OK button.
12. Repeat this for the steel section changing the property to be the “Defined
Structural Steel” property. Close this form with the ✓ OK button.
3-45
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
13. Select “Reinforcement” in the navigation tree, which will open the Define
Reinforcement form and click on the “Edit bars...” button. Click in the graphics
screen to place a window around all the bars (they will turn red) and a
secondary Edit Reinforcement data form will be displayed. Change the Edit
Option to “Change Property” and set the Bar property to “Defined-
Reinforcement”. Close both forms with the ✓ OK button.
14. Open the Define Loadcase data form using the button in the navigation
window toolbar, and select Loadcase. Then enter “4000” and “-4000” in the
My and Ax fields in the Ultimate sections of the top table. Close the Define
Loads data form using the ✓ OK button.
15. To analyse the section click on the drop down part button in the navigation
toolbar and select General Stress Strain.
16. Set the Loadcase to “SL1: Loadcase” and Resistance to “*Not used*”. Ensure
that the Analysis type field is set to “General Stress/Strain”. The maximum and
minimum stresses can be obtained from the results viewer by clicking on the
Results button.
3-46
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
17. Produce a print preview of the combined text output and graphics by using the
Print Preview menu item which may be found under the “More Buttons” tab
located immediately to the right of the “Save as...” button on the Results Viewer
form. Both the print Preview and results viewer windows can be closed.
18. To obtain the sagging bending moment resistance set the Loadcase field to
“None” (clicking ✓ OK on the error message) and the Resistance to “Y Moment
– Positive”. The resistance will be shown as the Limiting Additional Load on
the Bending, Axial and Shear form.
19. Click ✓ OK To close the form.
20. Close all the data forms and save this data file as “My EU Example 3_6.sam”
using the File | Save As... menu item.
3-47
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Summary
This example shows how any material with a known stress strain relationship can be
defined. These materials can then be assigned to components of a section and a
general strain compatibility analysis carried out to obtain limiting capacities or stresses
for a given set of loads.
3-48
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
3.7. Stresses at transfer of a prestress section

Subjects Covered:
Prestress Tendons; Relaxation loss; Elastic Loss; Interpolated/short term Modulus;
User Notes; Stress/Strain calculation Reports; Inverted Neutral Axis for Hogging.
Outline
The pre stressed section defined in Chapter 2 is opened and the slab and edge
section are removed from the section definition.
The section represents the mid span section of a 25m long beam which has been cast
and stressed and is about to be released from its mould. The concrete strength at
this stage is based on grade C32/40 concrete and the relaxation loss in the tendon
force is assumed to be 1.25%. The self weight moment is calculated based upon a
weight density of 24kN/m3 and applied in the load table. (Note however that a density
of 25kN/m3 is used for some other examples in the manual to allow for the additional
1kN/m3 due to the tendons).
An SLS stress analysis is carried out assuming that the neutral axis remains
horizontal, and the elastic modulus is set to the short term modulus.
The stress results are the stresses in the concrete taking into account the losses in
the tendons due to the elastic deformation of the concrete. By temporarily setting the
elastic modulus of the concrete to a very high value (say 10000kN/mm2) the resulting
stresses are those without elastic deformation losses.
3-49
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Procedure
1. Start the program and use the menu item File | Open to open the file “My EU
Example 2_7.sam” created in Chapter 2 of this manual.
2. Use the menu item File | Titles to change the Section Title to “Prestressed
Section Analysis”, the Sub-title to “Example 3.7” and the Job Number to “3.7”.
Click on ✓ OK to close the Titles form.
3. In the Design Section navigation window select the “Slab” element from the
navigation tree and then use the “-“ button in the toolbar to delete this element.
4. Repeat this for the “Edge Detail” element so that it just leaves the “YE3 Beam”.
5. Select the “YE3 Beam element from the navigation tree and assign the Grade
C32/40 concrete by using the drop down selection of the Property field. Click
on the ✓ OK button to close the Define Section Element form.
6. To find the cross-sectional area of the beam, use the “Analyse” button
dropdown to select “Section Properties” to open the Calculate Section
Properties form.
7. The cross-sectional area is 0.522m2. If we assume that the weight density is

24kN/m3 and the length of the beam is 25m, then an My bending moment of
978.75kNm (i.e 0.522×24×25x25/8) must be applied to the beam.
8. Click on the ✓ OK button to close the Calculate Section Properties form.
9. Open the Define Loadcase data form using the button in the navigation
window toolbar, and select Loadcase.
10. Click on the “+” button near the bottom of the form to add a row to the table. In
this added row select “Y Moment” from the Type drop down list and enter a
value of “978.75kNm” in the Characteristic Effect column. Also, set the
Permanent/Variable field to “Perm”.
3-50
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
11. In the data at the top part of the form set the Combination to “SLS
Characteristic” and change the loadcase name to “Loadcase 1”.
12. Click on the ✓ OK button to close the Define Loadcase form.
13. The relaxation loss in the tendon force must be accounted for before analysing.
Open the Define Tendons form selecting “Tendons” in the navigation tree.
14. The tendon forces are 241kN and must be reduced by 1.25%. Click on the
“Edit Tendons” button. Window around the whole section in the graphics
window to select all of the tendons. This will open the Edit Tendons sub form.
On the sub form set the Edit Option field to “Change force” and enter a value of
“238kN” in the Tendon Force field. Click ✓ OK on the sub form.
15. Click on the ✓ OK button to close the Define Tendons form.
16. It is useful to make a note of this in the User Notes form which can be opened
up by right mouse clicking anywhere in the navigation window and selecting
“Notes...” Enter the following text “Tendon forces have been reduced from
241kN to 238kN to represent relaxation losses at transfer.” Then close the
17. Now use the button dropdown to select “Bending Axial and Shear” to open
the Bending Axial and shear analysis form and dismiss the error message.
18. Ensure that Analysis type is set to “SLS Characteristic”. Click on the Neutral
Axis angle drop down and select “Set angle to” from the list. Click in the
corresponding edit box and enter a value of “180°”. (This is necessary as the
bottom of the beam is more compressive than the top).
19. By default the elastic modulus used in the calculations will be interpolated
between the long and short term values and as the load is totally “Permanent”
the modulus will be equal to the long term value. To force the short term value
to be used we use the Set Parameter for: field to “Serviceability Calculations”
and in the displayed sub-form set Elastic Modulus used: to “Short Term”. Close
the sub-form with the ✓ OK button.
3-51
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
20. The iterations now converge and the graphic display is shown as:
21. Click on the Results button to display the Results Viewer.
22. The maximum stress in the tendons is -1211.117N/mm2. The minimum stress
is -1286.991N/mm2.
3-52
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
The full stress in the tendon should be the tendon force divided by the tendon
area = 238000/181 = 1314.9N/mm2. The difference in these values is due to
elastic deformation losses.
23. Close the results viewer and then click on the ✓ OK button to close the
Bending, Axial and Shear form.
24. Change to the Materials navigation window and select the Grade C32/40
concrete in the navigation tree. On the Define Property Details form, click in the
Modulus of Elasticity field and enter a value of 10000GPa. The program will
display a warning message saying “Outside expected range”. Click on the OK
button.
25. Close the Define Property Details form with ✓ OK and then change to the
Design Section navigation window.
26. Click on the Analyse toolbar button in the navigation widow to open the
Bending, Axial and Shear form. Click OK on the Error message (note that the
section is over-stressed – this would obviously require action, but for this
example we will ignore it) and then click on the Results button to display the
Results Viewer.
27. The maximum and minimum stresses without elastic deformation losses are
now -1314.526N/mm2 and -1314.836N/mm2 respectively.
28. Close the Results Viewer and click on the ✓ OK button to close the Bending,
Axial and Shear form.
29. Change the material back to default grade C32/40 concrete by opening the
Define Material Properties form, clicking on the grade C32/40 concrete and
then clicking on the “Default” button on the Define Property Details form.
Confirm that you want to reset to default values by clicking on “Yes” on the
form that appears. Now enter a cube strength value of “40” and press the
“enter” key. Close the material form with the ✓ OK button..
30. Save the data file to “My EU Example 3_7.sam” using the menu item File |
Save As...
3-53
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Summary
This example demonstrates the effect of including prestress tendons in a section.
The resultant stresses are due to the prestress force and the moments from the dead
weight of the beam. If it was required to see the stresses from the prestress only,
then a very small dead load could be applied.
It should be noted that although relaxation losses are included in the material form for
pre-stressing tendons, this data is not used as the section analysis is not fixed to a
given time. This is why the tendon forces were modified manually to set the
relaxation loss to 1.25%.
The stress diagrams are always produced with compressive forces at the top. If a
hogging moment is applied to a section it automatically inverts the section. In the
prestress case the applied moment is sagging but the prestress provides higher
compressive stress at the bottom of the beam. This is why the neutral axis needed to
be inverted manually.
3-54
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
3.8. Staged Construction of a Composite Section

Subjects Covered:
Section Stages; Saving Intermediate Files; Initial Strains; General Stress/Strain
Analysis
Outline
A 30m long composite beam is constructed in two stages. 1) The steel beam
supports its own weight plus the weight of the wet concrete (24kN/m3 density of
concrete – 77kN/m3 density of steel). 2) The beam becomes composite and supports
an additional mid-span design moment of 1500kNm due to surfacing. Determine the
as-built stresses due to this loading.
(Note that a concrete density of 25kN/m3 is used for some other examples in the
manual to allow for the additional 1kN/m3 due to the reinforcement or tendons)
Use the composite section saved in the General stress strain example. Determine the
areas of both beam and slab so that the dead load mid-span moments can be
determined. Delete the slab and reinforcement element from the section and apply
the dead load moment. Carry out a general stress strain analysis to determine the
strains in the steel beam. Add back the slab and reinforcement elements and apply
the strains from the first analysis as initial strains. An additional bending moment of
1500kNm is then applied before carrying out a second general stress strain analysis
of the whole section to determine the stresses.
As this analysis requires two section, one for the steel beam only and the other the
composite section, we will carry this out in multi-section project so all data is available
in one file rather than two.
3-55
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Procedure
1. Start the program and use the menu item File | New | Create from template...
and then double clicking on “EU Project”. This will create a new project with
pre-defined materials that were defined in section 1 of the manual
2. Use the menu item File | Titles to input the Project Title as “Composite Section
Staged Construction”, the Sub-title to “Example 3.8” and the Job Number to
“3.8”. Click on ✓ OK to close the Titles form.
3. In the Design Sections navigation window click on the toolbar button and
select “Existing Design Section” which will allow you to select the file “EU
Example 3_6.sam” which was created in section 3.6 of this manual. This
creates a linked section – which we cannot edit directly - so we need to change
it to an embedded section by right clicking on it in the navigation window and
selecting “Break Link”.
4. The existing loadcase needs to be deleted so select it in the navigation window

and then use the “-“ toolbar button to delete it (and close any other forms that
may pop up).
5. Copy this section in its entirety by selecting the section “SS1” in the navigation
window, right mouse clicking and selecting “copy” from the resulting context
menu.
6. Rename “SS1” section to “Stage 1 Section” and “SS2” section to “Stage 2

Section”. This is done by selecting each of the sections in turn and then the
right mouse click will allow the option to rename.
7. Remove the reinforcement for Stage 1 section by selecting “Reinforcement” in

the navigation tree for this section, which will display the Define Reinforcement
form. The Clear button will remove all reinforcement before closing the form
with the ✓ OK button.
8. Remove the “Rectangle” element for stage 1 section by selecting it in the

navigation tree and deleting it with the “-” button in the navigation toolbar.
Close any other forms that may be open
3-56
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Determine and Define Dead Loads

9. With “SS2: Stage 2 Section” selected, find the cross-sectional area of the
beam, use the toolbar button dropdown to select “Section Properties”
which will open the Section Properties form.
10. Click on the Results button to open the Results Viewer. The area of the slab is
0.3m2. The area of the beam is 0.04942m2.
11. Close the results viewer and click on the ✓ OK button to close the Section
Properties form.
12. The dead load moment to be applied for the concrete slab is 810kNm
(0.3×24×302/8). The dead load moment to be applied for the steel beam is
428.1kNm (0.04942×77×302/8). These should both be applied to Stage 1
Section.
13. With “SS1: Stage 1 Section” selected in the navigation window, create a new
loadcase for this section by clicking on the toolbar button at the top of the
navigation window and selecting “Loadcase...”. This will open the Define
Loadcase form.
14. Create 2 new components to this load case by clicking twice in the “+” button at
the bottom of the table
15. On the first row of the table, click in the Type column and select “Y Moment”
from the drop down list. Enter a value of “810kNm” in the Characteristic Effect
field. On the second row of the table, click in the Type column and select “Y
Moment” from the drop down list. Enter a value of “428.1kNm” in the
Characteristic Effect field. Select “Perm” from the Perm/Variable drop down list
in both rows. Select “User defined” in the Action column on both rows. Change
the Ultimate γ factors to 1 by entering “1.00” in the relevant fields and pressing
‘Enter’ on the keyboard. Click on the ✓ OK button to close the Define Loads
form.
3-57
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Determine strains on Steel Beam

16. With “SS1: Stage 1 Section” selected, right mouse click and select
“Tolerances”. Change the tolerance for the three effect components from “2.0”
to “0.1” before closing the form with OK. Then use the toolbar button
dropdown to select “General Stress Strain” which will open the General Stress /
Strain form. Ensure that Loadcase: is set to “SL1: Loadcase” and Resistance:
is set to “*Not Used*”. Click on the “Results” button to open the Results Viewer.
17. The maximum and minimum strains in the beam are 0.00037849 and
-0.00037849 respectively. Close the Results Viewer and click on the ✓ OK
button to close the General Stress Strain form.
Apply Stage 1 Strains as Initial Strains in Stage 2

18. In the navigation window select “Initial Strains” for section “SS2: Stage 2
Section” to open the Define Initial Strains data form.
19. Click on the “+” button at the bottom of the form to create an entry. The Steel
beam should be chosen from the drop down in the Section Element field and
the Maximum field set to “0.00037849” and the Minimum field set to
“-0.00037849”. If the “Enter” key is pressed the graphics displays the applied
strains and resultant stresses.
3-58
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
20. Click on the ✓ OK button to close the Define Initial Strains form.
Apply Moment Due To Surfacing

21. Select the loadcase already defined for stage 1 in the navigation window which
will open the Define Loadcases form. Right mouse click in the applied forces
table and select “Copy Table to Clipboard”. Close the form with the ✓ OK
button.
22. With “SS2: Stage 2 Section” selected in the navigation window, create a new
loadcase for this section by clicking on the toolbar button at the top of the
navigation window and selecting “Loadcase”. This will open the Define
Loadcase form. Right mouse click in the Applied Forces Table and select
“Paste From Clipboard (Replace), which will add two rows to the load table. In
both of these rows re-set the Gamma factor to “1.0”
23. Click on the “Insert Record” button near the bottom of the form to add a third
row to the table. On the third row of the table, click in the Type column and
select “Y Moment” from the drop down list. Enter a value of “1500kNm” in the
Characteristic Effect field. Select “Perm” from the Perm/Variable drop down
list. Select “User defined” in the Action column on the third row. Change the
Gamma values to 1 by entering “1.00” in the relevant fields.
NB. Although, strictly speaking, the strains resulting from the first two loads
have already been added, the loads must remain in the table for the program to
perform the calculations correctly.
24. Click on the ✓ OK button to close the Define Loads form.
Calculate Final Stresses/Strains

25. Use the toolbar button dropdown to select “General Stress Strain” which
will open the General Stress / Strain form. Ensure that the Loadcase: is set to
“SL1”and Resistance: is set to “*Not Used*”
3-59
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
26. Click on the Results button to open the Results Viewer.
The maximum and minimum stresses for the concrete slab are 4.18N/mm2 and
2.40N/mm2 respectively.
The maximum and minimum stresses for the steel beam are 108.33N/mm2 and
-156.49N/mm2 respectively.
27. Close the Results Viewer and click on the ✓ OK button to close the General
Stress/Strain form.
28. Save the data file as “My EU Example 3_8.sam” by using the menu item File |
Save As...
Compare with Non-Staged Construction Analysis

29. To compare the as-built stresses to those that result from applying the load
cases in one go to the whole section we can re-analyse the SS2: Stage 2
Section with the initial strains removed.
30. Select the “Initial Strains” item in the navigation tree for the Stage 2 section.
Click on the “Clear” button to remove the initial strains. Click the “Yes” button in
the confirmation box that appears. Click on the ✓ OK button to close the Define
Initial Strains form.
31. Re-Analyse this section for general stress strain and click on the “Results”
button to open the Results Viewer. The tables below show the comparative
stresses:
In Stages Composite
Max Stress 4.18 N/mm2 7.37 N/mm2
Min Stress 2.40 N/mm2 4.375 N/mm2
Stress comparison table for Defined grade C32/40 Concrete
3-60
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
In Stages Composite
Max Stress 108.33 N/mm2 55.06 N/mm2
Min Stress -156.49 N/mm2 -141.5 N/mm2
Stress comparison table for Defined Structural Steel
32. Close the Results Viewer and click on the ✓ OK button to close the General
Stress Strain form.
33. Close the program without re-saving the data file.
Summary
A staged construction must be carried out as two or more separate analyses. The
first analysis considers the first stage section components only and a load applied to
represent the total load at this stage. From this analysis the max & min strains of the
first stage components can be determined.
The second analysis includes stage 1 and stage 2 section components and the full
load at this stage applied. Stresses and strains at this stage are then available.
If required, the strains at this stage can be used as input to further stages.
Also note that the strains shown on the graphic are the additional strains due to the
additional load – not the total strains – these are shown in the text results. The
stresses on the graphics are the total stresses but can also be obtained from the
printed results.
3-61
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
3-62
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
3.9. Bending/Axial Interaction Surfaces/Curves

Subjects Covered:
Reinforced concrete column; General Stress/Strain Sections; Effective lengths;
slenderness moments
Outline
Using three pre-prepared section files, this example examines the interaction
diagrams for bi-axial bending and axial forces at Ultimate Limit state and
demonstrates how these can be used to obtain factors of safety on a number of
permanent and variable load cases. One part of the example shows how this can be
applied to prestressed sections and another shows how it can be used on steel
sections for fully plastic moments
• This three armed column section file is

provided with one permanent load case and
four variable load cases.
• Append the permanent loads into the four live
load combinations
• Create the interaction surface with 90 NA
increments and 50 strain increments and
display the 3D shape for all load cases.
• Determine a table of factors of safety on the
variable load for all load cases.
EU Example 3.9a
• Create an interaction curve along the variable
load vector in a vertical plane for the first
variable load case.
• This section file contains a standard YE5

prestressed section with the bottom two rows
and the top row fully stressed with default
prestressing strand (horizontal top branch of
stress strain diagram).
• Create an interaction surface using 90 NA
increments and 50 strain increments.
Produce graphical displays for both
elevations and plan.
• Export the surface results to a spreadsheet
and sort the data to establish maximum and
EU Example 3.9b minimum values of My bending, Mz bending
and axial force.
• Examine the effect on these values if the
prestress is set to zero
3-63
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
• This steel plate girder section file was created

in section 3.1 of this example manual and the
unused material deleted. It is required to
establish if the standard interaction curves for
ULS analysis would be appropriate to
represent the fully plastic resistance of the
section.
• Analyse for plastic section properties to
establish Mult,p in both My and Mz directions
together with the section area to establish the
plastic axial resistance.
• Create 3 load cases with the My, Mz and
axial forces from above. The interaction
surface analysis should show the factors of
safety to be 1.0 in each direction
EU Example 3.9c • Create a fourth load case with permanent

values of My = 2200kNm, Mz =0kNm, Ax =
3042kN and variable load values of My =
3500kNm, Mz = 517kNm and Ax = 4850kN.
What is the plastic factor of safety for the
variable loads
Procedure
Three Armed Column

1. Start the program and use the File | Open menu item to open the file “EU
Example 3_9a.sam” provided.
2. Use the File | Titles menu item to enter your initials in the Calculations by:
field. Click on the ✓ OK button to close the Titles form.
In the navigation window you will see 5 loadcases that have already been
created. The first contains all the permanent load effects and the others
contain different combinations of variable load effects. It is required to append
the permanent loads into each of the variable loadcase tables.
3. Select the “Permanent Load” case to open the Define Loadcase form. In the
lower table, right mouse click and select Copy Table to Clipboard before
closing the form with “OK”.
4. Open the second load case data form and right mouse click in the bottom table.
From the context menu select Paste From Clipboard (Append) to add the
permanent load effects and then close the form with “OK”
5. Repeat this for the remaining three load case tables.
6. From the navigation window toolbar select the analyse dropdown and
select Interaction Surface... to open the Interaction Surface form.
3-64
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
7. Set the NA Angle Increments: field to “90” and the Strain Angle Increments field
to “50” before clicking on the Analyse button.
The graphics then displays the 3D interaction surface together with vectors
representing both permanent and variable components of each load case. The
variable vectors are extended until they intersect with the surface. The
performance ratio of each of the variable vectors is also shown on the diagram
Different and dynamic views can be obtained using the buttons in the toolbar
8. In the Interactive Surface form click on the Results... button to open the Results
Viewer. This will provide a table of loadcases with the applied load effects and
performance ratios. (Note the Factor of Safety is 1/performance ratio)
3-65
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
9. Close the Results Viewer
10. To take a slice through the interaction surface a particular load case is selected
in the data form and the boundary curve is drawn on a plane which is vertical
and directed along the variable vector of the load case. In the Interaction
Surface form select “SL2:” in the Loadcase field.
11. If the cursor is placed over the blue intersection point the moment and force
values are shown in the status bar at the bottom of the graphics window.
12. Use the ✓ OK button to close the Interaction Curves form.
13. Use the File | Save As... menu item to save the data file to “My EU Example
3_9a.sam” and click on the “Save” button to save the data file.
Prestressed YE Beam
14. Use the File | Open menu item to open the file “EU Example 3_9b.sam”.
select Interaction Surface... to open the Interaction Surface form.
17. Set the NA Angle Increments field to “90” and the Strain Angle Increments field
to “50” before clicking on the Analyse button. In the graphics window change
the viewing angle to My-N view using the graphics toolbar buttons
It is required to determine the max and min My moment with zero axial force
and zero Mz moment. As shown below
3-66
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
To do this we need to create two load cases, one with a nominal +My moment
and the other with a nominal –My moment.
18. Click on the ✓ OK button to close the Interaction Surface form.
19. In the navigation window use the toolbar button to add a Loadcase...
Change the Name to “Nominal +My” and enter a value of “1000” in the Ultimate
| My field before closing the form with the ✓ OK button.
20. Repeat this for a second load case, naming it “Nominal –My” and entering a
value of “-1000” in the Ultimate | My field.
21. Open the Interaction Curve form again, as before, and Analyse.
22. Selecting Loadcase: SL1 Nominal +My in the data form changes the graphics
to a section view with the plane of the section being along the My axis and
vertical.
23. Moving the cursor over the intersection point displays the My value at the
bottom of the window – which is 3469kNm. If the load case is changed to the –
ve My case then the My value at the other end is -575kNm. Close the
Interaction Surface form with the ✓ OK button
To examine the effect of reducing the prestressing force to zero it in necessary

to open the tendon definition form and change the tendon forces to 0.0
3-67
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
24. Select Tendons in the navigation window and in the Define Tendons form click
on the Edit tendon... button. Draw a box around all the tendons in the graphics
window and in the Edit Tendons form change the Edit Option: to “Change
Force” and set the Tendon Force: value to “0.0” before closing both forms with
the ✓ OK button.
25. Repeat steps 20, 21 and 22 to get a +My value of 2640kNm and a –My value
of -841kNm.
26. Before closing the Interaction Surface Form change Loadcase: to “Select All”
and then click on the Export Surface... button to save the results into a
spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be opened and the data sorted with
respect to one of the columns – e.g. My – so the largest and smallest values
can easily be found together with associated Mz and Ax values. This output is
also very useful if you wish to carry out your own post-processing on these
results
27. Close the Interaction Surface form for with the ✓ OK button and then use the
File | Save As... menu item to save the data file as “My EU Example
3_9b.sam”.
Steel Plate Girder

28. Use the File | Open menu item to open the file “EU Example 3_9c.sam”.
30. From the navigation window toolbar select

the analyse dropdown and select
Section Properties... to open the Section
Properties form. Change Section Properties
for: to “Plastic section” and note that the
Plastic moment about the major axis is
8209.27kNm.
31. Rotate the section through 90 degrees by

changing the angle on the section properties
form and note that the Plastic moment about
the minor axis is 1881.99kNm.
32. Change the Section properties for: to “Gross

section” and note that the cross section area
is 63024mm2. If the yield stress is 355N/mm2
then the ultimate plastic axial force is 355 x 63.024 = 22373.52kN.
33. In the navigation window use the toolbar button to add a Loadcase...
Change the Name to “My 8209.27” and enter a value of “8209.27” in the
Ultimate | My field before closing the form with the ✓ OK button.
3-68
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
34. Repeat this for Mz 1881.99 and Ax 22373.52 so that there are three loadcases
select Interaction Surface... to open the Interaction Surface form. To increase
accuracy (at the expense of analysis time) the No. of NA Angle Increments is
set to 180 and the No. of Strain Angle Increments to 65. Click on the Analyse
button and inspect the graphical results.
Both the My and the AX load cases have a performance ratio of 1.000 which
indicates that the intersection points are a good representation of the plastic
limits. With Mz there is a small error of 0.6%, which can be attributed to two
things:
• The straight line interpolation between surface points and
• With the method used in the interaction surface calculations the strain
plane at the NA can never be exactly horizontal, as in a plastic analysis
assumption, as the strains can never be infinite. However, the limiting
strains of +/- 0.1give a reasonably good solution, especially when the
section orientation places very little material at the NA, as in the My case
36. Close the Interaction Surface data form with the ✓ OK button and then use the
File | Save As... menu item to save the data file as “My EU Example
3_9c.sam”.
37.
3-69
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Summary
This example demonstrates how to create MX/MY/Axial interaction surfaces for a
variety of different sections and load case effects.
Although the facility for creating 2D interaction curves is still available, and of use in
many situations, the interaction surface is very powerful in determining ULS factors of
safety for several sets of applied load effects in a section, especially if they are
applied in sets of permanent and variable actions.
The example also demonstrates how to extract a 2D interaction curve in a particular

plane from the surface results
3-70
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
4. Beam Definition
Contents
4.1. Steel Composite Beam Definition ............................................................................. 4-3
4.2. Steel Composite Beam Definition (Advanced) .......................................................... 4-7
4.3. Prestress Beam Definition (Simple) ........................................................................ 4-16
4.4. Prestress Beam Definition (Advanced) ................................................................... 4-20
4.5. Reinforced Concrete Beam Definition ..................................................................... 4-29
All beams created in this example are created as single design beams, so that they
can be used directly in other examples, but they could equally be created in a single
multi-beam project file.
4-1
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
4-2
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
4.1. Steel Composite Beam Definition

Subjects Covered:
Steel composite beam; outer beam; rolled steel UB; concrete haunch; concrete edge;
edge cast with slab;
Outline
Create a simply supported composite steel/concrete beam 26m long with a uniform
section as shown below.
The steel beam is a standard Universal beam 914x419x388 and has standard default
steel material properties. The 200mm thick concrete slab is grade C32/40 concrete.
The concrete edge geometry has been pre-defined and is stored in a section library,
which can be imported. It is structural and it is cast separately from the slab. The
edge will need offsetting to place it in the correct position. Save the file for use in a
later example.
Procedure
1. Start the program and create a new beam using the menu item File | New |
Create from Template... and select “EU Steel Composite” from the “My
Templates” list
2. Use the menu item File | Titles... to set the beam title as “Composite
steel/concrete Beam - Simple” with a sub-title of “Example 4.1” and a Job
Number of “4.1”. Also add your initials to the Calculated by data item if
necessary. Click on ✓ OK to close the titles form.
4-3
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Define Beam
3. In the Design Beam navigation window select the “Beam Definition” item in the
navigation tree
4. Click in the Span field and enter a value of “26m”. Click on the Location is drop
down menu and select “Outer beam” from the list.
5. Click on the Define drop down menu and select “Section” from the list to open
the Composite Beam Section Definition form. Click in the Component drop
down menu on the first row of the table and select “Rolled Steel UB” from the
list.
6. This will open the Define Composite Beam Component form. Ensure that the
Steel Sections Library dropdown is set to “British Sections”. Click on the Serial
Size Within range drop down menu and select “914×419” from the list. Click on
the ✓ OK button to close the Define Composite Beam Component form.
7. Click in the Component drop down menu on the second row of the table and
select “Concrete Slab” from the list. This will open the Define Composite Beam
Component form. Click in the width field and enter a value of “2000mm”. Click
in the depth field and enter a value of “200mm”. Click on the ✓ OK button to
close the Define Composite Beam Component form. Click in the Slab Details Y
offset field and enter a value of “0.5m”.
4-4
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Add Haunch and Edge Detail

8. Click in the Component drop down menu on the third row of the table and
select “Concrete Haunch” from the list. This will open the Define Composite
Beam Component form. Click in the width at top field and enter a value of
“600mm”. Click in the width at bottom field and enter a value of “420mm”. Click
in the depth field and enter a value of “75mm” Click on the ✓ OK button to
close the Define Composite Beam Component form.
9. Click in the Component drop down menu on the fourth row of the table and
select “Concrete Edge” from the list. This will open the User Defined Edge
Detail form.
10. Click on the Retrieve button and open the supplied file “EU Example 4_1 Edge
Details.lib”. There is only one shape in this library file so select it and click on
the ✓ OK button on this form and another form that may appear. The edge
detail is not located correctly in the section but this can be done by setting the
offsets in the Composite Beam Section Definition form.
11. Close the User Defined Edge Detail form with the ✓ OK button.
12. Enter a Y offset: of “-0.5” and a Z offset: of “0.996”.
13. Uncheck the Edge detail cast with slab? checkbox.
4-5
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
14. Ensure that the 3 concrete components have the C32/40 concrete property
assigned to them. Click on the ✓ OK button to close the Composite Beam
Section Definition form.
15. Click on the ✓ OK button to close the Define Composite Beam form.
16. In the main menu select File | Save As... to open the Save File form.
17. Change the filename to “My EU Example 4_1.sam” and click on the Save
Summary
In this example we have defined a steel composite beam which includes a concrete
haunch and a concrete edge detail. The edge detail was imported from a user library
file but could easily have been generated by entering the coordinates of the shape
vertices directly into the table. Note that the materials for each section component
were not explicitly defined but these materials were previously defined in Section 1 of
the manual when defining the templates. Different materials could have been
selected here if they had been additionally defined.
4-6
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
4.2. Steel Composite Beam Definition (Advanced)

Subjects Covered:
Steel composite beam; span type; end span type; slab reinforcement; section
locations; soffit profile; construction stages;
Outline
A composite steel girder and concrete slab is shown below.
The beam is a steel plate girder of Steel Grade S355. The top and bottom flanges are
500mm wide and 40mm thick. The web is 20mm thick. The overall depth of the
girder is 1000mm at the deepest section. Because of these steel thicknesses a Yield
Strength of 345N/mm2 will be assigned to the girder in accordance with EN10025.
The 200mm thick slab is grade C32/40 concrete and is 2000mm wide.
It is required to create two beams:
1. A 30m internal span which has a curved bottom flange (circular arc) such that
the mid-span point is raised by 400mm. The concrete slab is cast in its length
in two stages, as shown, and has longitudinal structural reinforcement of 25mm
diameter bars at 200mm centres top and bottom. This reinforcement has
50mm cover and is placed in the slab only over the supports, extending 8m into
the span from both ends.
2. A 20m end span which has a curved bottom flange (circular arc) such that the
simply supported end and a point 7m from this end are raised by 400mm. The
concrete slab is cast in its length in two stages, as shown, and has the same
reinforcement as the first beam. This reinforcement has 50mm cover and is
4-7
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
placed in the slab only over the continuous support, extending 6m into the
span.
Procedure
Create from Template... and select “EU Steel Composite” from the “My
Templates” list
steel/concrete Beam – Advanced 1” with a sub-title of “Example 4.2a” and a
Job Number of “4.2a”. Also add your initials to the Calculated by data item if
necessary. Click on ✓ OK to close the Titles form
Define Materials
3. In the Materials navigation window select the S355/355 structural steel material
to open the Define Property Details form.
4. Enter a value of “345” in the Yield Strength field and click ✓ OK to close the
form.
Define Beam
5. Change the Navigation window to Design Beam and select “Beam Definition”
from the navigation tree to display the Define Composite Beam data form.
6. Click on the Type drop down menu and select “Continuous – internal span”
from the list. Enter a value of “30m” in the corresponding Span field.
7. Select the item “End span” from the SIDE SPANS – LEFT Type and RIGHT
Type drop down menus and enter values of “20m” in the corresponding Span
fields.
8. Click on the Cross section is drop down menu and select “Varying” from the
list.
9. Click on the Location is drop down menu and select “Inner beam” from the list.
10. Enter a value of “2” in the No. of different sections field.
Define Cross Section and Reinforcement

11. Click on the Define drop down menu and select “Section 1” from the list to
open the Composite Beam Section Definition form.
4-8
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
12. Click in the Component drop down menu on the first row of the table and select
“Plate Girder - I” from the list. This will open the Define Composite Beam
Component form.
• Enter a value of “500mm” in the top flange width and bottom flange
width fields.
• Enter a value of “40mm” in the top flange thickness and bottom flange
thickness fields.
• Enter a value of “1000mmm” in the overall height field and a value of

“20mm” in the web thickness field.
• Click on the ✓ OK button to close the Define Composite Beam

Component form.
13. Click in the Component drop down menu on the second row of the table and
select “Concrete Slab” from the list. This will open the Define Composite Beam
Component form.
• Click in the width field and enter a value of “2000mm”. Click in the depth
field and enter a value of “200mm”.
• Click on the ✓ OK button to close the Define Composite Beam

Component form.
14. Assign the C32/40 grade concrete material to the slab by selecting it in the
second row of the Property column.
15. Click in the Component drop down menu on the third row of the table and
select “Reinforcement” from the list. This will open the Composite Beam
Reinforcement form.
• Enter values of “25mm” in the Top Diameter and Bottom Diameter fields.
• Enter values of “200mm” in the Top Spacing and Bottom Spacing fields.
• Enter values of “50mm” in the Top Cover and Bottom Cover fields.
• Click on the ✓ OK button to close the Composite Beam Reinforcement

form.
4-9
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
16. Click on the ✓ OK button to close the Composite Beam Section Definition form
and select Yes on the confirmation form that is displayed.
17. Click on the Define drop down menu and select “Section 2” from the list to
open the Composite Beam Section Definition form.
• Click in the third row of the table and press the delete key on the
keyboard to remove the “Reinforcement” component.
18. Click on the ✓ OK button to close the Composite Beam Section Definition form
and select Yes on the confirmation form that is displayed.
Define Section Locations and Soffit Profile

19. Click on the Define drop down menu and select “Section Locations” from the
list to open the Beam Feature Definition form.
4-10
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
• On the first row of the table, click in the Section name drop down menu
and select “Section 1” from the list.
• On the second row, select “Section 1” and enter a value of “8m” in the
Position along span field.
• On the third row, select “Section 2” and enter a value of “8m”.
• On the fourth row, select “Section 2” and enter a value of “22m”.
• On the fifth row, select “Section 1” and enter a value of “22m”.
• On the sixth row, select “Section 1” and enter a value of “30m”.
• Clicking on the icon will show the side elevation shown below. Click
on the ✓ OK button to close the Beam Feature Definition form.
20. Click on the Define drop down menu and select “Soffit Profile” from the list to
open the Define Soffit Profile form.
• On the second row of the table, click in the Position along span field and
enter a value of “15m”.
• On the same row, click in the Offset from datum field and enter a value
of “400mm”.
• On the first row, click in the Profile to next point drop down menu and
select “Arc” from the list.
• Click on the ✓ OK button to close the Define Soffit Profile form.
4-11
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Define Construction Stages

21. Enter a value of “2” in the No. of construction stages field. Click on the Define
and locate span features drop down menu and select “Construction Stages”
from the list to open the Beam Feature Definition form.
• On the first row of the table, click in the Construction stage drop down
menu and select “Insitu stage 1” from the list.
• On the second row, select “Insitu stage 1” and enter a value of “8m” in
the Position along span field.
• On the third row, select “Insitu stage 2” and enter a value of “8m”.
• On the fourth row, select “Insitu stage 2” and enter a value of “22m”.
• On the fifth row, select “Insitu stage 1” and enter a value of “22m”.
• On the sixth row, select “Insitu stage 1” and enter a value of “30m”.
• Click on the ✓ OK button to close the Beam Feature Definition form.
4-12
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
23. Use the File | Save As... menu item to open the Save File form.
24. Change the filename to “My EU Example 4_2a.sam” and click on the Save
Create Second Beam

25. Use the menu item File | Titles... to set the Beam Title as “Composite
steel/concrete Beam – Advanced 2” with a sub-title of “Example 4.2b”. Set the
Job Number to “4.2b” and then click on ✓ OK to close the Titles form.
26. In the Design Beam navigation window select “Beam Definition” from the
navigation tree to display the Define Composite Beam data form.
27. Click on the MAIN SPAN Type drop down menu and select “Continuous – end
span” from the list. Enter a value of “20m” in the corresponding Span field and
press ‘Enter’ on the keyboard. Click on the Yes button on the two confirmation
messages that will appear.
28. Select the item “Internal span” from the SIDE SPANS – LEFT Type drop down
menu and enter a value of “30m” in the corresponding Span field.
29. Click on the Define drop down menu and select “Section Locations” from the
list to open the Beam Feature Definition form. Click on the “Clear” button to
delete the current data.
• On the first row of the table, click in the Section name drop down menu
and select “Section 1” from the list.
• On the second row, select “Section 1” and enter a value of “5.3m” in the
Position along span field.
• On the third row, select “Section 2” and enter a value of “5.3m”.
• On the fourth row, select “Section 2” and enter a value of “20m”. Click on
the ✓ OK button to close the Beam Feature Definition form.
4-13
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Change Soffit Profile and Construction Stages

30. Click on the Define drop down menu and select “Soffit Profile” from the list to
open the Define Soffit Profile form. Click on the “Clear” button to delete the
current data and click on Yes on a Confirm form that may appear.
enter a value of “13m”. On the same row, click in the Offset from datum
• On the third row of the table, click in the Position along span field and
enter a value of “20m”. On the same row, click in the Offset from datum
• On the first row, click in the Profile to next point drop down menu and
31. Click on the Define and locate span features drop down menu and select
“Construction Stages” from the list to open the Beam Feature Definition form.
Click on the Clear button to delete the current data.
• On the first row of the table, click in the Construction stage drop down
menu and select “Insitu stage 1” from the list.
• On the second row, select “Insitu stage 1” and enter a value of “5.3m” in
the Position along span field.
4-14
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
• On the third row, select “Insitu stage 2” and enter a value of “5.3m”.
• On the fourth row, select “Insitu stage 2” and enter a value of “20m”.
• Click on the ✓ OK button to close the Beam Feature Definition form.
33. Use the File | Save As... menu item to open the Save File form.
34. Change the filename to “My EU Example 4_2b.sam” and click on the Save
Summary
In this example we have created a steel composite beam for an internal span with a
soffit profile and defined construction stages. We then use this file as a basis for a
second steel composite beam, this time for an end span with a different soffit profile
and construction stage locations.
It is important to realise that if the reinforcement had been the same for the full length
of the beam the section could have been described as “Uniform” and only one section
defined – despite the web varying in depth due to the bottom flange profile. The
section variation is used to model sudden changes in section such as flange and web
thickness changes and curtailment of reinforcement.
The reason for defining span arrangements and adjacent span lengths in the Define
Composite Beam form is that the program needs this information when calculating the
effective breadth of the concrete flange, used in stress calculations. The Location
definition of whether the beam is an “Inner” or “Outer” beam is needed for the same
reason and if the beam is used in a line girder analysis it influences the calculation of
distribution factors.
4-15
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
4.3. Prestress Beam Definition (Simple)

Subjects Covered:
Prestress beam; Define material properties; Define beam; Sizing prestress beam;
Define prestress beam section;
Outline
The section of a 21m long prestressed concrete beam and insitu concrete slab is
shown below.
The prestressed beam is a standard Y beam the size of which is to be determined

and is cast using grade C40/50 concrete. The age of the precast concrete at transfer
is 4 days and is 60 days old when the insitu concrete is placed. The 200mm thick
insitu slab is 2m wide and constructed using grade C32/40 concrete. Standard wire
pre-stressing strands are used; each having an area of 150mm2 and a nominal
diameter of 16 mm. The characteristic strength of each tendon is 1861MPa and the
relaxation at 1000 hours is set to a value of 2.5%. Tendons are initially located in all
default manufacturers’ locations as shown above. Save the file as “My EU Example
4_3.sam” for use in a later example.
Procedure
Create from Template... and select “EU Pretensioned” from the “My
Templates” list
2. Use the menu item File | Titles... to set the beam title to “Prestress Beam -
Simple” with a sub-title of “Example 4.3”. Also set the Job Number to “4.3” and
add your initials to the Calculated by data item if necessary. Click on ✓ OK to
close the Titles form.
4-16
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Modify Materials Loaded from the Template

Next we will change the material properties defined in the template.
3. In the Materials navigation window select the material “MP5:” from the
navigation tree, which is the Structural Steel material defined in the template
and use the “-“ toolbar button, of the navigation window, to delete this
redundant material
4. Select the material “MP4” from the navigation tree to open the prestress
material properties. Change the Characteristic Tensile Strength, fpk to
“1861MPa”. Ensure Relaxation Loss After 1000 Hours is set to “2.5%” and the
Relaxation Class is set to “Class 2” before closing the form with ✓ OK.
The next step is to define the geometry of the beam.
5. In the Design Beam Navigation window select “Beam Definition” in the

navigation tree
6. In the Beam length field, enter a value of “21m”. Make sure Cross section is: is
set to “uniform” and Location is: is set to “Interior beam”.
Suggest Section Size

Next we will get the program to suggest a sizing for the beam cross section.
7. Click on the Suggest size of drop down and select “Y beam” from the list of
options. This will open the Pre-tensioned Beam Initial Sizing form.
4-17
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
8. Click on the Beams at drop down and select “2000 centres”. The graph will
update to show Y7 as the best initial size for the cross section. Click ✓ OK to
select this size.
Define Slab
The next step is to define the slab.
9. Click on the Define drop down in the Pre-Tensioned Beam Definition form and
select “Section” from the list of options. This will open the Pre-tensioned Beam
Section Definition form where you will see the Y7 cross section defined in the
previous step.
10. Click on the Component column in the second row of the table and select “In
situ – regular”. This will open the Define Precast Beam Component form. The
Shape Reference will be set to “Rectangle” already so enter “2000mm” in the
width field and “200mm” in the depth field then click ✓ OK.
11. Ensure the Z offset for the slab is set to “1270” (input this data and press Enter
on the keyboard if it is not). Click on the Merge by stage # button so that the
program will remove the overlapping material for the two section components.
12. Check that the Concrete Property for the beam is set to grade C40/50 and the
age at transfer is 4 days. The Concrete Property for the slab is set to grade
C32/40 and the age of the precast beam when this is placed is 60 days. Click
on the ✓ OK button to close the Pre-tensioned Beam Section Definition form.
4-18
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
13. In the Define field dropdown select “Reinforcement” to open the Define Pre-
Tensioned Beam Reinforcement form and then in the graphics window toolbar
select the icon to show an isometric view in which a three dimensional
representation of the reinforcement/tendons can be seen. Parameters for this
view can be controlled on the orange General tab at the side of the graphics
window.
14. Click on ✓ OK to close the Define Pre-tensioned Beam Reinforcement form.
15. Click on ✓ OK to close the Pre-tensioned Beam Definition form.
16. Click on the main menu item File | Save as... to save the file as “My EU
Example 4_3.sam”.
Summary
This example shows how to enter a simple pretensioned prestressed beam into
Autodesk® Structural Bridge Design. Particular emphasis is placed on the suggested
initial beam size based on the span and spacing of the beam.
It should be noted that the suggested size is just a recommendation and need not be
used. In this case the precast beam section shape is defined by selecting from the
full list or defining the shape manually.
4-19
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
4.4. Prestress Beam Definition (Advanced)

Subjects Covered:
Prestress beam; Edge beam; Exterior beam; Varying cross section; Merge by stage;
Edge upstand; Section locations; Remove unwanted tendons; Debond tendons;
Define reinforcement; Curtailment of reinforcement; Change reinforcement properties;
Outline
A prestressed concrete edge beam
and insitu concrete slab, upstand
and infill are shown below. The
precast beam is a YE5 standard
beam with just 4 tendons in the top
of the beam and two rows of
tendons in the bottom. The
positions of the tendons are in the
manufacturers default locations and
the centre four tendons of the
second row are debonded along the
first 3.5m from the beam ends
The precast beam is 19m long but, when the

insitu diaphragm is cast, the composite beam
spans 20m between the centre lines of the
integral supports. It is constructed using grade
C50/60 concrete and prestressed with
standard wire strands, each having an effective
area of 150mm2 and a nominal radius of
16mm. The characteristic strength of each
tendon is 1861MPa and they are set to have a
relaxation of 2.5% at 1000 hours.
The slab is cast in two stages: the first (stage

1a) being the central 11m portion and the
second (stage 1b) being the two ends together
with the infill between adjacent beams (which
extends 2.0m along the beam from each end). The upstand (stage 2) is then added
as an additional stage and is cast along the complete length. All insitu concrete is
grade C32/40.
4-20
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Reinforcement is placed in the

slab at each end of the beam, as
shown, to resist the hogging
moment due to the integral
abutments. This reinforcement
extends 5.0m into the slab from
both ends. Standard grade 500
reinforcement is used.
Procedure
Create from Template... and select “EU Pretensioned” from the “My
Templates” list
2. Use the menu item File | Titles... to set the beam title to “Prestress Beam -
Advanced” with a sub-title of “Example 4.4”. Also set the Job Number to “4.4”
and add your initials to the Calculated by data item if necessary. Click on ✓
OK to close the Titles form.
Define Materials
3. In the Materials navigation window delete any redundant material (ie MP5:) by
clicking on the material and then use the “-“ toolbar button, of the navigation
window.
4. Select the material “MP4:” from the navigation tree to open the prestress steel
material properties. Change the Characteristic Tensile Strength, fpk to
“1861MPa”. Ensure Relaxation Loss After 1000 Hours is set to “2.5%” and the
Relaxation Class is set to “Class 2”.
5. Select the material “MP2:” from the navigation tree to open the precast
concrete properties. Change the Grade C40/50 concrete to grade C50/60 by
changing the Characteristic Strength, fck in the data form to “50”.
4-21
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
6. In the Design Beam navigation window select Beam Definition to display the
Pre-tensioned Beam Definition form.
7. Set the Beam Length to “19” and the Support to beam end face to “-0.5” at both
ends and press the ‘Enter’ key. Note the Support c/c is shown as 20m.
8. In the Location is field select “Exterior beam” from the drop down list and set
Cross section is to “varying”. The No. of different sections should be set to “3”.
The first section is that at the centre of the beam with a precast beam and
stage 1a insitu concrete representing the slab. The second section is that
section where there is no infill but the slab is stage 1b. The third section is the
same as section 2 but the slab is now extended to include the infill concrete.
The upstand (Stage 2 concrete) is present in all three sections
4-22
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Define Cross Sections and Locations

9. To create section 1, open the Pre-tensioned Beam Section Definition form by
selecting “Section 1” from the drop down list in the Define: field.
10. In the Component column of the

first row of the table, select “PC
beam – standard” to open the
Define Precast Beam
Component form. Here set the
Concrete beam range: to “YE
Beam” and the Shape no. within
range: to “YE5” and then close
the form using the ✓ OK button.
Ensure the Concrete Property is
grade C50/60 concrete
11. In the Component column of the

second row of the table select
“Insitu – regular”. In the Define Precast Beam Component form set the Shape
reference to “Rectangle”, the width to “1600” and the depth to “200”; then close
the form with the ✓ OK button. Stage should be set to “Stage 1A” and the y & z
offsets to 200 and 1070 respectively (and press the ‘Enter’ key). To cut the
concrete out around the precast beam use the Merge by Stage button. If you
cannot see the full section on the graphics press the F4 function key (after
getting focus on the graphics window) to Fit the view.
To define the chamfer on the bottom left corner of the slab it is necessary to
change the regular shape to a defined shape, add a point, and then edit the
coordinates to suit.
12. Change the second row Component to “In-situ – define” which will display the
User Define In Situ form. Click on the first coordinate (the bottom left corner of
the slab should be highlighted with a red circle) and then click the small “+”
button at the bottom of this table to add a point halfway up the left edge of the
slab. Change the Z coordinate of this point to “1120”.
Click on the first coordinate again and set the Y coordinate of the point to
“-550”. Change Name: to “Slab” and then close the Define In Situ form using
the ✓ OK button. Ensure that the Property is set to Grade C32/40 Concrete.
4-23
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
The last component to add is

the upstand which is done by
adding an additional defined
shape. In the Component
column of the third row of the
table select “Insitu – define”.
Create a shape by clicking the
small “+” button at the bottom
of the table 4 times and then
editing the coordinates to (0,0)
(350,0) (250,400) (0,400) (0,0),
and naming the shape “Edge”.
Close this form with the ✓ OK
button.
Set the Y offset to “-425” (which is the centre of the bottom edge) and the Z
offset to “1270”. Also check that the material property is grade C32/40
concrete and that Stage is set to “Stage 2”
This completes the definition of section 1 so change the Name: to “Stage1A”

and close the Section Definition form with the ✓ OK button.
13. To create section 2 select “Section 2” from the drop down list in the Define:
field. By default this will be the same as Section 1. All that is required is to
change the Stage for the Slab component to “Stage1B” and change the Name:
to “Stage1B”. Close the Section Definition form with the ✓ OK button.
14. To create section 3 select “Section 3” from the drop down list in the Define:
field. By default this will be the same as Section 1.
To define the Infill concrete, which is cast together with the slab, around the
shape of the precast beam it is necessary to modify the coordinates of the slab
and then use Merge by Stage to remove any overlapping portion.
15. In the Component column of the second row of the table select “Insitu – define”
to open up the insitu slab data form. In the graphics window, click on the
bottom right corner of the slab to make the circle marker turn red. This
highlights the coordinates in the table. Change the z coordinate of this point to
0. Click on the coordinate immediately before the coordinate that has just been
edited and change them to (0, 0). Enter “Slab + Infill” into the Name: field and
4-24
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
then close the form using the ✓ OK button (say no to the prompt for updating
the other sections). Click on the button Merge by Stage # to remove the
overlapping concrete then change the Stage to “Stage 1B” (if it is not already
set to “Stage 1B”) and ensure the Property is set to grade C32/40 concrete.
All that is required now to do now is ensure the Stage for the Slab + Infill
component is set to “Stage1B” and change the Name: to “Stage1B + Infill”.
Close the Section Definition form with the ✓ OK button.
16. These sections now need to be located at positions along the span. This is
done by selecting “Section Locations” in the Define: field and filling out the data
as shown below in the resulting data form. Please note that the first column
values are selected from a drop down; entering the second column values will
automatically fill the third column values; the last row is hidden in the scrollable
table but should be “Stage1B + Infill” and “19”. Click ✓ OK to close the Beam
Feature Definition form.
The graphics is
coloured to show
the different
sections. This can
be changed to show
the stages of
construction by
opening the orange
General tab of the
graphics window
4-25
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
and selecting “Section Stage” in the Colour By field.
Define Tendons
17. To define pre-stressing tendons open the Pre-tensioned Beam Tendon
Definition form by selecting Tendons in the Define: field of the Pre-tensioned
Beam Definition form.
18. By default all available tendon locations have

a fully stressed tendon applied. To remove
the tendons not required (but not the
locations) set the Edit Mode field to
“Insert/Remove” and then select the
unwanted tendons in the graphics window by
boxing around the group as shown – this will
turn the small dots red. The tendons will be
deleted when the ‘Delete’ key on the
keyboard is pressed. The tendons can be
replaced by doing the same but using the
‘Insert’ key rather than ‘Delete’.
19. The 4 central tendons in the second row

need to be debonded which is done by
selecting “Debond” in the Edit Mode: field.
Check the Symmetrical Elevation checkbox,
set the Left: field to “3.5” (when the “enter”
key is pressed it automatically updates the
right end) and then window round the 4
tendons, which turns them red. The tendons
are debonded beyond these locations with a
right click in the graphics window and
“debond” selected. They are indicated
graphically as orange dots.
20. To see how the tendons and sections change

along the beam length click once on the green arrow in the elevation graphics
and drag the pointer from one end to the other. The section graphics changes
accordingly. Moving the blue handles will alter the debond points. Close the
Tendon Definition form using the ✓ OK button.
21. To define the reinforcement, select “Reinforcement” in the Define: field of the
Pre-tensioned Beam Definition form which opens the Define Pre-tensioned
Beam Reinforcement form. To create the bar positions click on the Insert Bar
“+” button near the bottom of the form which opens the Define Reinforcement
form.
Reinforcement is required at both ends of the beam with a gap in the middle.
This is achieved by defining two bars, one for each end of the beam, and
4-26
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
setting the start and end points of each accordingly. The two bars can be
located in the same position in the section but to ensure that is possible to
select one bar or another, one set of bars will be defined and curtail before
creating the second set of bars
22. Set the Diameter: field to “25mm”,

the Position by field to “Equal
Spacing < value” and the Spacing
field to “150mm”. Select
“Reinforce face(s)” in the
Generate field and then click on
the top face of the slab which will
open a secondary form. Accept
the default value of “50mm” cover
by closing this form with the ✓ OK
button and the bars will then be
displayed in the graphics window.
23. By default the reinforcement runs

from one end of the beam to the
other, so they need curtailing.
Close the Define Reinforcement
form using the ✓ OK button.
Window around the top row of
reinforcement, if they are not
already red, in the graphics
window and click on the icon. Check the Modify checkbox and set
Dimension / End to “5” before clicking on the ✓ OK button on the sub form. We
now need to create the second set of bars so move the green slider bar on the
graphics to a position that does not contain reinforcement and click on the “+”
button at the bottom of the screen.
24. Repeat step 17 and 18 except set Dimension / Start to “14” and Dimension /
End to “19” before clicking on the ✓ OK button on the sub form.
4-27
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
25. The Define Reinforcement form can now be closed with the ✓ OK button to
complete the reinforcement definition.
To see graphically how the reinforcement varies along the beam span, with the
Define Pre-tensioned Beam Reinforcement form open, click on the green arrow
in the elevation graphics and move it along the beam to display the
reinforcement. (The bars can be seen by following the same procedure with the
tendon definition form open). They can also be seen clearly in an Isometric
view with transparency turned on.
26. Close all forms using the ✓ OK button and then save the file using the
File | Save as... menu item as “My EU Example 4_4.sam”.
Summary
In this example we have defined a pretensioned prestressed beam with three different
cross sections. We have also defined tendons along the length of the beam and
debonded them at various positions. Finally we looked at a special technique for
defining curtailed reinforcement.
4-28
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
4.5. Reinforced Concrete Beam Definition

Subjects Covered:
Reinforced concrete beam; Parametric shape; Join button; Y and Z offset; Soffit face;
Soffit profile; Define reinforcement; Locate bar by 2 covers; Snap mode;
Superimposed bars; Reinforcing bar shape;
Outline
Create a uniform RC beam 30m long using the section shown below. The material for
the beam is grade C40/50 concrete. Ensure that the soffit is defined in the section.
The beam has a soffit profile as shown below
Soffit Point
Coordinates
A 0.00 0.00
B 7.00 0.60
C 15.00 0.80
D 30.00 0.80
Place 4 rows of 40mm diameter bars in the bottom face, parallel to the soffit and two
rows in the top face (on the underside of the rebate). Cover to the outer faces of the
concrete should be 50mm with 50mm between rows and each row should contain 15
bars
4-29
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Procedure
Create from Template... and select “EU RC” from the “My Templates” list
2. Use the menu item File | Titles... to set the beam title as “Reinforced Concrete
Beam” with a sub-title of “Example 4.5”. Also set the Job Number to “4.5” and
add your initials to the Calculated by data item if necessary. Click on ✓ OK to
3. In the Design Beam navigation window, select Beam Definition to open the
Reinforced Concrete Beam Definition form. Enter a value of “30m” in the Beam
Span field. Click on the Define drop down menu and select “Section” from the
list. This will open the RC Beam Section Definition form.
Define Cross Section

4. On the first row of the table, click in the Component drop down menu and
select “Parametric shapes” from the list. This will open the Define Reinforced
Concrete Beam Component form. Select “Rectangle” from the Shape
Reference drop down menu. Enter a value of “1700mm” in the width field and
“2800mm” in the depth field. Click on the ✓ OK button to close the Define
Reinforced Concrete Beam Component form.
5. On the second row of the table, click in the Component drop down menu and
select “Parametric shapes” from the list. Using the Define Reinforced Concrete
Beam Component form, create a “Rectangle” of 550mm width and 350mm
height. Click on the ✓ OK button to close the Define Reinforced Concrete
Beam Component form.
6. On the second row of the table, enter a value of “2800mm”

in the Z Coord field and press the ‘Enter’ key. Click on the
button in the graphics window toolbar.
7. On the second row of the table, click in the Component drop down menu and
select “Parametric shapes” from the list. Using the Define Reinforced Concrete
Beam Component form, create a “Rectangle” of 350mm width and 350mm
4-30
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
height. Click on the ✓ OK button to close the Define Reinforced Concrete

Beam Component form.
8. On the second row of the table, change the Y Coord value to “1350mm” and
the Z Coord value to “2800mm” and press ‘Enter’ on the keyboard. Click on the
button in the graphics window toolbar.
9. On the second row of the table, create another “Rectangle” of 515mm width
and 600mm height using the same method as step 6. Change the Y Coord
value to “1700mm” and the Z Coord value to “1525mm” and press the ‘Enter’
key. Click on the button in the graphics window toolbar.
18. Click on the bottom face of the section in the graphics window. The face will
change to a dashed line. This line type is used to indicate a continuous face.
Click on the bottom face again to change it to a solid, bold line. This tells the
program that the face is a soffit face and will follow the soffit profile of the
beam.
4-31
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Finally, select Grade C40/50 concrete from the Property drop down menu.
Click on the ✓ OK button to close the RC Beam Section Definition form.
Define Soffit Profile

19. Click on the Define drop down menu and select “Soffit Profile” from the list.
This will open the Define Soffit Profile form.
enter a value of “7.0m”. On the same row, click in the Offset from datum
• On the third row, enter a value of “15.00m” in the Position along span
field and “800mm” in the Offset from datum field.
• On the fourth row enter a value of “800mm” in the Offset from datum
field. On the first row, click in the Profile to next point drop down and
As a first estimate, 6 rows of reinforcement, 4 rows at the bottom and 2 rows at
the top of the section will be defined along the entire span.
20. Click on the Define drop down menu and select “Reinforcement” from the list.
This will open the Define RC Beam Reinforcement form together with two
4-32
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
graphics views, one showing the elevation and one the cross section of the
beam.
21. Click and hold the green arrow marker in the graphics window and drag it to
the support at the left hand end of the beam. Click on the “+” button near the
bottom of the form to open the Define Reinforcement form. The outermost bars
in each row of reinforcement will first be defined with appropriate cover..
22. Click on the Generate drop down and select “1 bar by 2 covers”.
• Set the Diameter field to “40mm” then click on the bottom and left hand
faces of the cross section. This opens the Locate bar by 2 covers form.
Leave both covers set to “50mm” and click ✓ OK. Repeat the process,
this time clicking on the bottom and the right faces and use the same
cover.
• Next click on the bottom and left hand faces and enter covers of “50mm”
and “140mm”. Repeat this using the bottom and right hand faces,
entering covers of “140mm” and “50mm”.
• Repeat these steps, entering covers of “50mm” and “230mm”, and

“230mm” and “50mm”. Finally repeat these steps, entering covers of
“50mm” and “320mm, and “320mm” and “50mm”.
There are now 8 bars defined for the bottom of the section.
This process needs to be repeated for the top two rows of bars.
23. Click on the left hand face and the lower middle face on the top of the section
and set both covers to “50mm”.
4-33
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
24. Next, click on the lower middle face and the right hand face and set both
covers to “50mm”.
25. Repeat these steps, entering covers of “140mm” and “50mm” for the left hand
side and “50mm” and “140mm” for the right hand side. There will now be 4
bars defined at the top of the section.
The next step is to fill in the remaining bars between the layer pairs.
26. Click on the Generate drop down and select “Draw bars” from the list. Set No.
Of bars to “15”, then click on the Snap drop down on the graphics toolbar and
select “Bar/Tendon”. Click on the bottom left bar then click on the bottom right
bar on the cross section. The program will draw 15 equally spaced bars
between the two selected bars.
4-34
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
27. Repeat this process for the remaining 5 rows of bars. The cross section will
now look like this:
28. Click on ✓ OK on the Define Reinforcement form. The program will produce
the following warning message:
This is because the program defines bars at each of the locations where the
mouse was clicked. These 12 bars need to be removed so click OK to remove
them and define the beam reinforcement.
29. The program assumes reinforcing bars are horizontal. The side elevation will
look like this:
30. It is required that the bottom bars should run parallel with the soffit. To do this,
draw a box around all the bottom bars in the cross section and click on the Edit
reinforcement attributes button at the bottom of the form. Click on the “Set
4-35
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Bar Shape” button on the form that appears. This opens the Reinforcing Bar
Shape form.
31. Click on the Shape drop down and select “Parallel to soffit”. The elevation will
automatically update to show the reinforcement in the correct location. Click ✓
OK to close the Reinforcing Bar Shape and Edit Reinforcement Attributes form.
Click ✓ OK to close the Define RC Beam Reinforcement form.
Click ✓ OK to close the Reinforced Concrete Beam Definition form.
4-36
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
32. Clicking on the icon when the Define RC Beam Reinforcement form is open
shows an isometric view in which a three dimensional representation of the
reinforcement can be seen. Parameters for this view can be controlled on the
orange General tab at the side of the graphics window.
The beam definition is now complete so we will save the beam for use in a later
example.
33. Click on the File | Save As... menu item to open the Save File form. Change
the filename to “My EU Example 4_5.sam” and click on the Save button to save
the data file.
Summary
In this example we have defined a reinforced concrete section making extensive use
of the join command to create a complex section shape from a series of rectangles.
We then defined the soffit profile of the beam. Finally, we defined 6 layers of
reinforcement with the reinforcement at the bottom following the curved soffit profile.
4-37
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
4-38
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
5. Beam Design
Contents
5.1. Steel Composite Beam Design ................................................................................. 5-3
5.2. Prestressed Beam Design ...................................................................................... 5-17
5.3. Reinforced Concrete Beam Design ......................................................................... 5-31
5-1
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
5-2
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
5.1. Steel Composite Beam Design

Subjects Covered:
Steel composite beam; construction stage loads; generate loads; import loads;
differential temperature profile; shrinkage and creep; shrinkage strain; design for
construction stages; design for Eurocodes live load; design for vertical shear;
combined bending and shear; longitudinal shear;
Outline
A composite steel girder and concrete slab is shown below. The beam forms a simply
supported span and the concrete slab (with haunch) is cast in one. The concrete
edge is cast (defined as the “string course”) after the slab concrete has hardened.
The bending and shear effects due to dead load and superimposed dead load
(3.2kN/m) are created at 21 points along the span using the “Generate” feature in the
program. There is a temporary load of 1.44kN/m which is applied during the beam
construction but removed once the concrete has hardened. This represents temporary
construction loads and the water in the wet concrete.
Max live load moment (with associated shears) and shear effects (with associated
moments) have been prepared in an external ASCII file as envelopes.
There are no secondary effects due to differential temperature and shrinkage, as the
beam is statically determinate, but the primary stresses need to be included for both,
where appropriate. The temperature profile to be applied to the section is in
accordance with EN 1991-1-5, using a 75mm thick finishing. The profile will need
adjusting, as described in example 3.3, so that the edge detail is at a constant
temperature and the actual profile starts at the top of the slab. The shrinkage strain
for the concrete, for the calculation of differential shrinkage, is to be set to -0.00025.
5-3
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
It is required to check the applied effects of bending and shear against ultimate limit
state capacity during erection and normal use, and to design a suitable shear stud
arrangement with transverse reinforcement to resist the longitudinal shear forces.
Procedure
1. Start the program and use the main menu item File | Open to open the data
file “EU Example 4_1.sam” created in section 4.1.
steel/concrete Beam Design” with a sub-title of “Example 5.1”. Also, set the job
no. to 5.1 and add your initials to the Calculated by data item. Click on the ✓
OK button to close the titles form.
Defining Load Effects

The design load combinations are constructed from a series of separate load
effects. Each effect is constructed separately appearing as a separate item
under the Beam Loads item in the Design Beam Navigation window. First
consider the load effects from construction stage
3. To add a construction load effects open the Define Composite Beam Loads
form using the button, in the toolbar of the Design Beam navigation
window, and select Beam Loads | Construction Stage 1 (there is only one for
this simply supported beam)
4. In the User Name field enter “With Temp Const Loads”
5. As the beam is simply supported we can use the Generate button to create the
bending moments and shears for this case. This will open up the Generate
Beam Loads data form, after the display of an information message explaining
the limitations of the method.
5-4
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
The steel and concrete dead loads have been automatically calculated using
the material density and areas defined.
6. An additional component representing the temporary construction load and

water in the wet concrete is added by clicking on the + Add Load Component
button. Click on the tab of this additional component and set the Component
Ref: field to “Temp Const Load”.
• Enter “1.44” into both the Start and End Fields of the UDL Intensity. The
load factor for both ULS and SLS can be changed to “1.0”. The ULS
load factor for the Steel dead load should be changed to “1.2”.
• Set the Beam span equally divided by field to “20”.
• Click on the ✓ OK button to save this data and close the Generate
Beam Loads form.
This will display the resultant moments and shears for this load (noting that the
shears are absolute shears, as selected by default on the Define composite
Loads data form).
7. The Define composite Loads form can now be closed with the ✓ OK button
5-5
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
8. Add a second load effects by using the button, in the toolbar of the
navigation window, and select Beam Loads | String Course Self Weight. Use
the “Generate” button to create the bending moments and shears for this case.
Again, the program automatically calculates the dead load intensity of the edge
section. Set the Beam span equally divided by field to “20” and accept the
defaults by clicking on ✓ OK. Close the Define Composite Beam Load form
9. Add a third load effects by using the button, in the toolbar of the navigation
window, and select Beam Loads | Other permanent action. This will be used
to represent the removal of the temporary construction loads by applying a
negative factor to the load. Use the Generate button to open the data form
then enter “1.44” into the Start and End fields of the UDL intensity. The ULS
and SLS Load factors are changed to “-1.0”. The component ref field can be
changed to “Temp const load rem” to make it clear what this represents. Set
the Beam span equally divided by field to “20” before clicking on ✓ OK to
accept the data. In the Define composite Loads form the User Name: field can
be changed to “Rem temp const loads” before closing it with the ✓ OK button.
(the information form about hogging moments can be accepted)
10. Add a Forth load effects by using the button, in the toolbar of the navigation
window, and select Beam Loads | Surfacing. Use the Generate button to
open the data form then enter “3.2” into the Start and End fields of the UDL
intensity. The ULS and SLS load factors are left at the default values. Set the
Beam span equally divided by field to “20” before clicking on ✓ OK to accept
the data and then closing the Define Composite Beam Load form with the ✓
OK button
11. The effects for two live load cases need to be considered:
Traffic gr1b-gr5 +ve Moment
Traffic gr1b-gr5 – for Shear design
These are loaded from an ASCII file which has been prepared using a standard
text editor. This file has a file extension “.sld” and can be imported by using the
“Import loads from SLD file” toolbar button in the navigation window.
5-6
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
This will display a standard file browser allowing the selection of the file called
“EU_Composite_Beam_Simple.SLD”. The imported effects can be inspected
by selecting the appropriate Beam Load in the navigation tree
12. All main loading effects are now defined so any Define Composite Beam Loads
form can be closed by clicking on ✓ OK.
Setting the Differential Temperature Profile and Shrinkage strains and

calculating the primary stresses
13. Open the Composite Beam Analysis form by using the Analyse toolbar
button in the navigation window. In the Analyse for: field select “Differential
temperature primary stress”.
14. Ensure that the profile Type is set to “EN 1991-1-5 Fig 6.2 Non Linear” and set
the field Surfacing: to “Surfaced” and the Surfacing Thickness: to “0.075”. Also
set the Depth of concrete above steel: to “0.275” (the slab plus the haunch).
It should be noted that the basic

temperature profile for a steel
composite design beam assumes that
the top of the standard profile is at the
top of the slab and that the
temperature in the upstand assumes a
constant temperature through its
depth of that at the top surface of the
slab,
15. To determine the primary stresses in the section due to differential temperature
set the Display: radio button to “Stresses” This will produce a graphical result of
the stresses as shown. More details can be found by using the “Detailed
Results...” button on the data form. Close the Differential Temperature
Analysis form with the ✓ OK button
5-7
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
16. In the Composite Beam Analysis form set the Set parameters for: field to
“Shrinkage and Creep” which will display the Data for Shrinkage & Creep data
form. The Shrinkage strain: should be set to “0.00025” and all the other values
left as the default settings (click on the tick box to enable this field). Close the
parameters forms by clicking on ✓ OK.
To determine and display the primary stresses for shrinkage and creep you will
need to set the Analyse for: field to “Shrinkage / Creep primary” which will
display the stresses in the section. Close the Calculate Shrinkage Stresses
form with the ✓ OK button
17. Close the Composite Beam Analysis form by clicking on ✓ OK to save this
data.
Construction stages
18. The first design check will be to ensure the ULS capacity of the steel girder, on
its own, is greater than the applied load effects during construction. Open the
Composite Beam Analysis form by using Analyse toolbar button in the
navigation window and set the Analyse for: field to “BM’s during construction”.
Set the Beam Classification field to “Class 1” and select “ULS
Persistent/Transient” from the dropdown menu. The calculation is done
automatically.
19. It can be seen from the graphics that the actual mid span construction moment
exceeds the bending capacity of this compact section.
5-8
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
20. The resulting calculation for this can be seen by first moving the vertical red
line on the beam elevation to the mid span point and then clicking on the
“Results” button. The vertical red line is moved by using the direction buttons
at the end of the field Result Point of Interest.
21. Inspection of the results shows that the slenderness of the girder has reduced
the bending capacity of the section by virtue of lateral torsional buckling of the
top flange. This could be improved by supplying a torsional restraint to the mid
span point of the beam. To do this, change the Set parameter for: to “Bending
and Buckling calculations” which displays the Design Data for Bending &
Buckling form. Select the checkbox labelled BS 5400 Part 3 at the bottom of
the form to open an expanded version of the Buckling data form.
22. Set the current tab to “Effective Length – Erection” and set the Restraint Type:
to “U-frame restraints”. The Number of equally spaced restraints is left as “1”
to enable a restraint at mid-span.
The graphics shows that the section is still just failing at mid span.
21. Reduce the value of Rotation of restraint per kNm of torque, r from “1.0” to
“0.18”.
5-9
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
We can see that the section then works (note that the BM diagram turns
green). This indicates that a transverse restraint is required at mid-span with
sufficient bending stiffness so that the restraint end will not rotate by more than
0.18 degrees if a moment of 1.0kNm is applied at the end.
The beam therefore passes this design check.
22. Close the Design Data for Bending & Buckling form by clicking on the ✓ OK
button and then click on the “Results” button on the Composite Beam Analysis
form which will open the Results Viewer window displaying the full calculations
for the current section. These can be printed if required.
Close the Results Viewer using the ‘Exit’ button.
Bending Moments under Eurocodes Combination Loading

23. Only sagging moments need to be considered as the beam is simply
supported. Change Analyse for: data field to “Bending +ve for gr1b-gr5 ID.1”.
24. The graphics clearly shows that the design moments are less than the
resistance moments along the whole of the beam length.
The Display field in the data form can be changed to “Steel stresses” or “Slab
stresses” to display the results for these settings.
5-10
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
25. Now set the Limit State to “SLS Characteristic” and the Display: to “Steel
stresses”. Both top and bottom flange design stresses, shown in the graphics,
are below the maximum allowable stresses.
The same can be shown for the concrete slab stresses by clicking on the “Slab
stresses” radio button (a warning message about adding local to global effects
may appear – click OK on this message). The section therefore passes this
design check. Full calculations can be viewed/printed by using the “Results”
button as required.
26. It should be noted that the angle of the

compression strut in the shear calculations can
be altered by the user in accordance with the
code of practice. The parameters affecting
these calculations are defined in the Design
Data for Shear form which can be displayed by
selecting “Shear calculations” in the Set
parameters for: field. In this example we will
accept the default value. The form is closed
using the ✓ OK button.
27. Verify that temperature stresses are being

added by viewing the results.
Vertical Shear under Eurocodes Combination Loading

28. In the Analyse for: data field, select “Shear for gr1b-gr51” from the dropdown
selection; it can be seen that only Ultimate Limit State is available for checking.
The graphics clearly shows that the design shears are less than the
permissible shear along the whole of the beam length. (Click OK on the error
messages regarding strain compatibility whenever they appear).
The section therefore passes this design check and full calculations for this can
be viewed/printed by using the Results button as before.
Combined Bending and Shear Design Checks

29. The combined effect of bending and shear are checked using the equations of
6.2.2.4 in EN 1994-2. In the Analyse for: data field, select “Combined Bending,
Axial and Shear” from the dropdown selection to display the graphical results.
5-11
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Both Max Moments with Associated shears and Max Shears with associated
moments are checked giving two lines on the diagram.
Design for Longitudinal Shear

Longitudinal shear resistance is checked along two planes. The first is the
plane of the interface between the steel and concrete and is resisted by shear
connectors welded to the top flange and cast into the concrete slab. The
second is the vertical plane through the slab adjacent to the edge of the top
flange and is resisted by the dowel action of the transverse reinforcement.
Before the design checks can be carried out it is first necessary to specify a
default shear connector arrangement and transverse reinforcement. The
arrangements and reinforcement quantities can then be adjusted to fit the
requirements.
30. First close the Composite Beam Analysis form by clicking on ✓ OK and then
open the Define Composite Beam form by selecting “Beam Definition” in the
navigation window.
31. To define the shear connectors, use the drop down list in the Define and locate
span features: field to select “Longitudinal Shear Connectors” which will display
the Location of Shear Connectors form. Accept the default arrangement by
closing the form by clicking on✓ OK. (Note that the shear connectors are
shown in the graphics view – zoom in to see this in greater detail).
32. The same thing can be done with transverse slab reinforcement before closing
the Define Composite Beam form by clicking on ✓ OK.
To check the adequacy of the default shear connectors and

transverse reinforcement use the Analyse toolbar button
in the navigation window to open the Composite Beam
Analysis form. Change Analyse for: to “Interface shear for
gr1b-gr5 1” and Display: to “Shear connectors”.
5-12
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
The graphics display shows that the default shear stud type and spacing is not
satisfactory at the places of max shear flow. Hence, we would install additional
shear links near the ends of the beam in this case.
33. Now change the Display radio button to Transverse reinforcement and the
graphic display now shows that the Design Resistance is not sufficient at the
ends of the beam, so the reinforcement needs to be altered.
34. Close the Composite Beam Analysis form by

clicking ✓ OK and return to the Location of Shear
Connectors form (see 31... above). The shear
connector type and size will remain the same but
the spacing can be decreased toward the ends of
the beam. Additional rows of data can be added in
the form by selecting, in the next available row, the
same connector type as the previous lines. This
will display a Shear Connector Detail form to define
the stud size and strength.
Accept the defaults by clicking on ✓ OK then edit

the data in the other columns as shown below.
5-13
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Close the form by clicking on ✓ OK. The Transverse Reinforcement in Slab

form can be accessed using Define and locate span features. In the case of
this example there is no need to alter the bar diameter or spacing of the
transverse slab reinforcement because the design resistance has been
increased sufficiently by altering the shear studs. Close all forms and save the
changes by clicking on ✓ OK.
35. Open the Composite Beam Analysis form and check that the effects of the
changes made to the shear connectors are acceptable.
When the analysis form is open the results graphs can be displayed in a 3D
isometric window by clicking on the icon on the graphics window. Close the
Composite Beam Analysis form with the ✓ OK button
5-14
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
36. Click on the File | Save As... menu item and save the file as “My EU Example
5_1.sam”.
Summary
In this example we have taken a steel composite beam created in a previous example
and applied load to it for a series of design load cases. We have also applied a
differential temperature profile and shrinkage strain to the beam, then checked the
beam for a series of design criteria.
5-15
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
5-16
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
5.2. Prestressed Beam Design

Subjects Covered:
Prestressed beam design; Erection loads; Generate beam loads; Beam dead load;
Temporary support loads; Apply negative loads to beams; Temporary construction
loads; Beam span increments; Constructions loads; Remove loads; Superimposed
dead loads; Import live loads; Absolute shears; Eurocode temperature profiles;
Tendon layout optimisation; Shear resistance; Shear width; Shear link requirements;
Transverse reinforcement requirements.
Outline
A composite pre-tensioned pre-cast beam and concrete slab is shown below. The
beam is an internal beam of a simply supported bridge deck of 21m span and the 2m
wide concrete slab is cast in one. The dimensions of the beam can be found in
example 4.3
The bending and shear effects due to dead load and superimposed dead load
(2.5kN/m) are created by using the “Generate” feature in the program. During
construction the beam is initially supported on temporary supports at 1m from the
beam ends. There is also a temporary load of 1.4kN/m over the length of the beam
which represents temporary construction loads and the water in wet concrete. This
load and the temporary supports are removed once the concrete has hardened.
Max live load bending (with associated shears) and shear effects (with associated
moments) have been prepared in an external ASCII file as envelopes.
There are no secondary effects due to differential temperature and shrinkage, as the
beam is statically determinate, but the primary stresses need to be included for both,
where appropriate. The temperature profile to be applied to the section is in
accordance with Differential Temp Fig 6.2, with a surfacing finish 100mm thick. The
shrinkage strain for the concrete is to be set to -0.00025 with 20% of this occurring
before the insitu slab is cast. The differential shrinkage strain should be -0.0001 and
the creep coefficient set to 1.5.
5-17
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
It is required to design the required tendon layout with appropriate debonding so that
SLS and ULS design criteria for bending moments and stresses are met during
transfer, beam erection and during normal use. Shear link spacing in the beam also
needs to be determined to resist both transverse and longitudinal shear forces. The
reinforcement grade for the shear links is the same as that for the main reinforcement
and the vertical shear is resisted by the precast beam only. For longitudinal shear it
can be assumed that the interface surface is Type 2.
All design is to Eurocodes.
Procedure
1. Start the program and open the data file “EU Example 4_3.sam” created in
section 4.
2. Use the menu item File | Titles... to set the title as “Prestressed Concrete
Beam” with a sub-title of “Example 5.2”. Also change the Job Number: to “5.2”
and add your initials to the Calculated by data item if necessary. Click on ✓
OK to close the titles form
Define Erection Loads

Next we will define erection of beam loads using the “Generate” facility to
include two extra components; one for the temp 1kN/m and the other for the
support loads (upwards).
3. To add a this erection load effects open the Define Pre-Tensioned Beam Loads
form using the button, in the toolbar of the navigation window, and select
Beam Loads | Beam Erection
4. Click on the Generate button and then click on “Yes” on the confirmation form
that appears. The Generate Beam Loads form will now open.
The program automatically calculates the dead load for the beam and adds it
as the first component of the generated load, called “Beam dead load”.
This load needs to be applied equally to the two temporary support locations.
The UDL intensity is 13.4306kN/m which applies a total load of 282.0426kN to
the beam. Since the program can’t apply a point load to a beam, this needs to
5-18
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
be applied using two, 100mm long UDLs. The equivalent applied UDL intensity
over a 100mm length is 1410.213kN/m.
5. Click on the Add Load Component button and enter the UDL Intensity Start and
End as “1410.213kN/m”. Set Start Dimension to “0.95m” and the End
Dimension to “1.05m”. Change the ULS and SLS Load Factors to “-1.35” and
“-1” respectively to make this an upward load and set the Component Ref. to
“Left Temp Support”.
6. Click on the Add Load Component button and repeat the process
(remembering to make ULS and SLS Load Factors negative), this time setting
the Start Dimension to “19.95m”, the End Dimension to “20.05m” and the
Component Ref. to “Right Temp Support”.
Finally, the temporary load due to construction and water in the wet concrete
needs to be defined.
7. Click on the Add Load Component button again and enter the UDL Intensity
Start and End as “1.4kN/m”. Leave all the other fields at their default values
and set the Component Ref. to “Temp Construction”.
5-19
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
8. In the Increments section, set Beam span equally divided by to “50” then click
✓ OK to close the Generate Beam Loads form.
The Define Pre-tensioned Beam Loads form will now show the total load
applied by the four load components. Note that by default the calculated
shears are Absolute Shear values but can be changed to Real Shear using the
radio button at the bottom of the Define Pre-Tensioned Beam Loads form. This
may be necessary to ensure that all the different load case shears are of the
same type.
9. Close the Define Pre-Tensioned Beam Loads form with the ✓ OK button.
Define Construction Stage 1 Loads

The next step is to define the load effects for construction stage 1.
10. Open a new Define Pre-Tensioned Beam Loads form using the button in
the toolbar of the navigation window, and select Beam Loads | Construction
Stage 1A
11. Click on the “Generate” button to open the Generate Beam Loads form. The
program automatically calculates the UDL intensity for the self weight of the
slab so just click ✓ OK to create the effects and close the form.
12. Close the Define Pre-Tensioned Beam Load form with the ✓ OK button
5-20
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Remove Temporary Loads and Supports

The next step is to define a load case to remove the effects of the temporary
loads and supports.
the toolbar of the navigation window, and select Beam Loads | Other
permanent action then click on the “Generate” button.
14. Set the UDL Intensity Start and End as “1410.213kN/m”. Set Start Dimension
to “0.95m” and the End Dimension to “1.05m”. Change the ULS and SLS Load
Factors to “1.35” and “1” respectively and set the Component Ref. to “Rm Left
Temp Sup”.
15. Click on the Add Load Component button and repeat the process, this time
setting the Start Dimension to “19.95m”, the End Dimension to “20.05m”.
Change the ULS and SLS Load Factors to “1.35” and “1” respectively and set
the Component Ref. to “Rm Right Temp Sup”.
16. Finally it is necessary to remove the temporary construction loads. Click on the
Add Load Component button again and enter the UDL Intensity Start and End
as “1.4kN/m”. Change the ULS and SLS Load Factors to “-1.35” and “-1”
respectively and set the Component Ref. to “Rm Temp Const”.
17. In the Increments section, set Beam span equally divided by to “50” then click
✓ OK to close the Generate Beam Loads form. The Define Pre-tensioned
Beam Loads form will now show the total load applied by the three load
components. In the User Name: field enter “Rm temp const Load” to assist
with identification in the navigation window before closing the Beam Load form
Define Surfacing and Live Loads

The next step is to define the SDL surfacing loads.
the toolbar of the navigation window, and select Beam Loads | Surfacing then
click on the “Generate” button to open the Generate Beam Loads form
5-21
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
19. Set the UDL Intensity Start and End as “2.5kN/m” then click ✓ OK to generate
the load effects
20. Close the Define Pre-Tensioned Beam Loads form with the ✓ OK button
The next step will be to import some results from a separate live load analysis
by using a text file that is formatted in a certain way. This file may have any
number of load effect cases but in this case it will contain just two.
21. Click on the “Import” toolbar button from the navigation toolbar. Select the
supplied file “EU Live Loads.sld” and click Open. This will import loads into the
‘Traffic gr1b-gr5 – for Bending design’ and ‘Traffic gr1b-gr5 - for Shear design’
design load cases and will appear in the navigation tree. Select one of these to
check the format.
It can be seen that the shear effects are all positive, which means absolute
values are assumed. This is why it is important to ensure that the other load
cases are absolute shears.
22. Click ✓ OK to close the Define Pre-tensioned Beam Loads form.
Enter Temperature Profile and Shrinkage and Creep Parameters

A differential temperature profile needs to be defined and values for the
shrinkage and shear parameters need to be specified. These are entered from
the analysis form.
23. Click on the Analyse Beam toolbar button to open the Pre-tensioned Beam
Analysis form. Click in the Analyse for: field and select “Differential temperature
primary stress” to open the Differential Temperature Analysis form.
24. In the Type field select “EN 1991-1-1-5 Fig 6.2 Non-Linear” from the list of
options and set the Type of Deck field to “Type 3b: concrete beams”. Then set
the Surface thickness to “0.1m” before closing the form with the ✓ OK button
to accept this profile
5-22
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
25. Next, click on the Set parameters for: drop down and select “Time dependant
effect calculations” from the list of options. This will open the Time Dependant
Effect Calculations form.
26. Set the Shrinkage strain to “0.00025”, the Long term losses occurring before
composite to “20%”, the Differential shrinkage to “0.0001” and the Creep
coefficient to “1.5”. (Tick the relevant tickboxes to activate these fields).
27. Click ✓ OK to save the parameters.
28. Set the value in the Exposure: field to “XD1”.
Tendon Optimisation
The next step is to design the required tendon layout, such that it will comply
with stress limits for all design cases. The tendon optimisation algorithms in
the program can be used to do this to achieve the most economical solution.
29. Click on the Tendon Optimisation button on the Pre-tensioned Beam Analysis
form and click ✓ OK on the information form. This will open the Tendon
Optimisation form.
30. Tick the Applied Load tick box and the Debond tick box. For this example the
Locations / Limit field will be set to “4”. Use the default values for all the other
fields on the form and click on the Design Optimised Layout button.
After a short while a warning message will appear indicating that the limiting
strains in the concrete slab at ULS do not comply as they are primarily in
compression. Not this warning and continue using the ✓ OK button on the
warning message. The program will now consider a series of tendon
arrangements to come up with the optimised layout for the beam.
At the end of the optimisation, the program produces an error message and
provides a summary on the right hand side of the form. This indicates that the
software cannot find a solution with this configuration.
5-23
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
31. Click ✓ OK to close the error message then click on the ✓ OK button to close
the optimisation form. Click ✓ OK to close the Pre-tensioned Beam Analysis
form.
In order to resolve the first warning and get a solution we will try increasing the
strength of the precast concrete material and adjusting the strain limit of the
cast in place concrete.
32. Change the navigation window to Materials and select the 1st material. In the
Ultimate Compressive Strain, cu field enter “0.002”.Click ✓ OK on the Define
Property Details form to save the change.
33. Select the 2nd material in the navigation tree. In the fck field, change “40” to “50”
to increase the strength. Click ✓ OK to save the change.
34. Change the navigation window to Design Beam and click on the Analyse Beam
toolbar button to re-analyse the beam.
35. Click on the “Tendon Optimisation” button and adjust the Debonding Limits: per
Jump: to “30%”, then click on the “Design Optimised Layout” button to re-run
the tendon optimisation with the new material properties.
This time the tendon optimisation will complete without an error message.
Take note of the warning message – but the prestress is adjusted automatically
anyway to satisfy this. Click ✓ OK on the warning message and click ✓ OK to
close the Tendon Optimisation form.
5-24
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
It is noted that the compressive stresses at transfer are shown in red – which
indicates a failure. This is because that in some locations the stresses exceed
the basic limiting compressive stress, but, the code allows an increase in this if
it can be justified (eg increased QA at a precast yard). In addition, there has
been no consideration of any enhancements that could be obtained, for
example, by considering the concrete being cured at a higher temperature.
We can now investigate this.
36. In the Set parameters for: field select “Time dependent effect calculations”. In
the resulting data form set the Ambient temperature: field to “28” and close the
form with ✓ OK (again dismissing the warning message)
Check Stresses for other design situations

The next step is to check the stresses for other design combinations (e.g.
beam erection, construction stages and live load cases). In this example the
stresses will be checked for the one live load combination we have, however,
this should be checked at “t = ∞” and “t = 61”, just after the structure is
complete” to take account of time dependant effects .
The graphical display is a good way to make these checks, but the graphics
will display only one of four conditions at a time (i.e. min top stress, min bottom
stress, max top stress or max bottom stress). So for one live load combination
we should make a total of 8 graphical checks.
37. Click on the Analyse for: drop down and select “Bending for gr 1b-gr5 1”.
There are no secondary temperate effects as the structure is simply supported
so dismiss the confirmation notice with the Yes button. Also dismiss the
warning message as before.
5-25
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
38. On the Pre-tensioned Beam Analysis form set Time Considered: to “t = ∞” and
the Fibre Stress: field to “Minimum top”. Set the Results Point of Interest to
“20” and Note the stresses and repeat for the other three Fibre Stress:
conditions.
39. Set Time Considered: to “t = 61” days and the Fibre Stress: field to “Minimum
top”. Note the stresses and repeat for the other three Fibre Stress conditions.
T=Inf fibre =Min top T=Inf fibre =Min bottom
T=Inf fibre =Max top T=Inf fibre =Max bottom
T=61 days fibre =Min top T=61 days fibre =Min bottom
T=61 days fibre =Max top T=61 days fibre =Max bottom
5-26
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Although the stresses don’t appear to change much in this example the
differences become more marked when the structure is continuous where
secondary effects become more significant.
40. In the graphics window click on the slab in the small section to display the slab
stresses and if the shift key is held down at the same time then reinforcement
or tendon stresses are displayed
Design for Shear

The next step is to check the beam for shear, both at SLS for web shear
cracking and at ULS for direct vertical shear
41. Click on the Analyse for: drop down and select “Shear for gr 1b-gr5 1”. If a
warning message appears dismiss it because we will set the limit state to SLS
Frequent anyway as it is a prestressed beam.
42. Set the Limit State: field to “SLS Frequent” and note the reduction in the tensile
principle stress effect.
43. You will notice that the beam appears to fail at the very ends but in reality this
will be well within the cast in place diaphragms so web shear cracking should
not be a problem.
5-27
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
44. Now change the Limit State: field to “ULS Persistent/Transient” to carry out the
calculations for vertical shear where we will determine the requirement for
shear links
The calculations show that even with the default minimum strut angle the
section will adequately carry the design shear effects giving a minimum link
spacing of about 160mm (this can be seen by clicking on the “Results” button
and examining the table in the results viewer). However, these requirements
need to be merged together with the longitudinal shear link requirements so, it
may be more advantageous to increase the strut angle. This will have the
effect of increasing the number of shear links required for direct shear, but
reducing the requirement on any additional longitudinal steel (even if in this
example no additional longitudinal reinforcement is required at any angle). This
will be better in most cases as the requirement for direct shear links and
interface shear links will be closer so the addition will be minimised. To
achieve this we need to adjust the shear calculation parameters.
45. In the Set Parameters for: field select “Shear calculations”, from the list, which
will open the Design Data for Shear form. Change the value in the Angle
between strut and beam axis field to 45.
46. Also, in the Surface Condition: field, for Interface shear, change the value from
“Smooth” to “Rough”, to determine the correct cohesion and friction factors,
and then change it to “User Defined” to activate these factors before closing
the form with the ✓ OK button.
47. Click on the Results button and scroll down to the bottom of the Results
Viewer. Note that the values of MRd divided by MEd are always greater than 1
(see note [3] at the bottom of the Results Viewer) which means that no
additional longitudinal reinforcement is necessary for shear requirements.
5-28
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Shear Link Requirements for both Direct and Interface Shear

Now that the beam design passes for the direct shear force case, the next step
is to design the shear links in the beam merging the requirements from the
direct and interface shear cases.
48. Click on the Analyse for field and select “Interface shear for gr1b-gr5 1” from
the drop down list.
The interface shear requirement is the red dashed line and the interface shear
resistance supplied by the links defined for direct shear is the solid blue line, so
it can be seen that additional links are required only in the areas where the red
line is above the blue line
49. Set the design section location to the left hand end (point 1) and click on the
Results button. Scroll down to the bottom of the results so you can see the
reinforcement requirement
5-29
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
50. When the analysis form is open the results graphs can be displayed in a 3D
isometric window by clicking on the icon on the graphics window:
51. Click on the File | Save As... menu item. Set the file name to “My EU Example
5_2.sam” and click on the “Save” button.
Summary
In this example we have taken a prestressed beam created in a previous example
and applied load to it for a series of design load cases. We have also carried out a
tendon optimisation then checked the beam for a series of design criteria.
5-30
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
5.3. Reinforced Concrete Beam Design

Subjects Covered:
Reinforced concrete; Modify length; Import loads; ULS design; Minimise
reinforcement; Curtail bars; SLS design; Shear link design; 3.1.2 of EN 1992-1-1
Outline
A reinforced concrete beam is shown below.
The dimensions of the original beam can be found in Example 4.5.
The beam will be modified to reduce the length from 30m to 29.82m. We will then
import some loads from an external file and carry out a detailed design of the beam in
the following order:
1. Check the beam at ULS for both sagging and hogging cases.
2. Modify the reinforcement to provide adequate moment resistance.
3. Curtail the reinforcement and remove bars to minimise the quantity of

reinforcement whilst still having sufficient moment resistance for both sagging
and hogging at ULS at all points along the beam.
4. Design the shear links
5. Check the beam at SLS for both sagging and hogging cases.
6. Check the beam with the concrete cylinder strength at 14 days in accordance
with clause 3.1.2 of EN 1992-1-1.
Procedure
1. Start the program and open the data file “EU Example 4_5.sam” in section 4.5.
2. Use the menu item File | Titles... to set the title as “Reinforced Concrete Beam
Design” with a sub-title of “Example 5.3”. Set the Job Number to “5.3” and add
your initials to the Calculated by field. Click on ✓ OK to close the titles form.
5-31
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Modify Beam Length

The beam file which was put together in Example 4.5 is 30m long as a generic
beam for use on a scheme. In this example we are going to use the same
beam profile for a slightly different span of 29.82m.
3. In the Design Beam navigation window select “Beam Definition” to open the
Reinforced Concrete Beam Definition form. Change the value in the Beam
span field from “30m” to “29.82m” and press ‘Enter’ on the keyboard. The
program opens the following confirmation form:
Click Yes and the program will modify the length of the beam and move the
soffit locations to the same proportional position. Click ✓ OK to close the beam
definition form.
Import Loads
4. The next step is to import some loads created in a line beam analysis. Click on
the Import Loads from SLD file toolbar button in the navigation toolbar
which will open a file browser.
5. Select the file “EU 29.82m beam right span.sld” and click on the “Open” button.
The program will import the loads in the file into the following design load
cases:
• Construction stage 1A
• Surfacing 1
• Traffic gr1b-gr5 – for Bending design 1
• Traffic gr1b-gr5 – for Bending design 2
• Traffic gr1b-gr5 – for Shear design 1
Repeat the last two steps, this time selecting the file “EU Temperature Example
5_3.sld”. This file contains data for:
5-32
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
• Differential Temperature Heating

• Differential Temperature Cooling
The loads imported from the file can be reviewed by selecting the appropriate
design load case from the navigation window tree. Click Cancel on the form to
close any Define Reinforced Concrete Beam Load form left open after this
review.
Design for ULS

Now that the loads have been imported into the design beam, a design check
for Ultimate Limit State moments can be carried out.
6. Click on the Analyse Beam navigation window toolbar button to open the
Reinforced Concrete Beam Analysis form. In the Analyse for dropdown select
“Differential Temperature primary stresses” which will open the Differential
Temperature Analysis form.
7. Set Type to be “EN1991-1-5 Fig.6.2 Non-Linear” and the Type of Deck to be

“Type 3b: concrete beams”. Also check that Surface Thickness is 0.1m before
clicking on ✓ OK to close the form.
8. Click on the Analyse for drop down and select “Bending for gr1b-gr5 1” from
the list. Make sure the Limit State option is set to “ULS Persistent/Transient”.
The graphical results show the design moment line in green which means the
beam design passes for the positive (sagging) moment case. Looking at the
top right of the form, we can see that this design of beam requires 26.49
tonnes of reinforcement.
5-33
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
9. The next step is to check the negative (Hogging) moment case. Click on the
Analyse for drop down and select “Bending for gr1b-gr5 2” from the list. The
graphical results will update and show the following plot:
The design moment curve is shown in red, indicating that there is insufficient
reinforcement at the top of the beam at the left end.
The reinforcement needs to be modified to increase the negative resistance

(Hogging) moment.
10. Click anywhere on the beam elevation to open the Define RC Beam
Reinforcement form together with the associated graphics windows. We will
start by adding a third layer of reinforcement to the top of the beam. First of all
drag the red section line on the elevation with the mouse, holding the left
mouse button down, to the left end of the beam.
11. Click on the “+” button near the bottom of the form. This will open the Define
Reinforcement form.
12. Click on the Generate drop down and select “1 bar by 2 covers”. Set the
Diameter field to “40mm” then click on the left hand face and the lower middle
face on the top of the section. This opens the Locate bar by 2 covers form.
Set the covers to “230mm” and “50mm” then click ✓ OK.
5-34
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
13. Next, click on the lower middle face on the top of the section and the right hand
face and set both covers to “50mm” and “230mm” then click ✓ OK.
The next step is to define the remaining bars in the new layer.
Of bars to “15” then click on the Snap drop down on the graphics toolbar and
between the two end bars.
5-35
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
15. Click ✓ OK to close the Define Reinforcement form then click OK on the
warning message which appears. Finally, click ✓ OK to close the Define RC
Beam Reinforcement form and return to the beam analysis.
The graphical results show that the negative resistance moment is still
inadequate (but not by much).
This can be remedied by adding a further layer of reinforcement at the top of

the beam.
16. Click anywhere on the beam side elevation in the graphic window to open the
Define RC Beam Reinforcement form together with the associated graphics
windows. Click on the “+” button near the bottom of the form. This will open the
Define Reinforcement form.
17. Click on the Generate drop down and select “1 bar by 2 covers”. Set the
Diameter field to “40mm” then click on the left hand face and the lower middle
face on the top of the section. This opens the Locate bar by 2 covers form.
Set the covers to “320mm” and “50mm” then click ✓ OK.
18. Next, click on the lower middle face on the top of the section and the right hand
face and set both covers to “50mm” and “320mm” then click ✓ OK.
5-36
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
The next step is to define the remaining bars in the new layer.
Of bars to “15” then click on the Snap drop down on the graphics toolbar and
between the two end bars.
20. Click ✓ OK to close the Define Reinforcement form then click OK on the
warning message which appears. Finally, click ✓ OK to close the Define RC
Beam Reinforcement form and return to the beam analysis.
The graphical results show that the beam now has sufficient top reinforcement.
The next stage in the design is to optimise the reinforcement arrangement to

reduce the quantity of steel. This initial, working arrangement has 35.32
tonnes of reinforcement.
21. In the Analyse for: dropdown select “Bending forgr1b-gr5 2”. It can be seen that
there is excess capacity in the sagging resistance so the quantity of bottom
reinforcement can be reduced.
22. Click anywhere on the beam side elevation to open the Define RC Beam
Reinforcement form. In the beam section draw a box around the top layer of
bars in the bottom of the beam; this will select them and turn them red.
23. Click on the “-” button at the bottom of the table and this will remove the layer
of bars.
5-37
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
24. Click ✓ OK on the Define RC Beam Reinforcement forms. Checking the

results for both sagging and hogging cases, where it can be seen that the
beam still has sufficient resistance and the reinforcement quantity has reduced
to 30.9 tonnes.
This is a far more efficient arrangement of reinforcement so we can begin to

curtail the bars to optimise the required reinforcement still further.
Reinforcement form. Draw a box around the top row of the bottom
reinforcement group. Click on the ‘Edit reinforcement attributes’ button
near the bottom of the form. This will open the Edit Reinforcement Attributes
form. To modify the tart and end locations of the bars, tick the Modify check
box and enter proportions of “0.4” and “0.85” for Start: and End: in the form.
26. Click ✓ OK on both forms and check the results for both cases again. Both
cases need to be checked as adjusting the bottom reinforcement may have an
5-38
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
effect on both positive and negative resistance moments. There is still

sufficient reinforcement which has been reduced to 28.47 tonnes.
However, the bottom reinforcement can be reduced still further.
Reinforcement form. Draw a box around the middle row of the bottom
reinforcement group. Click on the ‘Edit reinforcement attributes’ button near the
bottom of the form. This will open the Edit Reinforcement Attributes form.
Again tick the Modify check box and enter proportions of “0.2” and “1” in the
form. Click ✓ OK on both forms and check the results for both cases again.
The beam still has sufficient resistance and the reinforcement has been
reduced to 27.58 tonnes.
The next step is to optimise the top reinforcement group.
Reinforcement form. Draw a box around the lowest row of the top
reinforcement group and click on the ‘Edit reinforcement attributes’ button Tick
the Modify check box and enter proportions of “0” and “0.1” in the form. Click ✓
OK on both forms and check the results for both cases again. The resistance
moment is still ok and the reinforcement has been reduced to 23.61 tonnes.
5-39
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
The top reinforcement can be reduced still further.
Reinforcement form. Draw a box around the third from top row of the top
reinforcement group and click on the ‘Edit reinforcement attributes’ button near
the bottom of the form. This will open the Set Reinforcement Attributes form.
Tick the Modify check box and enter proportions of “0” and “0.2” in the form
then click ✓ OK.
30. Draw a box around the next row of reinforcement upwards and change the
locations along the beam to “0” and “0.35”. Click ✓ OK on both forms and
check the results for both cases again. The beam still passes and the
reinforcement has been reduced to 17.21 tonnes.
Now that the beam has been optimised for both hogging and sagging ULS load
cases, the next step is to design the shear links in the beam.
31. Click on the Analyse for drop down and select “Shear for gr1b-gr5 1” from the
list. The plot of results will now show the design shear together with the
maximum allowable shear force and the shear force resistance with nominal
links.
5-40
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
It can be seen that the design shear is slightly greater than the max allowable
shear at the left hand support.
To increase the max allowable shear the strength of the concrete could be
increased but more conveniently the angle of the compression strut in the
concrete could be increased for the shear calculations. The effect of this will
increase the shear link reinforcement requirements while reducing the amount
of longitudinal shear reinforcement required. Only a small adjustment is
required.
32. In the Set Parameters for: data field select “Shear Calculations” to display the
Design Data for Shear data form. Change the Angle between strut and beam
axis from “21.80141” (the default and the minimum) to “22.5” degrees. Close
the form with the ✓ OK button
The default bar diameter is set to 10mm, which is what will be used in the
calculation of the link spacings. This can be changed in this form if required.
33. Click on the Results button to view the shear calculations. Scroll down to the
bottom of the results to see summary of link requirements.
5-41
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Looking at the results, it can be seen that the link spacings may be put into four
groups. These are:
• 0m to 6m
• 6m to 15m
• 15m to 25m
• 25m to 29.82m
Based upon the table above it is suggested to use:
Location Diameter Legs Spacing
0m to 6m 10mm 6 125mm
6m to15m 10mm 6 200mm
115m to 25m 10mm 4 250mm
25m to 29.82m 10mm 4 150mm
34. Close the results viewer with the “Exit” button at the top of the viewer
Design for SLS

The beam also needs to be checked at Serviceability.
35. In the Reinforced Concrete Beam Analysis form click on the Analyse for drop
down and select “Bending for gr1b-gr5 1” from the list. Make sure the Limit
State option is set to “SLS Characteristic”.
5-42
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
The graphical results show the design stress line is now red because the beam
design does not quite pass for the sagging case by a small margin. The user
may want to consider whether to make further adjustments to such a beam.
Repeating this for the hogging case shows that the beam still passes for
hogging.
Finally, the strength of the concrete beam, at say, 14 days can be checked in
accordance with clause 3.1.2 of EN 1992-1-1. (Assuming cement strength of
Class R).
36. Click ✓ OK to close the Reinforced Concrete Beam Analysis form then change
the navigation window to Materials. Select the grade C40/50 concrete material
to open the Define Property Details form and then change Characteristic
Strength, fck to 36.85MPa. Click ✓ OK to close the form.
37. Change the navigation window to Design Beam and click on the Analyse
toolbar button to open the Reinforced Concrete Beam Analysis form. Set the
Analyse for field to “Construction stage” and set the Limit State field to “6.10
ULS Persistent/Transient”. It can be seen that the beam still passes for
construction stages at ULS. Set the Limit State option to “SLS Characteristic”
to confirm that it also passes. When the analysis form is open the results
graphs can be displayed in a 3D isometric window by clicking on the icon on
the graphics window:
5-43
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
38. Click ✓ OK to close the Reinforced Concrete Beam Analysis form then click on
the File | Save As... menu item. Set the file name to “My EU Example
5_3.sam” and click on the “Save” button.
Summary
In this example we have changed the length of a standard beam to fit a specific
structure then carried out a detailed design. During the design process we have
modified the reinforcement by adding, removing and curtailing bars. We have also
checked the design with a reduced concrete strength at 14 days in accordance with
clause 3.1.2 of EN 1992-1-1.
5-44
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
6. Analysis - Model Definition
Contents
6.1. Line Beam Definition ................................................................................................. 6-3
6.2. Portal Frame Definition ............................................................................................. 6-7
6.3. 3D Truss Footbridge ............................................................................................... 6-19
6.4. Simple Grillage ....................................................................................................... 6-33
6.5. Finite Element Slab ................................................................................................. 6-47
6-1
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
6-2
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
6.1. Line Beam Definition

Subjects Covered:
Line Beam Analysis; Line Beam Geometry; Drop In Span; Parametric Shapes
Outline
It is required to form a five span line beam analysis model to represent a reinforced
concrete “T” beam, with dimensions as shown below. The first span is an 8m
cantilever and the third span consists of two cantilevers at each end supporting a 15m
drop in span. The beam is constructed of grade C40/50 concrete (Elastic modulus
35.2205MPa)
To model the drop in span we specify the line beam to have 7 spans and specify the
supports at the internal bearing locations accordingly.
Each span is split into 1m segments which will define the results output locations.
Once the beam is defined, produce a full data summary report in PDF format and
save the data file for use in another example.
Procedure
1. Start the program and create a new project using the menu item File | New |
Create from Template... and select “EU Project” from the “My Templates” list
Create line beam geometry

2. Use the menu item Data | Structure Type | Line Beam to start a line beam
analysis (dismissing the warning message).
3. Using the File | Titles menu option set the Project title to “5 Span Line Beam”
with a sub title of “Example 6.1”. Also set the Job Number: to “6.1” and put your
initials in the Calculations by: field. Close the form with ✓ OK
4. Move to the Structure Definition navigation window, using the button in the
bottom left of the application, and then click on the Structure Geometry icon to
open the Line Beam Geometry form.
6-3
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
5. Set the Number of Spans: field to “7” and press the Enter key. The graphics will
update to show the new configuration.
6. In the table, double-click on the Span Length field in row 1 and type in a value
of “8”. Enter appropriate span lengths in the other rows as shown in the table
below. (rows 7&8 are out-of-view but the last span length is “10”).
7. Specify the support conditions such that all span ends are fixed in
displacement but free to rotate (the default), but then free the displacement at
the end of the cantilever (row 1) and each end of the drop in span (rows 4 & 5).
This will be shown in the graphics as:
6-4
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
8. Finally, change the value in Divide Shortest Span into to 5, which will split the
smallest span into 1m segments. The longest span is updated automatically.
Close the form using the ✓ OK button.
Define Section Properties

9. Change the navigation pane on the left hand side of the screen to
Design Sections.
1. Click on the button at the top to display the selection list as shown and pick
New Section | Parametric Shape...
2. In the Parametric Shape Properties form change the Shape Reference to “T”
and then set height: to “1000mm”, width to “1500mm”, web thickness to
“500mm” and flange thickness to “200mm”.
3. Enter a Name as “RC T Beam” and using the dropdown for Property select the
grade C40/50 concrete material. Close this form with the ✓ OK button
4. Change the navigation pane on the left hand side of the screen to Structure
Properties then select the task option of Create Section and Beam Groups to
load all defined design sections and beams into the navigation tree. In this
case just the single section.
6-5
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
5. First select the Section item in the navigation window to open the Structure
Properties: Section form and then to assign this property to all members in the
structure draw a window round the whole structure in the Structure Graphics
screen (Click at the top LH corner and release, move the cursor to the bottom
RH corner and click again). The selected beams are then displayed in red.
6. Close the Structure Properties: Section form using the ✓ OK button.
7. Use the menu item File | Data Reports... to open the Data Reports form. Click
the button Include All and then select the View button to display the report.
This can be viewed, converted to a pdf file and saved if required.
8. Use the menu item File | Save as... to save the data file with a name of “My
EU Example 6_1.sst”.
Summary
A Line Beam model is very easy to put together as the geometry is very simple. This
makes it a very efficient method of analysis for preliminary design.
However, it must be remembered that a line beam only considers in plane vertical
displacement and rotation about a perpendicular axis (ie. dz and ry degrees of
freedom). This will of course mean that only two member actions are valid at the ends
of each beam segment (ie. Moments about the horizontal axis and vertical shear).
If torsions, axial forces or transverse bending effects are significant in a structure then
a line beam will not represent them.
6-6
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
6.2. Portal Frame Definition

Subjects Covered:
Refined Analysis; 2D Frame; Sub Model Planes; Drawing 2D Members; Splitting
Members; Importing Sections; Copying Properties; Filtering; Rotating Local Axes;
Copying 2D Sub Models; Renumbering Joints; Support Conditions; Member Release
of Degrees of Freedom; User Notes; Data Reports
Outline
It is required to form a two storey, single bay, building frame analysis model as shown
below. Each storey is 8m high and the column spacing is 10m. All joints have fully
fixed connections except at the ends of the first floor beams, where there is full shear
and axial continuity, but no moment connection. All frame members are constructed
with grade 355 structural steel.
To model the beam column joint accurately we will place a model node at the face of
the column as well as the column centre. The short member between these nodes
will have stiff properties (say 103 times greater than the actual beam). This will ensure
that the moment releases applied to the ends of the actual beam are in the correct
location.
Each beam and column is split into 10 segments which will define the results output
locations.
The beam and column sections have been defined in the section module and are
loaded from external files.
Once the frame is defined, produce a full data summary report in PDF format and
save the data file for use in another example.
6-7
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Procedure
Setup & Geometry

Create from Template... and select “EU Project” from the My Templates list
2. Use the menu item Data | Structure Type | Refined Analysis to specify a
refined analysis rather than a line beam.
3. Using the File | Titles menu option set the Project title to “2 Storey Single Bay
Frame” with a sub title of “Example 6.2”. Also set the Job Number: to “6.2” and
put your initials in the Calculations by: field. Close the form with ✓ OK
4. Move to the Structure Definition navigation window and click on the button
and select 2D Sub Model from the selection list. This will create an entry in the
navigation tree and open the 2D Sub Model Plane form.
5. We wish to define this frame in the XZ plane, so click on the button and
you will notice the axes change in the graphics. Close the Sub Model Plane
6. To create the structural members open the Define Sub Model Members form
by clicking on the element in the Structure tree.
6-8
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
7. To create a member we simply draw it in the graphics window making use of

an appropriate snap mode. Initially click on the icon in the graphics toolbar.
8. Then click on the origin of the graphics screen followed by another click 8m in
the vertical direction (Count the grid points as the Snap mode should be set to
grid).
9. If the member is drawn wrongly, simply click on the Edit Members item in the
Member Tasks list and change the coordinates in the displayed form before
closing this form with the ✓ OK button.
10. To draw the second column use the Copy Member(s) item in the Member Task
list and enter a translation vector of (10,0) before clicking on the Apply button
and then the ✓ OK button
11. Now draw the transverse beam between the top two nodes of the column by
following the same procedure as in 8 above, but setting the Snap mode on the
graphics toolbar to “Node in Plane”.
12. The next task is to split the two columns into 10 segments each. This is done
by using Split Beam Element in the Member task list.
13. In the Split Beam Element form set Split specified beam element /by specified
division by clicking on the appropriate radio button controls. And then set the
Number of new elements to “10”.
6-9
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
14. Click on the leftmost column in the graphics (turns red) and then click on the
Apply button to see the 10 segments generated in the graphics window.
15. Repeat 14 for the rightmost column.
16. Now click on the beam, but set Number of new elements to “3” (hit enter to
update the table) and change the segment Lengths in the table to “0.15m”,
“9.7m” and “0.15m”. Click on the Apply button to split the beam.
17. Now click on the middle segment of the beam and split this into 8 equal length
segments using the Apply button. Close the Split Beam Element form with the
✓ OK button. Use the Fit View icon on the graphics toolbar to fill the
graphics screen with the structure.
Section Properties
It is now necessary to define some section properties for the beams and
columns. Two design section files are supplied, one for the beam section and
one for the column, which will be imported into the project and embedded
18. Close the Define Sub Model Members form with the ✓ OK button and change
the Navigation window to Design Sections.
19. Click on the button in the navigation toolbar and choose Existing Design
Section from the list of options which will display the Open Existing file form.
6-10
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Select the file called “EU Example 6_2 Beam Section.sam” in the file browser
and “Open” this file.
20. Repeat this for the file “EU Example 6_2 Column Section.sam”. This will create
two linked section entries in the navigation window. Click on the Embed All
Linked Sections task to break the link with the external files and embed the
section data into the project
21. Now move to the Structure Properties navigation window. All the defined
Design Sections (and beams, if there were any defined) can be inserted as
Structure Properties by clicking on the Create Section and Beam Groups task.
Select the Beam structure property which will open the Structure Properties:
Section form.
22. In the structure graphics, use the toolbar button to obtain a view on the xz
plane and use the General side menu button and tick Show Nodes. Then
graphically select the associated beam elements by making a window round
the horizontal beam elements (using a left mouse click at the top left hand
corner , releasing the button and moving the cursor to the bottom right corner
and clicking again) taking care not to select any of the column members. The
selected members will turn red.
6-11
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
23. Before closing the Import File form with the ✓ OK button, change the
description to “Beam section 686x254x152” by typing it into the field.
24. Repeat this for the “SP2: EU Example 6_2 Column Section.sam” and change
the Description to be “Column section 305x305x158”. In the graphics window
right mouse click and select “Tile Vertically” to show the structure and the
applied section in the same frame.
25. To select the column members, window round the whole structure and when
the Confirm window asks whether the beam elements should be overwritten
answer No to All. Close the Structure Properties: Section form in the normal
way.
Modify Section Properties

As described in the outline we now need to enhance the stiffness of the short
elements at the ends of the beam. To do this we add an Advanced Beam
property which increases the elastic modulus and shear modulus and assign it
to the two end beam elements
26. In the navigation window toolbar click on the button and select Advanced
Beam Assignment | Modified Elastic/Shear Modulus. Change both elastic
modulus and shear modulus to 210000 and 80769 respectively and then
change the Description to “1000 times extra Stiff”.
6-12
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
27. To assign this advanced property to the two short beam elements it is
necessary to zoom in to each of the top corners to select the elements as they
are very short.
Local Axes
The section properties defined are related to a certain set of axes and these
must be consistent with the local axes of the beam elements. The YY axis of
the sections is the horizontal axis parallel to the flanges, so the local y axis of
all the beam and column members must be perpendicular to the plane of the
frame.
28. To check this we can turn on the local axis display using the General button on
the graphics window and tick the Local Axes box.
The red axis is the YY axis so, it can be seen that the column members are
orientated in the wrong way. Additionally, if we want the bending moment
diagrams to show sagging moments always on the inside of the frame then the
local Z axis should always be pointing to the outside of the frame. This means
the local axis system of the members should be rotated to correct this.
29. To do this the leftmost column members should be rotated by 90 degrees and
the rightmost by -90 degrees. This can be done by changing the Navigation
window to Structure Definition and using the button to open Advanced
beam Set | Local Axes. In the resulting form, Twist: should be set to “90”
6-13
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
degrees and then the leftmost column selected graphically (to do this use the
following procedure:
a. Select the filter toolbar button on the graphics screen

b. Click on De-select all in the selection tasks
c. In the Select By: field select “Structure Property”
d. Available groups “Column Section ...” sent to selected groups using
the”>” button.
e. ✓ OK
f. Window round the leftmost column
g. Set the Name of the Advanced Beam Set to “Twist 90”
h. ✓ OK
30. Add a second Advanced beam Set | Local Axes but set the Twist: to -90.
Change the Name of this property to “Twist -90”. The current filter will allow the
windowing around just the right column without selecting any beams.
31. Click on the small arrow next to the filter and select Select all to remove the
filter. It can be seen that all the y axes (red) are now perpendicular to the
plane of the frame and all the z axes are pointing to the outside of the frame.
Copying Members
32. The single storey can now be copied to create the second storey. To do this
we open the Define Sub Model Members form by clicking on the Sub Model
Members item in the navigation window. Select all the members by first getting
focus on the table by clicking on the first member in the list and then press
<Ctrl-A> keys together. Click on Copy Member(s) in the Members Tasks list to
open the Copy Member Selection form and enter a Translation vector of (0m,
8m) before clicking on the Apply button and then the ✓ OK button to close the
forms.
33. In the Graphics window click on the toolbar icon to fit the structure to the
window. Switch off the local axis display and turn on Joint Annotation using the
General button.
6-14
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Renumbering Nodes
Because the structure has been created by splitting and copying members, the
node and member numbers do not form a logical pattern. These next steps
are not absolutely necessary but make reading of output tables easier. We will
now renumber the nodes in a more logical manner.
Required Column Numbering Required Beam Numbering
34. Open the Joint Details form from the Navigation window and change the
graphics view to an XZ view by clicking on the toolbar icon .
35. From the toolbar open the filter form using the button , In the graphics
toolbar change “Select” to “Remove”. Window round the columns but include
the very short stiff members at the ends of the beams. Click on the Save in
Member Set Tasks and enter a name of “Beams Only” before closing the Save
Member Selection form with ✓ OK. Now close the Filter form with ✓ OK.
6-15
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
36. Click on Sort in Table Tasks and in the Sort form Sort by “Z” and Then by “X”
(both ascending). Close this form with ✓ OK
37. Now click on Renumber in the Joint Tasks List. In the Renumber form set the
Renumber Range to All in Filter and the Start Number to 101 before clicking on
the Apply button and then ✓ OK. Scrolling up and down the list of joints, using
the arrows on the keyboard, will illustrate the joint sequence in the graphics
window.
38. From the toolbar open the filter form using the button , In the graphics
toolbar change “Select” to “Create”. Deselect all then Select By “Structure
Property”, choosing the Column section from the list and moving it to the
Selected Groups with . Click on the Save in Member Set Tasks and enter a
name of “Columns Only” before closing the Save Member Selection form with
✓ OK. Now close the Filter form with ✓ OK.
39. Click on Sort in Table Tasks and in the Sort form Sort by “X” and Then by “Z”
(both ascending). Close this form with ✓ OK.
40. Renumber the filtered joints from “1” in the same way as in 37 above and then
close the Joint Details form with ✓ OK.
41. To do the same thing for member numbers open the Member Details form by
clicking on Member Details in the Navigation Window.
42. Filter on Columns Only, using the filter drop down list displayed when the Down
Arrow next to the filter icon is clicked, and sort by Lowest Joint Ref. Renumber
the filtered members from “1”. (Use Renumber from the Member Task tool bar).
43. Filter on Beams Only and sort by Lowest Joint Ref. Renumber the filtered
members from “41”.
44. Filter on stiff elements by first using Select All then change the Select By: field
to “Member Selection Set”, moving both beam and column sets to Selected
Groups and then moving them back again into Available Groups. Save the
selection set as “Stiff Members Only”
45. There is no need to sort these members but just renumber from “101”.
46. Remove all filters.
6-16
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Supports
47. We now need to support the structure by fixing certain degrees of freedom of
the two joints at the base of the columns. Move to Structure Definition in the
navigation tree and then click on the button. Select “Supported Nodes”
from the list. In the graphics toolbar change “Along Span End Lines” to “All
Joints” and then click on the two base joints in the graphics window. Both
joints will have the same fixity, so they will be Uniform. Change all degrees of
freedom except Rotation Restraint about Y to Fixed before closing the form
with ✓ OK.
Release of Member Degrees of Freedom

48. The first floor beam needs to be simply supported at its ends, so it is necessary
to release the RY degree of freedom at the beam ends. In the Structure
Definition navigation window click on and select Advanced Beam Set |
Releases from the displayed list.
49. Change the name of the releases to “Free RY” and change the Moment y: field
to “Free”. Set the filter to “Beam Only” and click on the two ends of the first
floor beam. A small cyan circle will appear near to the end of the member
selected.
50. Close the Specify Beam Releases form with the ✓ OK button
6-17
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
User Notes
51. It is good practice to make a note of any modelling techniques used in your
model so that others can check it more readily. Open up the User Notes form
using the menu item File | Notes... Enter the following text into the form:
“To model the first floor, simply supported beam additional nodes have been
placed along the beam at the location of the column faces. This will enable
member releases to be applied at this location and model the eccentricity of the
beam reaction into the column. The short beams connecting the beam ends to
the columns will have a stiffness 1000 times greater than the standard beam by
adjusting the elastic and shear modulus accordingly”.
52. Close the User Notes form with ✓ OK.
Data Reports
53. Now create a data summary and save as a PDF file using the menu item
File | Data Reports... Click on the Include All button and then the View button.
In the Results Viewer form click on the tab to display the results in
PDF format. To save this as a file click on the save icon in the floating
toolbar and enter a name of “Portal frame data report.PDF” before closing the
Results Viewer and the Data Reports form.
54. Finally save the data file using the menu item File | Save as... using a file
name of “My EU Example 6_2.sst”.
Summary
This example provides a basic introduction to the Refined Analysis module of
Autodesk® Structural Bridge Design and demonstrates the basic principles of creating
structural elements in a sub-model, manipulating these elements and assigning
properties. Special care is taken when assigning properties with respect to local axis
definitions. Member releases and User notes are also introduced as well as node and
element renumbering.
6-18
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
6.3. 3D Truss Footbridge

Subjects Covered:
Refined Analysis; 3D Frame; Setting Out Objects - Arcs; Construction Lines; 2D Sub
models; Drawing 2D Beam Members; Copying Sub Models; 3D Sub Models; Drawing
3D Beam Members; Filtering; Importing sections; Parametric Shapes; Structure Plots;
Data Summary
Outline
This model is of a 55m span steel truss footbridge, curved in elevation, constructed
with square hollow sections for the bottom boom members and circular hollow
sections for the top boom and bracing. The deck spans between the two bottom
boom members and is braced diagonally with angles.
6-19
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Plan of Top Boom and Bracing
Plan of Bottom Boom, Deck Members and Deck Bracing
The top boom is a 406x16 Circular Hollow section.
The bottom boom is 400x400x20 Square Hollow section.
All other members except the deck members and deck bracing are 324x12 Circular
Hollow section.
The deck is constructed from 6mm thick steel plate, transversely stiffened with
inverted “T” sections welded to the underside of the plate. The “T” sections are
400mm deep with a 100mm wide flange and is 10mm thick throughout. They are
spaced at 500mm centres. Each transverse member in the bottom will be as shown
below.
The deck is braced diagonally as shown in the plan with 75x75x12 steel angle.
The material used throughout is structural steel with an elastic modulus of

210kN/mm2, a shear modulus of 81kN/mm2 and a weight density of 77kN/m3. (Note
that the 75x75x12 angle is to have a density of 78kN/m3).
Procedure
3. Using the File | Titles menu option set the Project title to “3D Truss Footbridge”
with a sub title of “Example 6.3”. Also set the Job Number to “6.3” and put your
initials in the Calculations by field. Close the form with ✓ OK.
6-20
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Structure Geometry
The structure will be built up using four separate sub models: One for each
truss, one for the top boom connecting members and another for the deck and
bracing.
The geometry of the first truss is defined by creating two curved arcs along the
lines of the top and bottom boom and then placing vertical construction lines at
the location of each of the truss connections. Members can then be drawn on
the graphics screen by snapping to the intersection points.
The first truss can be copied to form the second truss and then connecting
members can be drawn between them.
4. To start, add a new 2D sub model to the Structure Definition navigation

window, as described in example 6.2, with its plane in the XZ plane. Rename
the sub-model to “Truss 1” by clicking on it in the navigation window first with
the left mouse button then with the right and choosing the Rename option
which allows text to be entered in the Enter new name field.
5. With the new sub model highlighted add a Setting Out Object by using the
button and selecting the appropriate option.
6. Click on the small “+” at the bottom of the Define Setting Out Object form to
add a line segment. Choose Arc from the Pick a type options and click on the
Next > button.
6-21
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
7. The method we will choose to define the curve of the bottom boom is 3 points
on curve – click on the Next > button.
8. Enter the three coordinates as (0.0, 0.0) (27.5, 0.688) (55.0, 0.0) and then click
on the Next > button.
9. If the curve appears correct close the wizard with the ✓ OK button otherwise
use the < Back button to re-enter incorrect data.
10. Change the Name: of the setting out object to “Bottom Boom Curve” before
closing the form with the ✓ OK button.
11. Repeat 5 to 10 to create a second setting out object but use coordinates (0.0,
3.375) (27.5, 5.188) (55.0, 3.375) and a Name of “Top Boom Curve”.
6-22
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
12. Add a third setting out line 3 vertically at the left end by repeating 5 to 10 but
selecting line rather than an arc and choosing start and end points. Use
coordinates (0.0, 0.0) and (0.0, 6.0), and set the Name: to “Vertical at x=0”.
13. Create a series of vertical lines that will intersect with the top and bottom
booms offset parallel to SO3 with offsets as shown in the elevation drawing
above (see the introduction to Part 6.3 of this manual). Use and select
Construction lines from the list. The first offset is at 2.475m. The bottom half
of the table is shown below.
14. There are 20 lines in total. The lines are added by selecting the Line Type
+Offset parallel to SOL on the left of the form. Select “S03” in the SOL Ref.
and enter the offset accordingly. Once all lines have been created close the
15. We will now connect the intersection points of these lines to create the beam
members of the truss. This is done by opening the Define Sub Model Members
form by clicking on the Sub Model Members item in the navigation tree.
16. Select the draw mode in the graphics toolbar to multiple members and then
set the snap mode to “Intersection”. Now draw the first member of the bottom
boom by clicking close to the first intersection point from the left then the third
point.
6-23
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
17. The remaining members of the bottom boom can be created by continuing the
clicking on intersection points five, seven ...etc until the last point is clicked,
then the “Esc” key will stop the selection. Any members drawn incorrectly can
be deleted, by highlighting them in the table and clicking on the small “-” button
at the bottom of the table, and then drawn again correctly.
18. This can be repeated for the top boom except the intersection numbers will be
1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 21 (note how the centre member is split
in two to give a node at the apex).
19. Draw the two end vertical members using the single member draw mode
toolbar icon by clicking on the bottom intersection then the top.
20. The diagonal bracing can now be drawn as multiple members, zigzagging from
bottom to top across the truss.
21. The members of the truss can be seen more clearly in the graphics if the
construction lines and Setting out objects are turned off using the Objects
button on the right of the graphics screen.
22. Close the Define Sub Model Members form with the ✓ OK button.
23. Copy this complete sub-model to the second side and rename the second sub-
model “Truss 2”. This is done by right clicking on the first sub model entry in
the navigation window and selecting the Copy option.
24. In the Copy Sub Model form click on the Define button to define a new origin
and plane for the copied sub model.
6-24
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
25. Set the origin to (0.0, 3.5, 0.0) then click on the Next > button.
26. The orientation of the plane does not need changing for the new sub-model so
click on “Next” on the next two forms then ✓ OK to confirm.
27. To actually create the new set of members click on the Next > button on the
Copy Sub Model form and then ✓ OK to confirm.
28. Rename this new Submodel to “Truss 2” in the same way as the first.
29. To view the two trusses in isometric click on the Structure item in the
navigation window and use the appropriate toolbar button if necessary.
30. Add a new 3D sub-model to the Structure in the navigation window and in the
graphics screen set the Draw Mode to single member . Draw the top boom
transverse connecting members one by one by clicking on the node points in
the graphics screen. The structure may need rotating into a suitable
orientation to achieve this. Panning and zooming options in the toolbar may
also benefit node selection.
31. Add the top diagonal bracing in the same way but use the multiple beam
members option , finishing with the “Esc” key when the last member has
been drawn.
6-25
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
33. Rename the 3D sub Model to “Top Bracing”.
34. Add an additional 3D sub-model and repeat the exercise in 30 to 33 above but
name it “Bottom Bracing & Deck”. The graphics orientation and zoom will need
adjusting to achieve this. Note the different layout between the top and bottom
bracing.
35. In the Navigation window use to add Supported Nodes to the Structure
(as opposed to the sub models). Change the view direction to Isometric using
the graphics toolbar button. Also in the toolbar change the Along Span End
dropdown field to “All Joints”. In the graphics window click on the two nodes at
the near end of the bottom boom members. This will add small square support
icons at these locations and add two entries into the supports table. Repeat
this for the two nodes at the other end of the bottom boom members.
36. In the Define Support Nodes form set the Group Type: to Variable and then
change the X Direct Restraint to Free for the second two nodes. Close the
Define Supported Nodes form using the ✓ OK button.
Section Properties
37. Change the Navigation window to Design Sections.
The sections for all but the deck bracing have already been created in section
files, so these can be imported. The deck bracing is defined by a parametric
shape.
38. Open up a standard file browser (outside of ASBD) and navigate to where the
section data files are located. There should be four section files, namely:
i. EU Example 6_3 324x12 CHS.sam
ii. EU Example 6_3 400x400x20 SHS.sam
iii. EU Example 6_3 406x16 CHS.sam
iv. EU Example 6_3 Stiffened Deck Plate.sam
39. Select all these files together (using the Ctrl key whilst clicking on them) and
drag them using the left mouse button into the white space of the Design
Sections navigation window.
6-26
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
40. The data from these linked files can be embedded into the project by clicking
on the navigation window task of Embed All Linked Sections. The navigation
tree can be collapsed by right mouse clicking in the navigation window and
selecting “Collapse All”.
41. The last section to be defined is an “L” parametric shape for the deck bracing.
Click on the button at the top of the navigation window and select the
Parametric Shape option from the list.
42. In the Define Section Element form set Shape Reference to “L”, height and
width to “75mm”, thickness of horizontal and thickness of vertical to “12mm”.
Also change the Name to “75x75x12 Angle” and Property to the S355/355
structural steel before using ✓ OK to close the window
43. Rename this new section (using the right mouse button context menu) to “Deck
Plate Bracing”.
6-27
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
44. We now need to assign the various sections to the beam members in the
structure so change the navigation window to Structure Properties and click on
the task Create Section and Beam Groups, which should create 5 structure
properties to assign
45. Click on the 400x400x20 SHS item in the navigation window to open the data
form Structure Properties: Section. This section needs to be assigned to the
bottom boom members of the two trusses.
This could be done by clicking on each bottom boom member individually in

the graphics window but we will use filtering and orientation to make this a little
simpler.
46. To filter the structure to just the two trusses, click on the filter button in the
graphics toolbar. Because the toolbar is shortened due to the combined
display with the section this may be hidden so the small triangle at the end of
the toolbar must be clicked to display it.
47. In the Member Selection Filter form click on the De-select all item in the
Selection Tasks. Then change Select By: to “Sub Model Group”. Double click
on Truss 1 and Truss 2 to move them to the Selected Groups: as shown before
48. Change the view of the structure, to view it from the South, by using the
graphics toolbar button
6-28
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
49. Window round the bottom boom members as shown to assign this section to
the selected members in both trusses. (Ensure that the graphics dropdown is
set to “Inclusive Box”).
50. Close the data form for this section with the ✓ OK button then open the Section
Data form for 406x16 CHS. This can be assigned to the top boom members in
the same way as 49 above.
51. To assign the properties for the other beams we first remove the filter by
clicking on the small arrow next to the filter icon and choosing “Select All” from
the list.
52. Open the Section Data form for the section 324x12 CHS. Change “Inclusive
Box” to “Excusive box” in the graphics toolbar and then window round the top
boom of the structure. This is in effect a crossing box (dotted) that will select
all members wholly within the box and any member that is crossed by it
53. It will try to overwrite the top boom members already defined but a confirmation
box allow this not to happen by selecting the No to All button.
54. It may appear in the graphics that the top boom members have been selected
(turned red) but in fact it is the bracing which is shown. This can be confirmed
by changing the view to an isometric view. Click on the ✓ OK button in the
Structure Properties: Section form to close it.
55. The Stiffened deck plate property and the 75x75x12 angle bracing can be
assigned in a similar way. This is done by first filtering the structure to the
6-29
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Bottom Bracing & deck sub model, in a similar way as described in Error!
Reference source not found.6 and 47 above. Then assigning the property,
member by member, by clicking on them individually in the graphics screen.
Assign 75x75x12 angle properties to the diagonal bracing members in the
bottom deck. Assign the stiffened Deck Plate properties to other members in
the bottom deck.
Section Properties
56. The structure is now completely defined. It is required to produce two graphical
reports to show the node numbering of Truss 1 and Truss 2.
57. With all data forms closed and just the graphics window visible, filter the model
to just “Truss 1”. This can be done by using the drop down selection displayed
when the small arrow at the right of the filter button is clicked.
58. Click on the General button on the right of the graphics window and tick the
boxes for Annotate Joints, Show Nodes and Filtered Members Only. The
display can be viewed as a “Print preview” before printing a hard copy. This is
done by clicking on the print preview icon on the graphics toolbar . Also, a
PDF of the graphic window can be generated by clicking on the icon at the
top of the print preview window.
59. You can see that there is nothing on the preview to say what part of the
structure we are looking at. User titles can be added at this stage to highlight
this. Click on the preview menu item Format | Titles and tick the box for Show
User Title Block. A title of “Truss 1 showing node numbers” can then be added
in the text field before closing the Titles form with the ✓ OK button. The new
title can now be seen added to the graphics.
6-30
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
60. Print a hard copy, if required, using the File | Print menu item then close the
Print Preview window using File | Close.
61. Repeat 57 to 59 with the filter and titles set for Truss 2
62. Remove the filter on the structure, switch off joint annotation, remove the user
title block and set the viewing direction in the graphics to isometric.
63. Now create a data summary and save as a PDF file using the menu item
File | Data Reports... Click on the “Include All” button and then the “View”
button. In the Results Viewer form click on the tab at the bottom of
the window to display the results in PDF format. Note that you can navigate to
different sections of the report using the hyperlinks displayed on the first page.
64. To save this as a file click on the save icon in the floating toolbar and enter a
name of “3D Truss Footbridge Data Summary.PDF” before closing the Results
Viewer and the Data Reports form.
65. Finally save the data file using the menu item File | Save as... using a file
name of “My EU Example 6_3.sst”.
6-31
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Summary
This example highlights the methods used to create a general 3D structure by building
up sub-models. It introduces curved setting out objects, and multiple construction
lines to define the geometry of each truss. Particular interest is paid to filtering of the
structure to simplify certain procedures.
6-32
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
6.4. Simple Grillage

Subjects Covered:
Refined Analysis; 2D ;Transition Curve Design Lines; Construction Lines; Meshing;
Slab Properties; Support Conditions; Data Reports
Outline
A flat slab, 500mm thick, is shown below with setting out dimensions. It is to be
modelled as a grillage in Autodesk Structural Bridge Design and the data file saved
for analysis in Chapter 7.
It is supported on 7 discrete bearings at each end of the slab and 2 bearings at

midspan. The two midspan bearings are parallel to the bearings at the slab ends and
are located on a line parallel to the deck centre line but running through the bearings
either side of the centre. All supports are restrained in the vertical direction but the
centre bearing at the left end is also restrained in both horizontal directions while that
at the right end additionally restrained in the transverse direction.
The mesh will have seven longitudinal members parallel to the centre line. As there is
a reasonable skew at the left end of the slab, the transverse members will be
orthogonal to the centre line to give the most accurate results. To ease the
positioning of the central supports and to provide some form of mesh refinement at
6-33
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
these locations, the mesh will be generated in two. The left mesh will have 5
transverse members (in the non skewed region) and the right mesh 7 transverse
members.
The single Carriageway is 12m wide with a 1.5m verge on either side and is centred
on the deck.
The concrete is grade C40/50 so it will have an elastic modulus of 35.2205GPa and a
shear modulus of 14.675GPa. In defining the section properties of the grillage
members it is important that the torsional stiffness of the slab is split evenly between
the longitudinal and transverse members.
Procedure
Setup
3. Using the File | Titles menu option set the Project title to “Simple Curved
Grillage Model” with a sub title of “Example 6.4”. Also set the Job Number: to
“6.4” and close the form with ✓ OK.
Design Lines
4. Move to the Structure Definition navigation window and click on the button
to select Design Line from the selection list. This will create an entry in the
navigation tree and open the Define Design Line form.
A design line needs to be created to represent the transition curve of the deck
centre line.
5. Click on the small “+” button at the bottom of this form to add a segment and
open the Define Line Segment wizard.
6. Set the segment type to Transition Curve and click on the Next > button.
6-34
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
7. Set the method to start point, start angle, end angle and length (clothoid) then
click on the Next > button.
8. The Start Point coordinates should be (0, 0), the Start Angle “20°”, End Angle
“0°”, and chainage Length “25m”. Click Next >
9. Close the wizard with the ✓ OK button to enter the segment into the Design
line table.
10. Before closing the Define Design Line form with the ✓ OK button, change the
Name: to “Deck CL”.
Carriageway
11. A carriageway is added by clicking the button at the top of the navigation
window and selecting Carriageway.
12. In the Define Carriageway form, set the Design Line to “Deck CL” and then
enter the relevant offsets as shown below. Set the Traffic Type to “Road”. It
should be noted that a negative offset to a design line is on the left hand side
as you walk along the design line. Click on the “Fit View” icon in the
graphics toolbar to view the carriageway fully.
6-35
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
13. Close the Define Carriageway form with the ✓ OK button.
Construction Lines
To define the corners of the slab it is necessary to create some vertical
construction lines that will intersect the edges of the verge. Construction lines
are created within a sub model so a new sub model needs to be created first.
14. Use the button in the navigation window to add a 2D Sub Model (GCS,
Z=0) object. This sub model is automatically in the XY plane.
15. Right click on the new sub model in the navigation window and select Add |
Construction Lines.
16. In the Define Construction Line form, click on the + Vertical line on easting
option and enter an Offset of “3” (click on the enter key before proceeding or
the data will be lost). The blue line can be seen graphically.
17. Repeat this with offsets of 13.5 and 24 so that there are three construction
lines in the table.
18. Close the Define Construction Line form with the ✓ OK button.
19. At this point save the data file as “My EU Example 6_4 Curved Slab Layout.sst”
using the main menu File | Save as...
6-36
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Grillage mesh
20. We can now define the two meshes. First select and then Right mouse click on
the 2D sub Model in the navigation window and select +Add | Mesh. This will
display the Define Mesh form.
21. Set Name: to be “Left Span”, Mesh Type: to be “Splay orthogonal to DL/SOL”,
Pick: “by object” and Member Type: to “Beam Elements”.
The boundary of the mesh is then picked graphically by selecting the four
boundary edges of this span. They must be picked so that consecutive lines
intersect (in order) and the first line defines the general longitudinal direction,
the second defines which is the positive direction (as can be shown by the
arrow in the graphics).
22. Start on the bottom verge line, then the middle construction line, next the top
verge line and lastly the leftmost construction line.
23. Set the no. of Longitudinal members to “7” and Transverse to “5” and note the
change in the graphics. The first mesh is now complete so close the form with
the ✓ OK button.
24. Repeat 20 to 23 but set the name to “Right Span” and pick the boundary of the
right span. The other parameters can be copied from the first mesh by clicking
on the “Copy Mesh Details From” button although the number of transverse
members needs adjusting to “7”.
6-37
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
25. Click on Structure in the navigation window and in the graphics screen change
the viewing direction to plan view by using the icon . The mesh should now
look like the picture below:
26. As well as the main longitudinal and transverse members, the mesh generation
has created rows of members along each of the span end lines, which could
represent diaphragm members in many forms of deck. This row of members
along the middle “span end line” is not required so we will remove them.
This is done by first clicking on the Members Details item in the navigation
window, which opens the Member Details data form.
27. We can remove each unwanted member by clicking on it in the graphics

window and then clicking the small “-“ button at the bottom of the table.
28. Close the Member Details form with the ✓ OK button.
Span End Lines

29. Before positioning supports we will define the span ends by drawing the span
end lines. This is done by right clicking on Structure in the navigation window
and selecting +Add | Span End Lines.
30. The coordinates of each end of the lines could be entered manually into the
table but it is easier to set the Snap: mode (Graphics toolbar) to Intersection
and pick the joints of the mesh coinciding with the span ends. The sequence
of clicks to give three lines would be as follows:
6-38
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
31. Close the Define Span End Lines data form with the ✓ OK button.
Supports
32. Click the button at the top of the navigation window and select Supported
Nodes to open the Define Supported nodes form.
Each node along the two outer span end lines and two of the nodes along the
middle span end line needs supporting. This is most easily achieved by
supporting all nodes under the span end lines and then removing the ones not
required.
33. In the graphics window box round the whole structure in the normal way which
will place a support on each node under the span end lines (this is because
one of the select: options in the graphics toolbar is set to Along Span End
Lines).
34. Now change the Select: option in the graphics toolbar from “Create” to
“Remove” and then click on the unwanted nodes to leave the following:
35. In the Define Supported Nodes form you will see that the Group Type: is set to
Uniform, which means all the support conditions are the same. Set the
restraints in the first row such that all degrees of freedom are Free except
Direct Restraint Z, which is Fixed.
6-39
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
36. Now change the Group type: to Variable, which allows each support to have
different constraints applied. We also change the Select mode (in the graphics
window) to Create.
37. To fix the X and Y translational constraints on the centre support along the left
span end line we first click on this one support node in the graphics screen
(which highlights it in the table). In this row of the table we change the X and Y
Direct Restraints to Fixed.
38. Item 37 is repeated for the centre support under the right span end line, except
that we only change the Y Direct Constraint to Fixed.
39. Close the Define Supported Nodes form using the ✓ OK button.
Properties
There are only two properties to define
i. The 500mm thick slab property which can be

assigned to all members except the leftmost
diaphragm members.
ii. A parametric rectangular shape member 10mm by

10mm as a nominally low stiffness member assigned
to the leftmost diaphragm members.
The slab can be defined directly in the structure properties but the
parametric rectangular shape first needs to be created as a design
section
40. In the Design Sections navigation window toolbar click on the button and
select New Section | Parametric Shape. In the Define Section Element form
change both width and depth to be “10”mm, the Hook Point Reference to “0”
with Y & Z Coordinates “0” and the Property to that of grade 40/50 concrete.
The Name can also be changed to “10x10 Rectangle” before closing the form
41. Left click on SS1: Section in the navigation window and then left click to
rename the section as “Nominal Section”
6-40
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
42. Change the navigation window to Structure Properties and click on the
button to select Design Section. As there is only one Design Section, this is
automatically loaded. Now assign this property to the leftmost line of
diaphragm members by selecting them in the graphics window (this can be
done by boxing round them). Close the Structure Properties: Section form with
the ✓ OK button.
43. Click on the button again at the top of the navigation window and select
Continuous Slab.
44. In the Structure Properties: Continuous Slab form, change the Depth: to “500”,
and ensure that the Material Property is set to the grade 40/50 concrete.
45. Window round the whole structure to assign this property to all members. As
some members have already been assigned properties a Confirm form is
displayed. Selecting the No To All button will prevent any overwriting
6-41
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
46. Close the Continuous Slab Properties form with the ✓ OK button.
47. Save the data file using the main menu File | Save as... with a name of “My EU
Example 6_4.sst”.
Data Reports
One of the first things we will do is create a graphical plot showing all the node
and element numbers in one of the spans
48. In the Structure Definition navigation window Click on the “Structure” item. In
the graphics window toolbar click on the filter button to open the Member
Selection Filter form.
49. Click on the Selection Task De-Select all. Change Select By to Mesh and then
move the M1:Left Span item from the Available Group into the Selected
Groups by double clicking on it (or dragging it across). Close the form with the
✓ OK button
50. In the graphics window, click on the orange General button at the right hand
side and tick the Filtered Members Only option and tick the Joint and Member
Annotation objects (this window disappears automatically when the cursor is
moved away from the form).
51. Now click on the orange Objects button and de-select everything except Beam
Elements and Supported Nodes.
6-42
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
52. To make the annotation readable maximise the graphics screen and fit the
structure to the window with the Fit View graphics toolbar icon . Click on the
orange “General” button again and click on the “Format” button adjacent to the
Members annotation option. In the Text Setup form set the vertical offset to “6”
and the colour to Blue. Close the form with the ✓ OK button.
The text should now be readable.
53. To get a hardcopy plot of this, click on the Print Preview graphics toolbar icon
to display the Print preview window. Use the menu item Format | Title... to
open the Titles form.
54. Tick the option for Show User Title Block and enter “Joint and Member
Numbering for Span 1” in the visible text field. This preview can then be
printed on your system printer by using the File |Print menu item. Also, a PDF
of the graphic window can be generated by clicking on the icon at the top of
the print preview window before. Close the preview window.
55. Restore the graphics window to its normal size.
We are now going to create a report showing the calculation of the section
properties of a row of transverse members.
56. In the main menu select File | Data Reports... In the Data Reports form,
select the Member Section Properties tab and ensure that Show Details and
Show Summary are ticked.
57. In the graphics window toolbar, click on the Filter icon to open the Member
Selection Filter form. Set the Pick Mode to Transverse beam and then click on
one of the transverse beams in the graphics window as shown before closing
the Selection Filter form. Switch off joint annotation in the General tab.
6-43
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
58. Click on the View... button on the Data Reports form to show the basic results
viewer. Although this doesn’t show the graphics directly, if this form is printed
(or print preview) it will have the current graphics included at the top of the
report.
59. Alternatively, if it was required to save a high quality PDF file of this report then
click on the “PDF View” tab at the bottom of the Data Reports form. This view
can be saved to a local PDF file.
6-44
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
60. Close the results viewer using the green Exit button and then close the Data
Reports form using the ✓Done button. The program can now be closed.
Summary
This simple grillage of a curved flat slab highlights all the basic methods for creating
any grillage structure and introduces most of the tools required to create a grillage
and get data reports. The model that has been saved will be used in the loading and
analysis of this structure in Chapter 7 of the examples manual.
6-45
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
6-46
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
6.5. Finite Element Slab

Subjects Covered:
Refined Analysis; 2D ;Transition Curve Design Lines; Construction Lines; Meshing;
Slab Properties; Support Conditions; Data Reports
Outline
A concrete slab is shown below which has the same setting out dimensions as the
slab in example 6.4. It is to be modelled as shell finite elements in Autodesk
Structural Bridge Design and the data file saved for analysis in Chapter 7.
The slab is generally 500mm thick but has a 2.5m wide cantilever on either edge
which is 300mm thick.
It is supported on 5 discrete bearings at each end of the slab and 2 bearings at

midspan. The layout and restraint conditions of the bearings are the same as for
example 6.4 except the four corner bearings are excluded.
Around the location of the two midspan bearings, the slab is thickened to 700mm so
as to form a column head. The lateral dimensions of this thickened slab are defined
by the mesh layout.
The mesh Layout is shown below where both longitudinally and transversely, the
wider elements are twice the width of the narrower ones.
6-47
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
The single Carriageway is 12m wide with a 1.5m verge on either side and is centred
on the deck, as in example 6.4
The concrete is grade C40/50 so it will have an elastic modulus of 35.2205GPa.

Poisson’s ratio is assumed to be 0.2.
Procedure
Setup
1. Start the program and use the menu item File | Open to open the file called
“EU Example 6_4 Curved Slab Layout.sst” created in example 6.4. This will
give us the basic setting out from which we can create the FE model.
2. Use the File | Titles menu option to set the Project Title to “Curved FE Slab
Model” with a sub title of “Example 6.5”. Set the Job Number to “6.5”, put your
initials in the Calculations by field and close the form with ✓ OK.
FE mesh
3. We can now define the two meshes. Left mouse click and then right mouse
click on the 2D sub Model in the navigation window and select +Add | Mesh.
This will display the Define Mesh form.
4. Set Name to be “Left Span”, Mesh Type to be “Splay”, Pick “by object” and
Member Type to “Finite Elements”.
6-48
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
The boundary of the mesh is then picked graphically by selecting the four
boundary edges of this span. They must be picked so that consecutive lines
intersect (in order) and the first line defines the general longitudinal direction,
the second defines which is the positive direction (as can be shown by the
arrow in the graphics).
5. Start on the bottom verge line, then the middle construction line, next the top
verge line and lastly the leftmost construction line.
6. Set the number of Transverse elements to “16” and Longitudinal to “10” and
note the change in the graphics.
7. The spacing of the elements now needs to be adjusted so that the four
elements either side of each of the central supports is half the size of the
others. Change the size field for the transverse spacing from “equal size” to
“set size”.
8. This opens the Set Transverse Size form. The spacing factors can be set to
“0.5” where narrow elements are required as shown below:
6-49
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
9. The other values of Dimension and Proportion are updated automatically. (the
form above does not show the full table and there are three spacing factor
values of 1 that are not shown). Close this form with the ✓ OK button.
10. Set size is used again, for the longitudinal spacing, but it is only the last two
rows in the table that have the spacing factors changed to “0.5”.
11. Close the Define Mesh form with the ✓ OK button.
12. Repeat 20, 4, 5 and 6 for the second mesh but set the Name to “Right Span”
and pick the boundary of the right span.
13. The general mesh parameters, such as spacing, can be copied from the first
mesh by clicking on the “Copy Mesh Details From” button and selecting that
mesh.
14. The longitudinal spacing will need adjusting for this mesh to set the narrower
elements at the start. To do this re-select “set size” for the Longitudinal spacing
and then set the Spacing Factors such that they are all 1, except the first two,
which will be “0.5”. Close this form with the ✓ OK button.
15. Close the Define Mesh form with the ✓ OK button.
16. Click on Structure in the navigation window and in the graphics screen change
the viewing direction to plan view by using the icon . The mesh should now
look like the picture below:
6-50
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Span End Lines

17. Before positioning supports we will define the span ends by drawing the span
end lines. This is done by right clicking on Structure in the navigation window
and selecting +Add | Span End Lines.
18. The coordinates of each end of the lines could be entered manually into the
table but it is easier to set the Snap mode (Graphics toolbar) to Intersection
and pick the joints of the mesh coinciding with the span ends. The sequence
of clicks to give three lines would be as follows:
19. Close the Define Span End Lines data form with the ✓ OK button.
Supports
20. Click the button at the top of the navigation window and select Supported
Nodes to open the Define Supported nodes form.
Five nodes along the two outer span end lines and two of the nodes along the
middle span end line need supporting.
21. In the graphics window toolbar set the second Select: option to “All Joints” and
then click on the required supported joints as shown below.
22. In the Define Supports table you will see that the Group Type: is set to Uniform,
which means all the support conditions are the same. Set the restraints such
that all degrees of freedom are Free except Direct Restraint Z, which is Fixed.
6-51
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
23. Now change the Group type: to Variable, which allows each support to have
different constraints applied.
24. To fix the X and Y translational constraints on the centre support along the left
span end line we first click on it in the graphics screen (which highlights it in the
table). In this row of the table we change the X and Y Direct Restraints to
Fixed.
25. Item 24 is repeated for the centre support under the right span end line except
that we only change the Y Direct Constraint to Fixed.
26. Close the Define Supported Nodes form using the ✓ OK button.
27. To graphically see the support directions, open a 3D elements view. This is
done using the File | 3D Elements View... menu item.
All the supports will be visible if “Wire Frame View” is selected from the side
form when clicking on the General button. Remember to switch this off before
closing the 3D Elements View, by double clicking on the Structure item in the
Navigation window, as this affects all graphics windows.
6-52
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Properties
There are three properties to define
i. The 700mm thick isotropic FE property.
ii. The 300mm thick isotropic FE property.
iii. The 500mm thick isotropic FE property.
28. We first change the navigation window to Structure Properties
29. Click on the button at the top of the navigation window and select Finite
Element.
30. In the Finite Element Properties form, change the Thickness: to “700” and
selecting the Material Property: to be “MP2: C40/50”.
31. Change the Description to “700mm Grade C40/50 Concrete”.
32. Select the 32 elements in the graphics window surrounding the two central
supports as shown. This can be done by clicking on the individual elements or
windowing around the two groups. To create the window, the “Shift” key on the
keyboard must be held down whilst clicking the two opposing corners. Ensure
that Select: is set to “Inclusive Box” in the graphics window.
33. Close the Finite Element Properties form with the ✓ OK button.
6-53
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
34. Right mouse click in the navigation window on the property just defined and
select “Copy”.
35. Set the Thickness: to “300”, the Description: to “300mm Grade C40/50
Concrete” and then select the two rows of element adjacent to each curved
edge of the slab.
36. These elements can be selected by clicking on them individually, windowing

around them in groups or, if we know the element numbers, they can be listed
as a text sequence eg. “25 to 50”.
37. To determine the element numbers they can be annotated on the graphics by
clicking on the orange “General” button on the right of the graphics screen and
then ticking the Annotation Member tick box (if this is not shown click on the
button “Switch to Member No.”) Zooming in and panning should show the
numbers to be:
141 to 160 1 to 20
303 to 320 177 to 194
161 162
175 176
6-54
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
38. To enter this text sequence click on the small text icon at the left end of the
Assigned Members: field and type in the text as shown into the text field
displayed (remembering to click ✓ OK on the sub-form).
39. Turn off the Element Annotation in the graphics window.
41. Right mouse click in the navigation window on the property just defined and
select “Copy”.
42. Set the Thickness: to “500”, the Description: to “500mm Grade C40/50
Concrete” and then select the remaining elements of the slab in the graphics
window.
43. This can be done by windowing around the whole structure and then answer
No to all when asked if you wish to overwrite previous assignments
45. Save the data file using the main menu File | Save as... with a name of “My EU
Example 6_5.sst”.
Data Reports
For general data reports and graphical plots follow the procedures detailed in
previous examples (in particular example 6.4).
It is required to produce a report for the section properties of a specific finite

element to show items such as element area and aspect ratios.
46. In the main menu select File | Data Reports... In the Data Reports form,
select the Member Section Properties tab and ensure that only Show Summary
is ticked.
47. In the graphics window toolbar, click on the Filter icon to open the Member
Selection Filter form and click on the bottom left hand element in the display
before closing the form with the ✓ OK button.
6-55
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
48. Click on the View... button on the Data Reports form to show the basic results
viewer. Although this doesn’t show the graphics directly, if this form is printed
(or print preview) it will have the current graphics included at the top of the
report.
49. Alternatively, if it was required to save a PDF file of this report then click on the
“PDF View” tab at the bottom of the Data Reports form. This view can be
saved as a local PDF file.
50. Close the results viewer using the green Exit button and then close the Data
Reports form using the ✓ Done button.
Summary
This simple FE mesh of a curved flat slab highlights all the basic methods for creating
any FE mesh structure and introduces most of the tools required to create an FE
mesh and get data reports. The model that has been saved will be used in the
loading and analysis of this structure in Chapter 7 of the examples manual.
6-56
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
6-57
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
7. Analysis - Load Definition & Solution
Contents
7.1. Railway Loading on a Line Beam .............................................................................. 7-3
7.2. Portal Frame Loading and Analysis ........................................................................ 7-11
7.3. Highway Loading and Analysis of a Simple Grillage ............................................... 7-19
7.4 Dead Load & Diff Temp Load on a Finite Element Slab .......................................... 7-31
7-1
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
7-2
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
7.1. Railway Loading on a Line Beam

Subjects Covered:
Beam Loads; EU Rail Loads; Compilation; Envelopes; Bending Moments; Graphical
Results
Outline
It is required to analyse a five span line beam model as shown below and as defined in
example 6.1
The line beam represents half of a two beam, single track, railway viaduct.
It is required to determine the maximum design sagging moment in spans 2 and 4 for
the ULS/STR combination for persistent design cases.
Details of the characteristic loading are as follows:
• Dead load of the beam is 25kN/m3 (G = 1.35)
• Ballast 0.3m deep x 1.3 (Table NA1 of NA to EN1991-1-1 sub clause 5.2.3(2)).
Density 20kN/m3 (G = 1.35)
• Track and sleepers 5kN/m (2.5 on each beam) (G = 1.35)
• Live load model 71 assuming a dynamic amplification factor of 1.23 (Q = 1.45)
Five live load cases should be created for each span, one with the concentrated load at
the centre of the span and others with the concentrated load 1m & 2m either side of
this. These can then be enveloped.
Procedure
1. Start the program and then use menu item File | Open... to open the data file
“EU Example 6_1.sst” which was created in example 6.1.
2. From the main menu select File | Titles to Change the sub title of the example
to “Example 7.1”. Set the Job Number to “7.1” and put your initials in the
Calculations by: field before closing the form in the normal way.
Basic Loads
To calculate the dead load of the beam it is necessary to determine its cross
section area so that we can apply the load as a beam load in terms of load per
unit length.
3. To do this open up the Data Reports form using the File | Data Reports... menu
item. Tick the Structure | Property Data tick box and click on the View button.
This will open the Results Viewer which should show the cross section area of
7-3
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
the beam as 700000mm2. This means the UDL for dead load will be 25 x 0.7 =
17.5kN/m.
4. Click on EXIT to close this window and then on the ✓ Done button to close the
Data Reports form.
5. Change the navigation window on the left hand side of the screen to Structure
Loads .
6. Click on the toolbar button and select Rail Traffic Load | Load Model 71.
7. In the Define Rail Traffic Load form change the Ends Defined By to “span” and
Span No: to “2”. Then set Dynamic Factor, Ф: to “1.23”. The intensity of the UDL
and concentrated load should be divided by 2 to reflect that only half the load will
be applied to one beam. Hence, enter “40kN/m” in the UDL field and “125kN” in
the Concentrated Load field (Click OK on the warning messages). Change the
Concentrated Load Chainage to “20.5m”.
8. Change the Name to “LM71 Span 2 – Con central” before closing the form with
the ✓ OK button.
9. In the Navigation window right mouse click on the “L1” load in the list and select
Copy from the context menu. This adds a second load case, L2, and opens the
Define Rail Traffic Loading data form. Move the concentrated load 2m to the left
by changing the Concentrated Load Chainage: from “20.5” to “18.5”. Change
7-4
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
the Name: to “LM71 Span 2 – Con -2” before closing the form with the ✓ OK
button.
10. Repeat this for “Con -1”, “Con +1” and “Con +2” changing the concentrated load
position and name accordingly.
11. Repeat 6, 7 and 8 for span 4 (Specify Span No. 6 in the data form as this is the
virtual span number due to the drop in span) giving 10 live loads in total. (You
may have to re-select Ends Defined By Span to ensure that the loads are
correctly defined). (The concentrated load chainage will be “70.5m” for the
central case).
12. Click on the button at the top of the navigation window and select Beam
Member Load | Longitudinal Beam Load from the selection list.
13. In the first row of the Longitudinal Beam Loading form set the Load Type to be
“Uniform”, Load W1 to be “17.5” (Load W2 is automatically set as it is uniform)
and the Name to “Dead Loads”. To apply this load to the complete beam, box
round the whole structure in the graphics window or tick all members in the drop
down list at the end of the Assigned Members field. Close the form with the
✓ OK button.
14. Copy the Dead load in the same

manner as for the live loads and
change the Load W1 value to
“11.7kN/m” and the Name to “Ballast
Loads”.
15. Repeat this again but change the Load

W1 value to “2.5” and the name to
“Sleeper & Rail Loads”.
There are now a total of 13 load cases
7-5
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Compilations
16. Change the Navigation window to Structure Compilations by clicking the
appropriate button at the bottom of the navigation window.
17. Click on the button to add a Dead Loads at Stage 1 compilation. Click on
the “+” button near the bottom of the form to add a row to the table. In the Load
Name field use the drop down list to select the beam dead load case. Select
“ULS STR/GEO” in the Limit State drop down and confirm a change of the
factors. Ensure that the gamma value is 1.35. Change the Name: to “DL ULS”.
Close the form with the ✓ OK button.
18. Click on the button to add a Superimposed Dead Loads compilation. Click
on the “+” button near the bottom of the form twice to add 2 rows to the table.
Select “ULS STR/GEO” in the Limit State drop down. In the first row of the
compilation table select the ballast load case and set the gamma factor to 1.35.
In the second row select the sleeper & rail load case and set the gamma factor
to 1.35. Set the Name to “SDL ULS”. Close the form with the ✓ OK button.
19. Click on the button to add a Rail Traffic Groups | GR11 compilation. Click on
the “+” button near the bottom of the form to add a row to the table. In the Limit
State dropdown select “ULS STR/GEO”. In the Load Name field use the drop
down list to select the first live load case. Note that the default Gamma is correct
at 1.45. Change the Name to “Bending Span 2 Con Cen ULS” and close the
20. Copy this compilation in the same way as before but change the load case to the
second load and change the name accordingly.
21. Create a separate compilation for each live load case in the same way, giving a
total of 12 compilations.
Envelopes
22. To determine the max bending moment in each of spans 2 and 4 we create an
envelope. This is done using the main menu item Calculate | Envelopes... to
open up the Define Envelopes form.
7-6
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
23. Click the mouse where it says “Click Here....” and set Envelope For to “Beam”,
and accept all other entries as the default values except the Load Group which
should be set to “Live Compilations”. Click on the small “+” button at the bottom
of the top part of the table to add this data to the table and because All
Complying Cases is selected all live load cases are entered into the envelope
automatically. Click on the ✓ OK button to close the Define Envelopes form.
24. The load cases can now be solved using the main menu item
Calculate | Analyse Structure, which carries out the solution and stores results
ready for viewing.
Results
25. The maximum sagging moments can then be obtained by looking at the results
of the envelope in the results viewer. This is opened using the main menu item
File | Results...
7-7
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
26. Set the Results Type to “Envelope”, the Results For to “Beam” and the Name to
“E1: My Sagging”.
27. If the graphics and tabular results are not shown on the same screen then
ensure that the Graphics is enabled using the menu item View | Set Default
Layout | Graphic Above Table.
28. To add the effect of dead load and superimposed dead load to the enveloped
results then use the drop down list in the Include Dead Load Compilations field
to include both Dead &SDL compilations. (This is located near the top left hand
corner of the graphics window).
29. To determine the maximum value then annotate the graphics using the orange
“General” button at the right of the graphics screen and tick the Result tick box.
If all results are shown then the “Format” button can be used to select
maximums only.
Filtering
30. The overall maximum is in span 2 but if we require to determine the maximum in
span 4, the simplest thing to do is to filter the results for span 4 only. This is
done by clicking on the graphics filter button
31. First of all De-select all from the Selection Tasks and set the Pick Mode to
“Longitudinal Beam”. Then click anywhere on the forth span in the graphics
window before closing the Member Selection Filter form with the ✓ OK button.
The maximum sagging moment in span 4 is then shown on the graphics.
32. Annotate the member numbers using the General button in the graphics window
and also tick “Filtered Members Only”.
33. Remove columns in the table that have zero values and have no meaning for a
line beam analysis by unticking the selection that appears when clicking on the
first column of the headings row - as shown below:
7-8
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
34. To see how the graphics and table would be printed out, use the File | Print
Preview main menu item to display the print preview. When the print preview
window is open, a pdf of the graphic window can be generated by clicking on the
icon at the top of the print preview window. Close the print preview using the
Close button at the end of the toolbar.
35. Close the results viewer using the File | Close Tabular Results main menu
item.
36. Save the data file, using File | Save as... with a name of “My EU Example
7_1.sst”.
Summary
This example provides a basic introduction to the Analysis modules of Autodesk®
Structural Bridge Design and demonstrates the basic principles for assigning
properties, defining Eurocode railway loads compilations and envelopes and viewing
the results.
7-9
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
7-10
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
7.2. Portal Frame Loading and Analysis

Subjects Covered:
Wind Load; Differential settlement; Lack of fit loading; Dead loading. Bending Moment,
shear and Axial force diagrams.
Outline
The portal frame model, created in Example 6.2, is to be loaded with the following
characteristic loads:
1. Dead load of the steel members based upon a weight density of 78kN/m3
2. Dead Load of precast concrete floor panels resulting in a UDL on the beams of
30kN/m
3. A horizontal wind load of 8kN/m acting as a UDL on the left hand columns
4. A support settlement of 20mm applied just to the left hand support
5. A “Lack of fit” loading due to the top beam being 15mm short during erection
30kN/m Slab dead loads

8kN/m Wind Load
30kN/m Slab dead loads
Create a ULS:STR combination for persistent situations of these loads using load
factors of 1.5 for the wind load and 1.35 for all other loads. There is only one variable
load (that will have a 0 value of 1.0).
Produce a combined bending moment/shear force diagram for the two beams, with
max values annotated, and an axial force diagram for the two columns – both for the
combined load case.
7-11
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Procedure
1. Start the program and use the main menu item File | Open... to open the file
created in Example 6.2 called “EU Example 6_2.sst”.
2. Click on the menu File | Titles... and change the Project Title to “Portal Frame
Loading”, the sub title to “Example 7.2”, the Job Number to “7.2” and enter your
initials in the Calculated by field.
3. Close the Titles form using the ✓ OK button.
4. Click on the Structure Loads button at the bottom of the Navigation window to
enable adding basic loads into the navigation tree.
Dead Loads
5. Click on the toolbar button at the top of the navigation window and select
Beam Member Load | Beam Element Load from the list of options.
6. We can enter the steel dead load into the first row of the Define Beam Loading
form by setting Load Type to be “F Uniform”, Direction to “Global Z”, Load Value
to be “Volume” and Load W1 to be “-78” (it is negative because it is acting
vertically downward). W2 automatically assumes the same value as it is a
uniform load.
7. Click on the small “down arrow” next to the filter button in the graphics toolbar
and select “Beam Only” from the list of filters (these filters were set up in
example 6.2). Window round the whole structure.
8. Repeat 7 but with the filter “Columns Only”. There should be 56 members now
loaded as seen in the last column of the table.
9. The second line in the table can now be used to define the slab dead loads
which will be “F Uniform”, “Global Z”, “Length” and “-30”.
10. This should be applied to just the beams using the “Beam Only” filter.
11. Note the third row in the table is just a prompt and has no members assigned so
is ignored. This can be checked in the data reports if necessary
7-12
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
12. Change the Name: to “Dead Loads” and close the Define Beam Loading form
with the ✓ OK button.
Wind Loads
13. The wind load will also be created in a similar way using the button. Select
Beam Member Loads | Beam Element Load. The parameters for this will be:
“F Uniform”, “Global X”, “Length” and “8”. It should be applied to just the left
hand column by using the “Columns Only” filter but only windowing around the
left half of the structure.
14. Change the Name to “Wind Loads” before closing the Define Beam Loading
Support settlement Load

15. Click on the button at the top of the navigation window and select Support
Displacement from the list.
16. Enter “-20” in the DZ(mm) column of the first row and then click on the left
supported node in the graphics window.
17. The default Name of “Settlement” is suitable so close the Define Support
Displacement Loading form with the ✓ OK button.
7-13
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Lack of Fit Load

18. Click on the button at the top of
the navigation window and select
Beam Member Load | Beam
Element Distortion from the list.
19. The lack of fit can be applied as a

point distortion of -15mm at any
point along the top beam. Enter “-
0.015” in the D Start column of the
first row and then set Type to
“Point”, Axes to “Local”, Direction to
“Direction X.
20. Apply this to the structure by setting the filter to “Beam only” and then clicking on
left end of the top beam.
21. Set the Name to “Lack of fit load” and then close the Beam Distortion Load
(Define Beam Loading) form with the ✓ OK button.
Compilation
22. To form a combination of these loads we create a Compilation. Click on the
Structure Compilations button at the bottom of the navigation window and then
click on the button at the top. Select Other from the list.
23. In the Compile Loading Patterns form click 4 times on the ”+” button near the
bottom of the form add 4 rows to the table. Set the Limit State: to “ULS
STR/GEO” and change the Name: to “Combination1”. In the first row of the
Load Name field, click and select the “L1: Dead Loads” and set  to 1.35
24. Select each of the remaining loads into separate rows of the table and apply the
appropriate factors.
7-14
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
25. Close the Compile Loading Patterns form with the ✓ OK button.
Solution
26. Click on the main menu item Calculate | Analyse Structure... to perform the
analysis which will display a form showing the progress of analysing the four
load cases. Before closing this form display the analysis log file by clicking on
the button.
27. In the text file that is displayed check that the total loads applied in load case L1
are equal and opposite to the support reactions for the same load case. (This
applies to direct actions and not moments).
28. Close both the log file and the Analysis form.
Results
29. Click on the menu item File | Results to open up the results viewer. This can be
displayed as full screen if required using the window controls.
30. Use the menu item View | Set Default Layout | Tabbed Layout to set the view
to a tabbed view with the Graphics on one tab and the table on another (this will
not need doing if it is already a tabbed view). Click on the Graphic tab at the
bottom.
31. In the blue control area Set Results Type to “Compilation”, Name: to “C1:
Combination 1”, Results For: to “Beam”.
32. Use the filter dropdown button to select “Beam Only”.
33. Click twice in the Results For field in the light blue graphics toolbar and in the
dropdown tick both “FZ” and “MY”.
34. To produce annotations of the values click on the orange General button on the
right side of the graphics screen, tick Result and then click the “Format” button
next to it.
35. Set the values to the values shown in the following graphic before closing the
Text Setup form using the ✓ OK button.
7-15
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
36. To enhance the scale of the plot click on the orange Results button on the right
side of the graphics screen and tick both scale boxes setting the scale for shear
as 1:50 and that for bending 1:200. (You may want to check that Auto Redraw is
switched on. The “Auto Redraw” button is located on the light blue graphics
toolbar).
37. A plot of the axial loads in the columns can be obtained in a similar way except
the filter would be set to “Columns Only” and the Results For tick box set to “FX”
only. For this plot it is best to rotate the results text back to 0.0 using the Text
Setup form.
38. Close the Results Viewer using the File | Close Tabular Results menu item.
39. Save the file using File | Save as... with a name of “My EU Example 7_2.sst”.
7-16
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Summary
This example explores some of the “not so common” load types applied to portal
frames and creating a combination of them. The use of filtering is encouraged to
produce graphical and tabular results for just specific parts of the structure and here,
excluding parts, such as stiff dummy members, where results are not relevant.
Sometimes the default scale of results plots is not large (or small) enough to show the
results adequately. This example shows how user defined scales can visually improve
the quality of graphical results.
In results plots that consist of more than one component, (eg. moment and shear)
where results values are displayed, then only one component can be annotated at a
time. The component that is shown is the first one selected when making the selection
in the dropdown list. To change the annotation to another component it is simply a
matter of re-selecting the components in a different order.
7-17
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
7-18
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
7.3. Highway Loading and Analysis of a Simple Grillage

Subjects Covered:
Beam Element Loads; Bridge Deck Patch Loads, UDL Loads; SV Loads; Loading Sets;
Compilation; Analysis; Analysis log file; Bending Moments; Graphical Results, Print
Preview; Customizing table headers; Sorting tabular results.
Outline
A two span grillage model of a 500mm thick, curved slab, as shown below and as
defined in example 6.4 is to be loaded and analysed for dead, superimposed dead and
Eurocode traffic loading.
It is required to determine the design sagging (positive) moment at the centre of span 1
for ULS/STR combination for persistent design situations and maximum deflection
along the lower edge of the structure for SLS frequent combinations of load.
Engineering judgement is to be used to create just two load patterns to achieve this.
Details of the characteristic loading are as follows:
• Dead load of the concrete slab is 25kN/m3 (G = 1.35 & 1.0)
• Carriageway surfacing is 0.2m thick and has a density of 18kN/m3 (G = 1.2 &
1.0)
• Footway makeup & finish is 0.35m thick and has a density of 20kN/m3 (Q = 1.2
& 1.0)
• Live traffic load gr5 (Q = 1.35 & 1.0)
Procedure
1. Start the program and open the data file with a name of “EU Example 6_4.sst”
which was created in example 6.4. Close the Structure overview with the “Done”
button.
7-19
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
2. Change the sub title of the example to “Example 7.3” using the
File | Titles menu option, Change the Job Number to “7.3” and put your initials
in the Calculations by field before closing the form in the normal way.
Basic Loads
The dead load of the slab can be created by applying a volume load of 25kN/m3
to just the longitudinal members (applying it to the transverse members as well
would double the actual dead load).
3. Change the navigation pane on the

left hand side of the screen to
Structure Loads by selecting the
button at the bottom.
4. Click on the button at the top to

display the selection list as shown
and pick Beam Member Load |
Beam Element Load.
5. In the Define Beam Loading form

change the Load Type to “F Uniform”, the Direction to “Global Z”, the Load Value
to “Volume” and Load W1 to “-25”. The field Load W2 automatically becomes
“-25” also as it is a uniform load (note the units). The Name field can be changed
to “Concrete Dead Loads”.
6. To apply this to just the longitudinal beams we need

to filter the graphics window to display just these
beams. Click on the small arrow next to the filter icon
in the graphics toolbar and pick Longitudinal
Beams from the list.
7. By windowing around the complete structure and

changing the viewing directions to isometric it can be
seen that the load has been applied to the
longitudinal beams only.
7-20
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
8. Close the Beam Element Loading form with the ✓ OK button.
9. To define the Carriageway surfacing load, the Bridge Deck Patch Load option is
selected after clicking on the button at the top of the navigation window4 o.
10. Set Define loading by: to “4 objects” then in the graphics screen click on the 4
lines bounding the carriageway area (consecutive lines must intersect). The
lines are the carriageway definition lines and the construction lines at either end.
It is best to click on these lines outside the bounds of the structure so as to
isolate them from other lines. The loaded area is then shown hatched. (Ensure
that the Carriageways box is ticked on the orange “Objects” button at the right
side of the graphics screen).
11. In the Define Bridge Deck Patch Loading form set Load per unit area to
“3.6kN/m2” and set the Name: to “SDL: Carriageway” before closing the form
with the ✓ OK button. (Note that subsidiary loads can be defined in the
7-21
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
directions other than the main direction on the

Bridge Deck Patch Load form. However, in this
example only loads in the main Z direction will be
defined).
12. In the navigation window select the SDL load just

created and right mouse click to display a context
menu. Select Copy from the drop down list.
13. Set Define loading by: to “4 objects” (and click

“Yes” on the confirm form that appears), then in the graphics screen click on the
4 lines bounding the south most footway area. (You can zoom in to click on the
bottom edge of the carriageway to ensure that you do not select a beam element
instead).
14. In the Define Bridge Deck Patch Loading form set Load per unit area to “7kN/m2”
and set the Name to “SDL: footway 1” before closing the form with the ✓ OK
button.
15. Repeat steps 12 to 14 but for the north most footway using the Name “SDL:
footway 2”
16. Click on the button in the navigation window and select Road Traffic Load |
LM1 UDL System to open a Define Road Traffic Load form. Set Ends defined
by to “span” and the Lane No and Span No to “1”. The load intensity is
calculated automatically, based upon lane 1 factors (lane numbers and factors
are defined at the compilation stage). All other data can be left as the default so
close the form with the ✓ OK button.
17. Right mouse click on the UDL load in the navigation window and select Copy
from the drop down list. Change the lane to “2” and close the form with the ✓
OK button.
18. Repeat step17 for lanes 3 and 4.
19. Click on the button in the navigation window and select Road Traffic Load |
LM1 Tandem System to open a Define Road Traffic Load form. Set Position to
“within lanes”, Using to “vehicle centre”, Offset to “0” and then position the
Tandem System load approximately by clicking twice in the north most lane
somewhere near the centre of span 1 (leave a gap of a few seconds between
7-22
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
clicks). Now set the Chainage in the form to “10.09m” to position it more
accurately. Close the form with the ✓ OK button.
20. Repeat this for lanes 2, 3 and 4 with chainages of “9.20m”, “8.25m” and “7.25”
Note that no footway live loading is applied because this is eventually going to
be a Gr5 load combination.
21. Click on the button of the navigation window to add Road Traffic Load |
LM3 UK Special Vehicle.
22. Set the Model to “SV80”, Bogie Spacing to “1.2m” and Position to “within lanes”.
Click twice anywhere in lane 3 on the graphics screen to approximately position
the vehicle. (Ensuring that you leave a gap of at least 1 second between clicks).
23. Set the Offset field to “0m” so that the vehicle is within the boundaries of lane 3.
24. To position the vehicle longitudinally set Using to “bogie 2 centre” and Chainage
to “10m”. Change the Name field to “SV80 Lane 3” before closing the form with
the ✓ OK button.
25. Repeat 21 to 24 above but place the vehicle in lane 4 and set the chainage at
“9m”. Change the Name to “SV80 Lane 4” before closing the form with the ✓ OK
button.
7-23
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Loading Sets
26. It is sometimes convenient to group
the basic loads into recognisable
sets. This can be done by clicking
on the Open Loading Sets option at
the bottom of the navigation
window.
27. In the Define Loading Sets form

click on the “+” button at the top
right and then change the Set
Name to “Dead Loads”.
28. Click on the single dead load in the Unassigned Load Cases: list and then click
on the “>” button to move it into the Selected Load Cases: list.
29. Repeat 27 and 28 above with Set Name of “SDL” and the appropriate load
cases.
30. Repeat 28 and 29 above with Set Name of “Live Loads” and the remaining load
cases. (Note that multiple loads can be selected at once by holding the shift key
down while clicking on the first and last in a series) but the “>>” button also
works.
31. Close the Define Loading Sets form with the ✓ OK button.
Compilations
32. Change the Navigation view to Structure Compilations by clicking the
appropriate button at the bottom of the navigation window.
33. Click on the button to add a Dead Loads at Stage 1 compilation. Click on
the “+” button near the bottom of the form to add a row to the table. In this row
of the compilation table use the drop down list to select the “Concrete Dead
Loads” case. Select “ULS STR/GEO” from the Limit State dropdown and click
“Yes” on the confirm form. Ensure the gamma is set to 1.35. Change the Name
to “DL ULS”. Close the form with the ✓ OK button.
34. Repeat 33 above but this time set the Limit State field to SLS Frequent (a
prompt to confirm changing the load factors will appear) and the Name to “DL
SLS”. Note that the default gamma is correctly set at 1.0 automatically.
35. Click on the button to add a Superimposed Dead Loads compilation. Click
on the “+” button near the bottom of the form 3 times to add 3 rows to the table.
In the compilation table use the drop down list to select the three SDL load
cases. Select “ULS STR/GEO” from the Limit State dropdown and click “Yes” on
the confirm form. Note that the default gamma is correctly set at 1.2
automatically. Change the Name to “SDL ULS” and close the form with the ✓
OK button.
36. The compilation for SDL SLS can be created by copying the ULS compilation
and changing the Limit State field to “SLS frequent”. The factors are changed by
7-24
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
the program to 1.0. Change the Name to “SDL SLS” and close the form with the
✓ OK button.
37. Click on the Navigation window button to add a Road Traffic Groups | GR5
compilation. Click on the “+” button near the bottom of the form 7 times to add 7
rows to the table. This compilation will be for ULS max sagging so select the
vehicle loads as shown below.
38. Select “ULS STR/GEO” from the Limit State dropdown and click “Yes” on the
Confirm form to change the gamma factors to the correct value of 1.35. Note
that the Lane rank numbers need changing as shown to correctly represent the
lane factors. The Name of the compilation should be changed to “GR5; ULS; SV
Max Sag Span 1” before closing the form with the ✓ OK button.
39. For the SLS Max Deflection Compilation repeat 37 and 38 but change the Limit
State to “SLS Frequent” and include the vehicles and Lane Rank numbers as
shown below. The Name is set to “GR5; SLS; SV Max Def Span 1” before
Analysis
40. The load cases can now be solved using the main menu Item Calculate |
Analyse Structure, which carries out the solution and stores results ready for
viewing. Because we have defined loading sets an Activate Loading Sets form
7-25
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
is displayed allowing a choice of which loading sets to analyse. Ensure they are
all ticked and then click on the ✓ OK button.
41. Once the analysis is complete as indicated on the Analysis form click on the
small icon at the bottom right of this form.
42. This will display the analysis log file which will indicate any warning messages
about the analysis (if any) and give a summary of the analysis degrees of
freedom and the total applied loads and total reactions for each load case.
These should be inspected for consistency.
7-26
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
43. The analysis log file can then be closed using the EXIT button on the top left of
the window. The Analysis form can also be closed using the ✓ Done button.
Results
44. The maximum sagging moments can be obtained by looking at the results of the
appropriate live load compilation in the results viewer. This is opened using the
menu item File | Results.
45. If the graphics and tabular results are not shown on the same screen then
ensure that the Graphics is enabled using the menu item View | Set Default
Layout | Graphic Above Table.
46. Set the Results Type to “Compilation” and the Results For to “Beam” and the
Name of the compilation to “Gr5; ULS UDL; SV Max Sag Span 1”.
47. To add the effect of dead load and superimposed dead load to the live
compilation results then use the drop down list in the Dead Load Compilations:
field to include both ULS Dead & SDL compilations. Click on the isometric view
icon on the graphics toolbar and select “My” in the Results for dropdown menu.
48. To determine the maximum value then annotate the graphics using the General
button at the right of the graphics screen and tick the Result tick box. If all
results are shown then the “Format” button can be used to select “maximums
7-27
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
only”. Click on the Auto Redraw button on the graphics toolbar to show the
results. It is worth noting that un-ticking the “Transparent” box in the Text Setup
form can make it easier to read the results in the graphics window.
49. To see how the graphics and table would be printed out, use the File | Print
Preview menu item to display the print preview. This can be printed if required.
Close the print preview using the Close toolbar button.
50. To repeat this exercise for the SLS displacements change the compilation Name
to “Gr5; SLS UDL; SV Max Def Span 1”, the Results For to “Joint” and include
the SLS Dead Load Compilations, C2 and C4, in the same way as before.
51. To ensure that you are looking at z displacements click on any number in the DZ
column in the table.
52. Before printing a Print Preview of these results remove columns from the table
that are all zeros (DX, DY, RZ). This is done by right mouse clicking on each
column header and selecting “Remove This Column” from the drop down menu
displayed. These can be reinstated if required by clicking on the column control
icon at the far left of the column headers and ticking the appropriate boxes.
53. To determine which node number gives the min result we can sort the results in
ascending order for a particular column and then look at the result at the top of
the table. For the vertical displacements, this is done by left clicking on the DZ
column header until the sort arrow points upwards and then scrolling to the top
of the table.
7-28
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
54. Close the results viewer using the File | Close Tabular Results menu item.
55. Save the data file, using the menu File | Save As... to a file called “My EU
Example 7_3.sst”
Summary
This example provides a basic introduction to the basic loading and results of a bridge
deck grillage analysis.
Although maximum results are normally obtained using the load optimisation features
in Autodesk Structural Bridge Design, to position vehicle patterns accurately, it is
important for the engineer to be able to create loading patterns manually based on
engineering experience. By understanding this process, the engineer will be confident
in checking the results produced automatically by the load optimisation, which is
described in Chapter 10 of this manual.
Some key features of this example are:
• The copying of data items to create additional data items and then modifying
them (such as loads).
• Understanding Vehicle loading.
• Creating load compilations for different limit states.
• Grouping of loads to form loading sets. These should not be confused with
compilations, as the loads or effects are not summed but merely grouped for
convenience. Each group can be analysed separately and will not require
7-29
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
re-analysis if other groups are subsequently solved (as long as other data hasn’t
changed.
• The production of an analysis log file (the last log file produced is always
available from the File | Analysis Log File... menu). This file easily gives the
ability to check that the total applied loads are equal and opposite to the
resultant total support reactions. It is important to do this at least once for every
structural model, as differences in these values are an indication of an
ill-conditioned stiffness matrix and that structure stiffness should be scrutinized.
• To show the ability to customise and be selective on printed output.
7-30
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
7.4 Dead Load & Diff Temp Load on a Finite Element Slab
Subjects Covered:
Dead loads in FE; Differential temperature in an FE Slab; The use of composite
members to represent FE results; FE results with discontinuities in slab thickness;
Principle moment vectors
Outline
Consider the finite element slab, as described and modelled in Example 6.5 which has
variable thickness and a curved profile in plan.
It is required to establish the distribution of load to the supports due to its own self
weight and to examine the load path by considering principle moment vector plots. The
load will be based on a weight density of reinforced concrete of 25kN/m3.
It is also required to consider the effects of an applied temperature profile through the
thickness of the slab, in accordance with EN 1991-1-5, with respect to the secondary
moment created. Only positive differential temperature will be considered and it is
assumed that a surface thickness of 100mm will be applied.
The temperature load will be applied as a combination of a temperature gradient load

and a general temperature rise. The values of these two components will be different
for the variable thickness of slab. For the purpose of this example we will only consider
the main slab of 500mm and the cantilever slab of 300mm. The effects on the column
head will be assumed to be that of the 500mm slab.
The two values of temperature required here can be calculated from first principles
M F
using the expressions T g  for temperature gradients and T m  for
EI EA
membrane temperature. E is the elastic modulus of the concrete (35.2205kN/mm2), I
and A are the moment of inertia and the area of a 1m section of the slab and  is the
coefficient of thermal expansion (1.0E-5).
M and F are the restraining Moments and Forces obtained when applying the
temperature profile to a 1m wide section of the slab. These can be obtained by
7-31
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
carrying out a simple differential temperature analysis (using Autodesk Structural

Bridge Design) of 1m wide sections of the two thicknesses of slab, by following the
procedure in Example 3.3. The results of this and a section property analysis are as
follows:
500mm thick slab

I = 1.0417E10mm4 A = 5.0E5mm2
M = 72.63kNm F = 534.91kN giving
Tg = 19.8o/m Tm = 3.03o
300mm thick slab
I = 0.225E10mm4 A = 3.0E5mm2
M = 23.75kNm F = 287.04kN giving
Tg = 29.97o/m Tm = 2.72 o
Procedure
which was created in example 6.5. Close the Structure Overview with the ✓
Done button.
2. Using the File |Titles menu option, change the title sub title of the example to
“Example 7.4” Change the Job Number to “7.4” and put your initials in the
Calculations by field before closing the form in the normal way.
Dead Load
3. Click on Structure Loads at the bottom of the navigation window and then click
on at the top of the window and select Finite Element Load | External
Load from the dropdown list.
4. In the first row of the table in the Define Finite Element Loading form set Load
Type to “Force/volume”, Direction to “Global Z” and Load to “-25”.
5. Window around the complete structure in the graphics window to select all the
elements. It doesn’t matter that they have different thicknesses as the load
applied is a volume load.
7-32
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
6. Set Name to “Concrete Dead Loads” before closing the form with the ✓ OK
button.
Temperature Load
7. Click on at the top of the navigation window and select Finite Element Load
|Temperature Load from the dropdown list.
8. In the first row of the table in the Define Finite Element Loading form set
Temperature Type to “Gradient” and Grad to “19.8”. The default Coefficient is
correct.
9. This temperature gradient needs to be applied to the 500mm and 700mm thick
slab. To do this click on the filter button in the graphics window toolbar, click
on the De-select all Selection Tasks, and then set Select By: to “Section
Property”. Move the 500mm and 700mm slab properties into the Selected
Groups: field using the “>” button and then close the Member Selection Filter
10. Window round the complete structure in the graphics window to select these
elements.
11. In the second row of the table set Temperature Type to “Membrane” and T-
Bottom to “3.03”, press Enter on the keyboard. Window round the complete
filtered structure again to apply this to the 500mm and 700mm thick elements.
12. In the third row of the table set Temperature Type to “Gradient” and Grad to
“29.97”. This time the 300mm thick elements must be selected.
13. Use the filter tools in the same way as 9 above to filter the 300mm thick
elements only and then window round the entire structure.
14. In the fourth row of the table set Temperature Type to “Membrane” and T-
Bottom to “2.72” then press Enter on the keyboard. Window round the complete
filtered structure again to apply this to the 300mm thick elements.
15. Change the load case Name: to “Diff Temp Loads” before closing the loading
7-33
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Analysis
16. Use the menu item Calculate | Analyse Structure... to perform the analysis
and then click on the Analysis log file icon on the Analysis form to open the
log file.
17. Check in the displayed text file that the total load applied is equal and opposite
to the total reaction for the Dead Load case. Note that the total reaction for the
Thermal load case, L2, is zero (or very close to zero) because temperature
loads are internal loads.
18. Close the log file then close the Analysis form with the ✓ Done button.
Results – Dead Load Case

19. Use the main menu File | Results... to open the results viewer. Set the view to
be combined graphic and table, as shown below, by using the menu items View
| Set Default Layout | Graphic Above Table. Adjust window size to suit by
holding the left mouse button down on the dividing line between the graphics
and table and dragging to a new position.
20. In the dark blue area at the top of the window (Results Controller) set Results
For to “Joint”, Name to “L1: Concrete Dead Loads” and Effect to “Support
Reactions”.
21. In the graphics toolbar, the Results For field should be set to “FZ”
22. Change the viewing direction to isometric by clicking on the Graphics toolbar
icon and then annotate the results using the orange General Button on the
right of the graphics window. Use the “Format” button next to the Results tick
7-34
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
box and ensure Display All values is selected and SOP: is set to “Result” before
closing the Format (Text Setup) window with the ✓ OK button. It may be
necessary to click on the “Auto Redraw” button on the graphics toolbar to show
the results.
23. The distribution of dead load to the supports can be clearly seen.
To display how this load gets to the supports we can view the moment load path
by plotting the principal bending results.
24. Change the results annotation to Maximums only and then set the fields in the
Results Controller to those shown below. The Results For field in the graphics
toolbar should be set to “Principal Values – Maximum” to show a faded contour
plot together with two lines at the centroid of the element indicating the relative
magnitude and direction of the principal moments. Click on Auto Redraw if the
graphics view is not automatically automated.
7-35
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
25. Red lines represent hogging moments and blue lines represent sagging.
26. To graphically represent the bending moment in the longitudinal direction, for the
dead load case, the Results Controller fields need to be set as shown below and
the Results For field in the graphics toolbar should be set to “Bending Triad –x”.
27. The view shown here has been changed to a Tabbed view (using the View
menu) and the viewing direction set to plan view. There are two significant
points to note here.
7-36
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
a. The x moment values are per m width and represent bending in the local
xz plane. For this structure the default local x axis is the same as the
global X axis. If we wanted to change this such that the local x axis was in
the direction of the deck centre line we would need to change them by
adding an Advanced FE Set | Local Axes item to the “Structure”
Navigation Window to align them to the design line. The load cases
would need resolving before viewing the results.
b. The Location field in the results controller is set to “Node” rather than
centroid or nodal averaged results so that the discontinuity along the
boundary between the two slab thicknesses is represented
28. Close the Results viewer.
Results – Differential Temperature Load Case

The secondary moment results caused by the differential temperature case are
best displayed as bending moments on a virtual beam strip, the width of two
narrow elements, passing over the lower of the midspan supports. The results
are to be integrated over the width of this beam strip. To do this in Autodesk
Structural Bridge Design we use the concept of a “Virtual Member”.
29. To define this Virtual Member we click on the menu item

Calculate | Define Virtual Member...
30. The elements that make up the virtual member are then selected graphically by
first setting the Pick Mode to “Finite Element” and then clicking on the elements
one by one – as shown below.
31. The Reference Axis is defined by setting the Pick Mode to Node and then
clicking on the nodes, one by one, along the centre of the virtual beam from one
end to the other.
7-37
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
32. Close the Define Virtual Member form with the ✓ OK button.
33. Open the Results viewer and set the fields in the dark blue Results Controller
area to those shown below. The viewing direction has been set to a south
elevation.
34. This now shows the bending results of a beam strip 1.25m wide with its centre
line along the virtual member axis.
35. The results are obtained by integrating the FE results across the beam strip and
resolving them at each of the axis points. There are two integration/ resolving
algorithms that can be used, Method 1 and Method 2 and it is up to the user as
to which is the most suitable. The method is selected in the results controller.
The basic suitability criteria can be displayed by clicking on the small, circular “?”
button next to the Method radio buttons. Selecting Method 3 will display the
enveloped results of Method 1 and Method 2.
7-38
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
36. In our case method 2 has been selected as most suitable. If in doubt, use the
most conservative approach.
37. Shear results can be displayed in exactly the same way.
39. Use the main menu File | Save As... to save the data file with a name of “My EU
Example 7_4.sst”.
Summary
A simple example to show how secondary effects due to differential temperature can
be represented in a Finite Elements model and how to best display results where there
are discontinuities. The representation of FE results in the form of a virtual beam strip
is also demonstrated.
7-39
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
7-40
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
8. Transfer of Data
Contents
8.1. Line Beam Integration ............................................................................................... 8-3
8.2. Steel Composite Beam Grillage Integration ............................................................ 8-13
8.3. Using a Section Library to Create a PS beam with a pseudo curved soffit .............. 8-21
8.4. Defining a Grillage with a DXF File ......................................................................... 8-31
8.5. Defining Box Girder with DXF File .......................................................................... 8-37
8-1
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
8-2
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
8.1. Line Beam Integration

Subjects Covered:
3 span line beam; Import precast beam; Dead and SDL load optimisation; Transfer
results to beam module; AASHTO Distribution factors
Outline
In this example we are going to create a 3 span line beam with three equal spans of
21m. The line beam is constructed from 3 precast beams which are placed on
bearings and made continuous by pouring the slab and diaphragm. The concrete is
poured in one stage.
We will create a line beam structure then use the prestress beam files created in
Example 4.3 to define the section properties for the model. We will then carry out a
load optimisation for dead, SDL, Gra1a, Gr1b and Gr5 live loadings. When this has
been completed we will transfer the load effects into the beam loading tables making
use of the direct link between the structure and beams
Procedure
1. Start the program.
2. Begin a new project using the menu item File | New | Create From
Template... and select “EU Project” from the My Templates list.
3. Use the menu item Data | Structure Type | Line Beam to indicate that the
structure for this project will be a line beam.
4. From the main menu select File | Titles to give a project title of “3 Span Line
Beam” with a sub title of “Example 8.1” and a Job Number: of “8.1” and put
your initials in the Calculations by: field. Click “OK” to close the form.
8-3
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Create line beam geometry

5. Change the navigation window to Structure Definition
6. We now need to define the geometry of the line beam.
Click on the Structure Geometry icon to open the Line Beam Geometry
form. Set the Number of Spans to “3”. Click in the Span Length column on
each row of the table on the form and enter “21m” for the span lengths. Leave
the support conditions at their default values and change the Divide Shortest
Span into field to “21”. The Divide Longest Span into field will automatically
update to “21”. Leave it set to this value. Click ✓ OK to close the form.
Create the Design Beams

Only two design beams are required, one end span beam and one centre span
beam, as the structure and loading is symmetrical and it is expected that each
end span will have the same design.
7. Change the navigation window to Design Beams
8. Use the toolbar button to add an Existing Design Beam... and select the
file “EU Example 4_3.sam” that was created using the steps in Section 4.3 of
this Manual.
9. Select the beam in the navigation window and right click to Rename it “End
Span”
10. Right click again to select Copy which will create a copy of the first beam.
Rename this to “Centre Span”.
This process has provided two linked beams which are connected to the same
file. As the load effects acting on these beams are going to be different, it is
important to embed these beams into the project as separate entities with
separate load effects tables.
11. Click on the Embed All Linked Beams task at the bottom of the navigation
window which will break the link to the single file.
It is not necessary but, if desired, the embedded beams can be re-linked back
to separate beam file once the analysis has provided the load effects for the
beams.
Define Structure Properties

Having defined the geometry of the structure and the design beams we now
need to define the structure properties.
12. Change to the Structure Properties Navigation Window and click on the Create
Section and Beam Groups task at the bottom of the window.
This will create two entries for an end and centre span. However we wish to
assign cracked section properties for the slab over the internal supports which
8-4
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
mean we need a different entry for the left and right end spans to ensure the
section properties are calculated accurately.
13. Select the End Span object in the navigation window, which will open up a
data form, and change the Description to “Left Span” before closing with ✓ OK.
Then right mouse click in the navigation window to select Copy to create a
third property. The Description for this in the data form should be changed to
“Right Span” before closing with ✓ OK.
14. Select the Left Span object in the navigation window and in the resulting data
form, change Type: to “Transformed Section” and the Cracked Section | from
right | Proportion to “0.15”. In the graphics window click on the left span to
select all the beam elements in that span. Close the form with the ✓ OK
button.
15. Repeat this for the Right Span as a “Transformed Section” but this time the
Cracked Section will be from the left as opposed to the right.
16. Repeat this for the Centre Span as a “Transformed Section” but this time enter
the proportion of “0.15” at both ends.
8-5
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Load Optimisation
17. The next step is to carry out a load optimisation on the line beam.
Click on the Data | Automated Loading... main menu item to open the
Automated Loadings form. Check the tick boxes for “gr1a (Tandem System)”,
“gr1b (Load Model 2)” and “SV80” (use “+” icons to make the tickbox available).
Set the Amplification factor... field to “no point in line beam”.
Click on the Nationally Determined Parameters... button to open the Nationally

Determined Parameters sub-form. In this sub-form select the EN 1990 tab and
scroll down to the values for Clause A2.3.1 Table A2.4(B) and click on the “+”
button for “Permanent Actions” to expand this sub-section. In this sub-section
ensure that the values for and “shrinkage” and “creep” are both set to “1”. Click
“OK” to close the Nationally Determined Parameters sub-form.
8-6
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
18. Click on the Analyse button on the Automated Loadings form. Click on the
Results... button to see the Results Viewer and close it using the Exit button.
19. Select the Dead and SDL Loading tab on the Automated Loadings form. Set
the Continuous from Stage field to “Stage 1B Concrete” and change the value
of SDL Intensity to “4.2kN/m”. Make sure Analyse for SDL, Analyse for Diff.
Temp. and Analyse for Shrinkage are all ticked. Click on the “Analyse” button
to carry out the load optimisation. When it has completed, select “Other” in the
Load Type: field and ensure the available tick boxes below this field are ticked.
The graphics will show the results shown below.
8-7
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Transfer Results
Once the loads have been generated, the next step is to transfer the enveloped
analysis results into the appropriate beam load effect tables.
20. To do this, click on the Transfer Beam Load... button. This opens the Transfer
Results form. Click on the left span on the graphics window to select the beam
into which we want to transfer the results. The beam will be highlighted in red
and the details shown in the Design Beam field.
This form is used to match the load cases in the line beam with the design load
cases in the beam file. This could be completed one line at a time by clicking
in the Design Load Case column to select the required design load case in the
beam file then click in the Automated Load Results column and select the
loading you want to transfer into that load case. Ensure that the ULS Factor in
are all set correctly. Fortunately there is a quick way to fill this form in with all
the default values being applied in one go.
21. At the bottom of the form is a set of toolbar icons, the last one of which is
set default mapping which is exactly what we want to fill the form in as shown
below. Adjustments can be made if necessary but the defaults are ideal for a
line beam analysis such as this. Only the load cases that have been selected
and analysed will be mapped.
8-8
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
22. The centre span beam can be defined on the same form by adding a second
transfer set with the “+” button in the top right corner of the form, selecting the
middle beam on the graphics window and selecting the Set Default Mapping
button again.
8-9
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
23. The next step is to calculate the transverse distribution factors.
To do this, click on the AASHTO D.F. Wizard... button. This will open the
Distribution Factors Wizard form. Set the Table 4.6.2.2.1-1 Cross Section: field
to “K” (if not already set) and leave all other values in the table at the default
settings.
When you have entered this data, click ✓ OK to close the wizard form.
24. The Transfer Results form will now display the DFM values. Click on the
Transfer Results button and select “Transfer All Sets” to transfer the factored
load effects into the appropriate design beam load tables for both beams.
25. Close the Transfer report form, the Transfer Results form and the Automated
Loading form with ✓ OK before opening the Design Beam navigation window.
26. Select any of the load tables that have been transferred to see the results
8-10
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
27. Click on the File | Save As... main menu item and enter the filename “My EU
Example 8_1.sst”. Click on the “Save” button to save the file.
Summary
In this example we created a 3 span line beam and assigned structure properties to it,
using a pre-stressed concrete beam file created in an earlier example. Although we
only had one beam file we used it to create two embedded design beams, one for the
end span and the other for the central span. These two design beams were used to
create 3 separate structure properties, one for each span. We then used the load
optimisation to create Dead, SDL, Diff temp/shrinkage and Live loads. The load
effects were then transferred to the design beams, using the AASHTO Distribution
Factor Wizard to calculate distribution factors based on the geometry of the structure.
It should be noted that the Eurocode road traffic load effects for gr1a have been split,
during the transfer, into two separate tables in the design beams; one for the Tandem
system part and the other for the UDL part. This is necessary as it is possible that the
psi factors may be different for each component which will affect how they are
combined together for different combinations or whether the traffic loading is a leading
load or an accompanying load.
8-11
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
8-12
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
8.2. Steel Composite Beam Grillage Integration

Subjects Covered:
Transfer of results from grillage analysis model to steel composite beam load tables
Outline
In this example we are going to follow a procedure for carrying out a Eurocode traffic
load optimisation for bending and shear in two beams, transferring the analysis results
to the steel composite beam load effect tables for subsequent design checks.
The 2 span steel composite structure has already been defined in a pre-prepared data
file which contains materials, design sections, design beams, structure definition and
structure properties. We are going to use the automated load optimisation to create
live loads on the structure that can be used in the design of two of the beams. The
structure is symmetrical so we will only consider the centre beam and outer beam of
span 2 and we will determine worst effects for just three points on each:
• Sagging bending moment at mid-span
• Hogging bending moment at the pier
• Vertical shear at the node next to the pier (not coincident with it)
For each of the two beams we will determine the influence surfaces, carry out the load
optimisation for the three effects with regard to creating gr5 load combinations using
an SV80 vehicle and transfer the analysis results back to the design beams.
8-13
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Procedure
Import The Structure

1. Start the program and open the pre-prepared data file “EU Example 8_2
Grillage.sst”.
2. Use the File | Titles main menu item to set the Project Title to “Grillage with
Automated Live Loads”, a subtitle of Example 8.2, a Job number of “8.2” and
put your initials in the Calculations by field.
Define Influence Surfaces and Load Optimisation

We will now create some influence surfaces and generate live load patterns
using the load optimisation in the program. The first step is to define the
influence surfaces we want to generate.
3. Click on the Data | Influence Surface... menu item to open the Influence
Surface Generation form. Set Pick Mode to “Beam Element” then click on the
beam three elements indicated below in span 2 in the graphics window. The
short element will need clicking on twice to make the third entry for shear
This will give three rows of data in the influence table.
4. In the second row change Scope to “Hogging” and Select “No” in the confirm
form that asks if other things need changing.
5. In the third row change Start/End to “End” and Effect to “Shear Forces”
8-14
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
The next step is to analyse the structure and generate the influence surfaces.
6. Set Generate by to “Reciprocal” and click on the Analyse button. A progress

box will open. Click on the Done button when the analysis has completed. The
graphics window will now show the influence surface for the first member
selected.
Next we will compile the loading patterns for the influence surfaces we have
just generated.
7. Set Type: to “Road Traffic” then click on the Run Optimisation... button to open
the Road Traffic Load Optimisation form.
8. Click on the Groups and Limit States icon at the top and select the option to
“Clear all”. Then tick the ULS-STR/GEO(B) | Persist/trans | gr5 option as well
as the SLS | Characteristic | gr5 option. The Scope option should be set to
“Matching”. The Load Model 3 Special Vehicles option should be set to “SV80”
9. Click on the Compile Loading Patterns button to run the load optimisation. A
relatively limited range of load types has been considered to minimise the
amount of data but many options can be run at the same time if required.
8-15
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
This should create all the load cases needed for the 6 combinations requested
(3 ULS 3 SLS). The loading patterns can be seen in the graphics screen for
each of the cases by selecting the correct influence in the Influence Surface
Generation form
Click on ✓ OK on the Load Optimisation and ✓ OK on the Influence Surface

Generation forms to save the loads that have been created.
The load case that have been created now need to be solved.
10. From the main menu select Calculate | Analyse Structure... The Activate
Loading Sets form will open. This allows you to select which loading sets you
want to solve. Each time the load optimisation is run, a loading set is
automatically generated for the load cases produced by that run. Ensure that
the appropriate loading set is ticked before clicking on the ✓ OK button
8-16
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
The program will open a form showing the progress of the analysis. Once the
analysis has completed, click on the Done button.
The analysis results can be viewed with the results viewer. if required, but the
main purpose of this example is the transfer the bending moments and shear
forces to the Design Beams
Transfer results
11. In the main menu select Calculate |Transfer Results... to open the Transfer
Results form. In the graphics window click on the centre beam in span 2. It will
be highlighted in red in the graphics and will be reflected in the data form.
In the lower part of this data form it is necessary to match the analysed load
cases/combinations with the appropriate load effects table in the design
beams.
12. Results transfer can be completed in defined sets and these sets can be saved
as separate items. Set the Name field to “Centre beam Span 2”
13. There are 6 combinations to transfer (3 ULS 3 SLS) so click on the “+” button
at the bottom of the form to add six rows to the table.
14. Fill in the six rows of data as shown noting that although there are six separate
load compilations to transfer, there will only create 3 load effects tables in the
design beams as both ULS and SLS are shown in the same table
8-17
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
15. Use the Transfer Results | Transfer Current Set to Design Beam button to
transfer the results and “OK” the information message before closing the
Transfer Results form with the ✓ OK button.
16. To check that these results have been transferred correctly change the
navigation window to Design Beams and note the three Beam Loads objects
for “Inner Beam”
Repeat for Other Design Effects/Beams

The whole process can be repeated for other design effect on different beam.
However, it is required to create the same design effects for the Outer beam.
17. In the main menu select Data | Influence Surface to open the Influence
Surface Generation form. Change the three Joint/Member to 1332, 1323 and
1323 to give the similar locations and effects on the outer beam, (confirming
that the influences will need to be regenerated.
18. Click on the Analyse button to create the influence surfaces and select the
Done button to complete the analysis
8-18
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
19. Click on the Run Optimisation button and select the Compile Loading Patterns
button on the new form. It is important not to overwrite existing loads so answer
“No” to this.
20. After the new load patterns have been created click on the ✓ OK button on
both the Load Optimisation and Influence Surface forms.
21. The new load cases need analysing so use the main menu Calculate |
Analyse Structure to open the Active Loading Sets form. There is no need to
re-solve the first loading set, so un-tick it and click on the ✓ OK button
The resulting load effects can also be transferred to the outer Design Beam
22. In the main menu select Calculate |Transfer Results... to open the Transfer
Results form.
23. Add a new transfer set by clicking on the “+” button in the top right of the form
and define the Name as “Outer Beam Span 2”.
24. Click on the Copy Transfer Details From button and select “Centre Beam Span
2” and the in the graphics window click on the outer lower beam in the second
span
8-19
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
25. The Structure Analysis load case in the form need changing to combinations 7
to 12 but then the transfer of results can then be completed by clicking on the
Transfer Results button and selecting Transfer Current Set to Design Beam.
26. Click on the Transfer Results button and select “Transfer Current Set to Design
Beam” to complete the task of entering the results in the “Outer Beam” load
effects table. OK the information message,
27. To check that these results have been transferred correctly change the
navigation window to Design Beams and note the three Beam Loads objects
for “Outer Beam”
28. Save the data file as “My EU Example 8_2.sst”.
Summary
In this example a pre-prepared data file containing a 2 span steel composite
bridge deck was opened and live loads were generated using the live load
optimisation feature. The critical load effects for the centre beam of span 2
were calculated and transferred to the appropriate tables in the design beam.
This was repeated for the outer beam of span 2.
8-20
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
8.3. Using a Section Library to Create a PS beam with a pseudo curved

soffit
Subjects Covered:
Importing DWG sections; Importing DXF sections; User defined library shapes; User
defined SXF files; Design sections from Design beams
Outline
This example demonstrates the dxf/dwg interface with AutoCAD and similar programs
as well as the use of ASBD section libraries and the use of the sxf format interface
files. It also demonstrates the process of creating Design sections from Design Beams
as specific locations.
The objective of the example is to create a pretensioned pre-stressed beam that
represents one with a curved soffit, although the tendons remain horizontal
throughout. The actual prestressed beam with the insitu slab infill looks like:
In Autodesk Structural Bridge Design it is not possible to create a prestressed beam

with an actual curved soffit, but it is possible to represent it as a beam with variable
section in a stepped fashion.
The section elements at the end of the beam are imported from CAD files and a
reinforced beam is created using these section components where a curved soffit can
be applied. To enable this the section shapes are placed into a section library and the
tendons exported into an ASCII file
By defining specific points of interest on this RC beam, that relate to the points where
we want to define the individual segments of the PS beam, we can extract the
sections at these locations and by putting these into a section library they can easily
be used in the definition of the PS beam.
The final pseudo curved prestressed beam should look like:
8-21
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
The sections and crosses representing the tendons were created in AutoCAD using
standard drawing elements such as straight lines and polylines. Note that the section
outline has to have a closed perimeter in order for it to be imported into Autodesk
Structural Bridge Design.
Procedure
1. Start the program and from the main menu select File | New | Create from
Template and select “EU Project”
2. Use the menu item File |Titles... to set the title as “PS Beam with Curved
Soffit” with a sub-title of “Example 8.3”. Also add your initials to the Calculated
by data item. Click on “OK” to close the Titles form.
3. Set the navigation window to Design Sections and use the Import icon on
the toolbar to import the cad section from “M2 Beam modified.dwg”. The
section and tendon were drawn in two layers in metres so import both of these.
4. The navigation window shows a new section called “M2 Beam Modified” (from
the CAD file name) with a section element called “BEAM2MOD” (from the
drawing layer name) and a set of tendons.
8-22
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
5. Select the section element “SE1” and in the resulting form set the material
Property to the “C40/50” concrete. Also add the shape to a user defined
section shape library file by clicking on the Shape Library Icon. Create a new
library called “My EU Example 8_3 shape.lib”. Use the ✓ OK button to close
the User Defined Section Element form.
6. With the “SS1” section selected in the navigation tree click on the Import Icon in
the toolbar again and this time select the DXF file “Infill Slab .dxf”. This has
been drawn in a layer called INFILLSLAB, so ensure this layer has been
selected before clicking on Next >.
7. Select the section element “SE2” in the navigation tree and in the resulting
form set the material Property to the “C32/40” concrete. Also add the shape to
the user defined section shape library file by clicking on the Shape Library Icon
and selecting the same library file as before. Use the ✓ OK button to close the
User Defined Section Element form.
8-23
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
8. Select Tendons in the navigation tree to open up the Define Tendons form.
Export these tendons into an ASCI text file in an “sxf” format using the Data
Export button at the bottom of the form. Save this to a file called “My EU
Example 8_3 tendons.sxf” and close the Define Tendons form with the ✓ OK
button
The shapes we have saved in the shape library are now going to be used to
define the shape of an RC beam
9. Change the navigation window to Design Beams and use the Icon in the
toolbar to create a New Reinforced Concrete beam.
10. The beam length will remain at “20m” but in the Define field select “Section” to
open the RC Beam Section Definition form. In the first row Component field
select “User Library” and open the file “My EU Example 8_3 shape.lib” which
will display all the stored shapes in the library. Select the shape “BEAM2MOD”
and then close the User Defined Component form with the ✓ OK button.
Change the Property for this component to the “C40/50” concrete and then
click twice on the bottom edge of the shape in the graphics window, to define
this as the soffit (turns thick red), before closing the RC Beam Section
Definition form with the ✓ OK button
11. In the Define field of the Beam Definition form select “soffit profile” to open the
Define Soffit Profile form. Three addition points need to be added to this table,
with the centre one given an offset of 600mm, and segments 2 and 3 are
marked as “Arc”, as shown here:
12. Close the Define Soffit Profile form and the Beam Definition form using the ✓
OK button.
8-24
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
It is now necessary to define “Points Of Interest” at specific locations were we

wish to establish the section shapes for input into out Prestressed beam. This
is done from the beam analysis form.
13. Right mouse click in the navigation window and select “Analyse Beam...”. In
the Beam Analysis form click on the Points of Interest button and add points at
0.5m 1.5m 2.75m 4.5m 7.0m.
14. Close the Points of Interest and Beam Analysis forms with the ✓ OK button.
15. Right mouse click in the navigation window and select “Create Design
Sections...” to open the Design Section Creation form. Select all but the first
and last points by ticking the Creation Point tick boxes.
16. Close the Design Section Creation form with the ok button and automatically
the navigation window changes to Design Sections and the six new sections
are displayed.
For each of the new sections we need to change the single shape name to
indicate the location and save each one into the shape library defined earlier.
17. Click on the section element “SE1” for the first new section “SB1 at 0.500” to
open the User Defined Section Element form. This will enable the Name to be
changed to “Beam at 0.5” before clicking on the Shape Library icon to add this
shape to the same library file as before.
8-25
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
18. This should be repeated for the other 5 section
When all 6 sections have been saved in the section library then they are
available to be used in the definition of the Prestressed beam
19. Change the navigation window to Design Beams and create a New
Pretensioned Prestressed beam that has a 20m spam and is a uniform
section (at the moment)
20. In the Define field select “Section” to open the Pre-tensioned Beam Section
Definition form. In the first row Component field select “PC beam-user library”
and select the library file that has been used throughout this example. Select
“Beam at 0.5” from the available shapes and close the Select Shape form with
✓ OK. The Concrete Property should be set to the grade C40/50 concrete.
21. In the second row Component field of the Section Definition form select “Insitu
–user library” and open the same library file, picking the “INFILLSLAB” shape
before closing the Select Shape form with ✓ OK.
8-26
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
22. In the Define field of the Beam Definition form select “Tendons” which will open
the Tendon Definition form. Click on the Tendon Locations button and in the
new form click on the Data Import button and open the file “My EU Example
8_3 tendons.sxf”. Close the Tendon Locations form with ✓ OK.
23. No tendons are active at this point so window round the “greyed out” tendons
in the graphical section and then use a right mouse click in the graphics
window to select “Insert” to make them all active. Close the Tendon Definition
form with ✓ OK.
24. In the Cross Section is: field of the Beam Definition form select “varying” and
set the No of different sections: to “6”, which will create 6 sections – all the
same as the first. In the Define field select “Section Locations” to open the
Section Locations form. This should be filled in as follows:
Section 1 0
Section 1 1
Section 2 1
Section 2 2
Section 3 2
Section 3 3.5
Section 4 3.5
Section4 5.5
Section 5 5.5
Section 5 8.5
Section 6 8.5
Section 6 11.5
Section 5 11.5
Section 5 14.5
Section 4 14.5
Section 4 16.5
Section 3 16.5
Section 3 18
8-27
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Section 2 18
Section 2 19
Section 1 19
Section 1 20
25. Close the Section Locations form with ✓ OK.
26. The last thing to do is use the Define field to open up the Section Definition
form for sections 2 to 5 to change the PS beam component to the correct one
in the library. A prompt will appear to change other sections but answer “No” to
this each time it appears. The results beam should look like:
27. Save the project file as “My EU Example 8_3.sst” before closing the program
Summary
This example explains how to create user libraries of sections from data that has been
pre-prepared in, and imported from, AutoCAD in both dxf and dwg formats. This may
be useful when considering sections that are not available in the default “Concrete
Beam” and “Steel Section” libraries provided in Autodesk Structural Bridge Design.
SXF files are also created to store data pertaining to reinforcement and tendons.
In addition, the example shows how to extract design sections from design beams at
any location along the beam
8-28
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Note that after a section has been defined with data imported from a DWG file it may
be necessary to re-assign the material properties for the reinforcement and tendons
before analysing the section.
8-29
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
8-30
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
8.4. Defining a Grillage with a DXF File

Subjects Covered:
Preparing DXF files for Autodesk Structural Bridge Design grillages; Importing DXF
files into Autodesk Structural Bridge Design to define grillages
Outline
The grillage for the skew deck structure below would be easy to define directly in
Autodesk Structural Bridge Design. However, in this example an alternative method
for defining such geometry in AutoCAD is outlined. A DXF file has been prepared in
AutoCAD using a set of specialised commands which are loaded into AutoCAD.
Below is the drawing containing the geometric data for the grillage beam elements.
Note that for a grillage Autodesk Structural Bridge Design will only recognise
elements defined using line or polyline entities in the DXF file, and these will be
interpreted as beam elements when data from the DXF file is imported into the
program.
The process of creating a grillage is very simple in AutoCAD; the basic process is
defined below.
8-31
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Creating a DXF File for a Grillage using a CAD Application

1. Launch AutoCAD.
2. Set the drawing limits and set the viewing angle as a plan view
3. Draw a single line representing one longitudinal beam in the grillage.
4. Use the ‘Array’ or ‘Multiple copy’ tool to create an array of longitudinal beams.
5. Repeat these two steps to create a set of transverse beams.
Note It is not necessary to split the beams into individual beam elements as
this can be done automatically during the import
6. Save as a DXF file.
7. Save the DWG file and close AutoCAD.
Importing the DXF File into Autodesk Structural Bridge Design to Create a
Grillage
2. In the main menu select File |Titles... to set the Project Title as “Create
Grillage from CAD file” with a sub-title of “Example 8.4” and a Job Number of
“8.4”. Also add your initials to the Calculated by data item. Click on ✓ OK to
3. In the main menu select Data | Structure Type | Refined Analysis
4. Change the navigation window to Structure Definition and then click on the
Import Model icon in the toolbar to open the Import Model form. Select the
“Bridge Structure” radio button. This will ensure that all members in the Z=0.0
plane are automatically assigned as deck members when the data is imported
into the program. Click on the Browse button and open the supplied DXF file
with a name of “grillage.dxf”. Click on the Next button to move to the next form.
8-32
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
5. Untick the tick box for layer “0” so that only the tick box for layer “DECK” is
ticked.
6. Tick the tick box for “Split intersecting beam elements” so that both available
tick boxes are ticked. Ensure that the One linear drawing unit... field is set to
“metre”. This will ensure that the grillage is split into individual beam elements
and that the grillage will be at the correct scale.
7. Click on the Next button to move to the next form
8. The progress of the import is logged and the warning message should be
noted. To inspect the meaning of these warnings click on the View SXF File...
button. These are related to the end joints of the longitudinal beams where they
are only connected to a single member. These members will be deleted later
so we can move on. Click ✓ OK to close the Import Model form.
9. The Member Details form will open automatically. Note that the tick boxes in
the Deck column are ticked automatically, indicating that the imported beam
8-33
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
elements are in the deck. Hence, these beam elements will be considered as
deck members in the calculation of influence surfaces and the application of
loads. Delete the 8 members at each end of the structure that are not required
(highlighted in red below) by selecting them in the graphics window (use the
<Ctrl> key for multiple selection) and then the <Delete> key or “-“ button. Click
✓ OK to close the Member Details form.
Individual beam elements in the longitudinal direction would need to be

grouped together as being in longitudinal beams to enable various grillage
functions in the analysis.
10. To set up the longitudinal and transverse members first define Span End Lines
by clicking on Structure at the top of the navigation window and then using the
toolbar button to select Span End Lines. Define the two lines graphically
by clicking on the two ends of the leftmost edge and then the two ends of the
rightmost edge. Close the Span End Lines form with the ✓ OK button.
11. Select the Longitudinal Beams object in the navigation tree to open up the
longitudinal Beams form. Simply window round the entire structure and the
software will determine contiguously connected beams between span end lines
to create 9 individual longitudinal beams. Use ✓ OK to close the Longitudinal
Beams form.
8-34
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
12. Select the Transverse Beam object in the navigation tree to open the
Transverse Beams form and then window round the entire structure. Again the
software determines contiguously connected beams between the two extreme
longitudinal beams to create 8 individual transverse beams. Use ✓ OK to close
the Transverse Beams form.
13. Additional data for the Design Lines, Carriageways and Section Properties etc.
can be defined to complete the structure file. See examples 6.4 and 10.1 for
information on defining grillage structure files
14. The structure file can be saved at this point by using the main menu File |Save
as... , and saving the file with a name of “My EU Example 8_4.sst”.
Summary
This method enables users to import data from a DXF file to define a beam element
grillage. Such a method of working can be useful when the complex geometry of a
bridge deck has been defined in a drawing file. It is worth noting that design lines can
be imported from DXF files by using the “Import” button on the Define Design Line
form, which is a great help when trying to create a curved structure and carriageway
that follows a transition curve defined in a CAD program
8-35
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
8-36
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
8.5. Defining Box Girder with DXF File

Subjects Covered:
Preparing DXF files for Autodesk Structural Bridge Design finite element structures;
Importing DXF files into Autodesk Structural Bridge Design to define finite element
structures; Design Line; Carriageway definition; Local axes; FE properties
Outline
The box girder bridge below has a slab thickness of 200mm and a bottom flange
thickness of 275mm. The thickness of the webs is 250mm. The structure is modelled
using 3D shell finite elements. The geometry of the structure is complicated with the
slab (curved on plan) and sloping webs of the box girders. A structure with such
geometry would be difficult to define directly in Autodesk Structural Bridge Design.
However, such geometry is relatively easy to define in AutoCAD. Hence, a DXF file
has been prepared in AutoCAD using a set of specialised commands which are
loaded into AutoCAD. The DXF file will be imported into Autodesk Structural Bridge
Design to define the geometry of the structure.
Below is the drawing file containing the geometric data for the finite elements. Note
that Autodesk Structural Bridge Design will recognise only elements defined using
either the specialised commands, or individually drawn 3D FACE entities, as finite
elements when data from the DXF file is imported into Autodesk Structural Bridge
Design.
Below is an outline of the preliminary steps that can be followed to create a DXF file in
AutoCAD for a simple finite element mesh. Note that in these steps commands that
are typed into AutoCAD are in blue for clarity in this document.
8-37
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Defining a DXF File for an FE Model in Autodesk Structural Bridge Design

1. Open AutoCAD.
2. Define the drawing limits.
3. Draw 3D lines and arcs in layer “0” to represent the boundary of the deck
4. Set the system variables Surftab1 and Surftab2 to define the mesh density and
then use Edgesurf to create a mesh by clicking on the 4 edges of the boundary
line starting with the bottom edge and working around the edge of the structure
in an anti-clockwise direction. This divides the deck along the lines that define
the mesh.
5. Define a new drawing layer (Colour eg Red) and name it say, “DECK”.
6. Make the DECK layer the current layer end then “Explode” the mesh which will
create 3DFaces in the DECK layer.
7. Repeat a similar process for the Bottom Flange in a different layer with a
different name and colour.
8. Create boundary lines between the two layers and follow a similar process to
create 3 meshes representing the 3 webs and explode them into a new layer,
named say “WEBS”.
9. Save the model as a dxf file.
10. Save the DWG file and close AutoCAD.
Importing the DXF File into Autodesk Structural Bridge Design to Create
an FE Mesh
Below are steps describing how data is imported into Autodesk Structural
Bridge Design from a DXF file to define a finite element model.
2. In the main menu select File |Titles... to set the Project Title as “Box Girder
from DXF file” with a sub-title of “Example 8.5” and a Job Number of “8.5”.
Also add your initials to the Calculated by data item. Click on ✓ OK to close
the Titles form.
3. In the main menu select Data | Structure Type | Refined Analysis
4. Change the navigation window to Structure Definition and then click on the
Import Model icon in the toolbar to open the Import Model form. Select the
“Bridge Structure” radio button. This will ensure that all members in the Z=0.0
plane are automatically assigned as deck members when the data is imported
into the program. Click on the Browse button and open the supplied DXF file
with a name of “BoxGirder.dxf”. Click on the Next button to move to the next
form.
8-38
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
5. Untick the tick box for layer “0”. The tick boxes for all other layers are ticked.
Click on the Next button to move to the next form.
1. Ensure that the One linear drawing unit... field is set to “metre” and click on the
Next button to move to the next form.
2. When the data has been imported click ✓ OK to close the Import Model form.
3. The Member Details form will open automatically. By scrolling down the table
on the form we can see that the tick boxes in the Deck column are ticked
automatically for those finite elements that form the deck. Hence, these finite
elements will be considered as deck elements in the calculation of influence
surfaces and the application of loads. Click ✓ OK to close the Member Details
form.
Defining the Carriageway and Span End Lines

4. We will define a design line which will be used to align the carriageway.
Select Structure in the navigation window and click on the button to select
“Design line” to open the Define Design Line form. Click the “+” button at the
bottom of the data form and in the resulting form select the Arc radio button
and click the Next> button. Select the 3 points on curve radio button and click
8-39
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
the Next> button. Set the Snap field at the top of the graphics window to
“Intersection” and select 3 points along the centre of the deck in the graphics
window by clicking on the point at the left hand end of the deck, a point near
the centre of the span and then at the right hand end of the deck. Click Next>
and ✓ OK to close all the forms.
5. Next we will define the carriageway that will run over the structure.
Click on the button and select “Carriageway” from the dropdown menu to
open the Define Carriageway form and set the fields to the selections and
values shown below. (Note that the traffic flow direction is indicated by a
triangular arrow head in each notional lane and clicking on each of the arrows
until they are double-headed will show that traffic can flow in either direction.
However, in this example we will leave the lanes as single direction). Click ✓
OK to close the Define Carriageway form.
6. The next step is to define the location of the span end lines.
Click on Structure in the Navigation window and click on the toolbar button
to select “Span End Lines”. This will open the Define Span End Lines form.
Click on the bottom left and top left-hand corners of the structure on the
graphics window. This will draw a heavy black line. Repeat this for the right-
hand abutment to define the span end lines. Click ✓ OK to close the form.
8-40
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Defining Supports
Next we will define the 6 support nodes for the structure. The supports will be
defined such that the 4 outer supports will be resisting vertical loads only. The
support node at the centre of the left hand end of the structure will be fixed in
the radial and tangential direction. The support node at the centre of the right
hand end of the structure will be fixed in the radial direction and free in the
tangential direction. It is recommended that the user takes note of the
orientation of the local axes of the support nodes when interpreting support
reaction results.
7. Click on Structure in the navigation window and then click on the button to
select “Supported Nodes”. Ensure that the Select field is set to “All Joints” and
select the 3 nodes at the left hand end of the structure as shown below. In the
first row of the support table, change the support conditions so that only the DZ
direction is fixed. Change Group Type to “Variable” then click on the middle of
the 3 nodes (node 32). Change the support conditions for this node so that it is
also fixed in DX and DY.
8. The orientation of the supports will be altered such that the local y axis is
tangential and the local x axis is radial.
Click on the “+” button next to the Support Constraints about field to open the
Define Support Local Axes sub-form. Click on the bottom right support node
(node 59) then on the bottom left support node (node 96). Note that the angle
in the Beta field has changed to 101.4212 degrees. Click ✓ OK to close the
sub-form.
9. Change Name to “Left Supports” and click ✓ OK to close the Define Supported
Nodes form.
8-41
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
10. The support nodes at the right hand end of the structure will now be defined.
Click on the button and select “Supported Nodes” again. Select the 3
nodes at the right hand end of the structure as shown below. In the first row of
the support table, change the support conditions so that only the DZ direction is
fixed. Change Group Type to “Variable” then click on the middle of the 3 nodes
(node 42). Change the support conditions for this node so that it is also fixed in
DX.
11. The orientation of the supports will be altered such that the local y axis is
tangential and the local x axis is radial.
Click on the “+” button next to the Support Constraints about field to open the
Define Support Local Axes sub-form. Click on the bottom left support node
(node 51) then on the bottom right support node (node 81). Note that the angle
in the Beta field has changed to 78.5788 degrees. Click ✓ OK to close the
sub-form.
12. Change Name to “Right Supports” and click ✓ OK to close the Define
Supported Nodes form.
8-42
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Properties
There are three properties to define
i. The 250mm thick isotropic FE property for webs.
ii. The 200mm thick isotropic FE property for slab.
iii. The 275mm thick isotropic FE property for bottom

flange.
13. Change the Structure navigation window to Structure Properties and then click
on the button at the top of the navigation window to select Finite Element.
14. In the Finite Element Properties form, change the Thickness: to “250”, ensure
the Material property id the grade C32/40 concrete and change the Name to
“250 thick FE”.
15. Click on the Filter toolbar dropdown button and select “WEBS”. Note that sub
model groups were automatically created for each of the layers in the imported
DXF file. Box around the whole structure to assign this section property to the
webs. Click ✓ OK to close the form.
16. Assign the section properties for the other sub model groups by following a
similar procedure. When all of the section properties have been assigned
select “Select All” to turn the filter off.
17. The structure file can be saved at this point by selecting the menu item
File|Save as... , and saving the file with a name of “My EU Example 8_5.sst”.
18. Additional data for the Basic Loads etc. can be defined to complete the
structure file. See examples 6.5 and 10.2 for further information on defining
finite element structure files.
Summary
This method enables users to import data from a DXF file to define a finite element
box girder structure in Autodesk Structural Bridge Design. The supports are assigned
to the structure and adjusted to suit the layout of the structure. Section properties are
also assigned to the structure. Note that a virtual member could be created within the
finite element analysis model. See Example 10.2 for information about this.
8-43
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
8-44
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
9. Specialist Analysis Techniques
Contents
9.1. Reinforcement Design Moments in a Finite Element Slab......................................... 9-3
9.2. Dynamics – Normal Modes Analysis – Simple Footbridge ........................................ 9-9
9.3. Staged Construction - Steel Composite Grillage ..................................................... 9-15
9.4. Non-Linear Analysis – Flat Slab Bridge Deck.......................................................... 9-33
9.5. Offset Beams – For Finite Element Decks .............................................................. 9-49
9.6. Integral FE Bridge Deck with Soil & Hydrostatic Pressure Loads ............................ 9-63
9.7. Time dependant Creep Effects in Prestressed beams ............................................ 9-85
9.8. User Defined Vehicles and Convoys ....................................................................... 9-97
9-1
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
9-2
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
9.1. Reinforcement Design Moments in a Finite Element Slab

Subjects Covered:
Creating new sub models; moving elements from one sub model to another;
Reinforcement sets; Moment triads; Design Moments.
Outline
Consider the finite element slab, as described and modelled in Example 6.5 and
loaded in Example 7.4
It is required to establish the design moments; hogging and sagging; main and
secondary, in a given reinforcement direction in various parts of the slab due to dead
load only. The design moments will be based on the Wood Armer equations.
The idealised reinforcement directions in the various components of the slab are as
shown below.
For hogging, the main reinforcement is parallel to a line joining the deck centre points
at each end.
Procedure
which was created in example 7.4. Close the Structure overview with the
✓Done button.
9-3
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
2. Use the Date | Titles menu option to change the Project Title to “Curved FE
Slab – Reinforcement Moments” and the sub title to “Example 9.1”. Change the
Job Number to “9.1” and put your initials in the Calculations by field before
closing the form with ✓ OK.
New Design Line

3. In the Structure Definition navigation pane toolbar click on and select
“Design Line” from the dropdown list.
4. Set the Snap: mode in the graphics toolbar to “Intersection” and then click on
the node at the centre of each end of the structure. (You may need to zoom in
on the graphics window to do this).
5. Set Name to “Secant of CL” and then close the Define Design Line form with
the ✓ OK button.
New Sub Models

For different reinforcement calculations to be carried out independently for
different slab thicknesses it is necessary to have a different sub-model for each
slab thickness.
It is therefore necessary to create two new sub models (in the same plane and
with the same origin as the existing sub model) and move the appropriate
elements from one to another.
6. Click on “Structure” at the top of the Navigation window. Click on in the
toolbar of the navigation window and select “2D Sub model (GCS, Z=0) from
the dropdown list.
7. Rename this sub-model to “300 slab” by right mouse clicking on the submodel
entry in the navigation window and choosing “Rename” from the options.
Moving elements between Sub Models

8. Within the “2D Sub Model: 2D Model A” sub model, in the navigation tree, click
on Sub Model Members.
To place the 300 thick elements into the appropriate sub model we first need to
select and then move them.
9-4
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
9. In the graphics window toolbar click on the filter button and then in the Member
Selection Filter form click on De-select All. Then set Select By to “Structure
Property”.
10. Move the 300mm property into the Selected Groups: by selecting it then
clicking on the “>” button. Close the filter form with the ✓ OK button.
11. Select all the displayed elements in the graphics window by windowing around
the whole structure.
12. In the Define Sub Model Members table click on Move to Sub Model... in
Member Tasks then select the 300 slab sub model before closing the Sub
Models form with the ✓ OK button.
14. Repeat steps 6 to 13 for the 700 slab. You will need to click on “Structure” at
the top of the tree so that the button is displayed again. After doing this,
Rename the “2D Model A” sub model as “500 slab”. Finally, use the drop down
arrow next to the filter button in the graphics window to turn off the filter (Select
All).
Analysis
The reinforcement moment calculations are principally post processing of load
case results, so the analysis of the already defined load cases can now be carried
out.
15. Use the menu item Calculate | Analyse... to perform the analysis.
16. Close the Analysis form with the ✓ Done button once the analysis is complete.
Defining the reinforcement sets

17. One or more reinforcement sets now need to be defined for each sub model.
18. In the navigation window, select the 500mm Slab sub model and then right
mouse click to select Add | Reinforcement Set.
19. In the Define Reinforcement Set form change the Name to “500 sag”, click on
the curved design line in the graphics window, click only “Sagging” in the Face
9-5
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
tick box and lastly tick the “Design” option in the Results for tick box. The
reinforcement direction can be seen in the graphics display
20. Close the Define Reinforcement Set form with the ✓ OK button.
21. Repeat 18 to 19 to create a second reinforcement set in the same sub model.
This time it is named “500 Hog”, the straight design line is selected and
Hogging and Design are both ticked.
22. To skew the secondary reinforcement so that it is parallel to the lines of the
supports change Pick to “Secondary Reinforcement Direction” and then click
on any two nodes or grid points on the right hand span end line.
23. Close the Define Reinforcement Set form with the ✓ OK button. There will
then be two reinforcement sets in the 500 Slab Sub Model.
9-6
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
24. Repeat 18 to 23 for the 300 slab sub model with exactly the same
reinforcement sets data as the 500 Slab, but of course use appropriate names.
25. Repeat 18 to 19 for the 700 slab sub model but this time both Hogging and
Sagging reinforcement are in the same direction and are both ticked. The
reinforcement direction data for this case is the same as for the “500 Hog” set.
Set the name for this set to “700 Hog & Sag”.
Results
26. Use the main menu File |Results... to open the results viewer. Set the view to
be combined graphic and table, as shown below, by using the menu items
View | Set Default Layout | Graphic Above Table. Adjust window size to suit
by holding the left mouse button down on the dividing line between the
graphics and table and dragging to a new position.
27. In the dark blue area at the top of the window (Results Controller) set Results
For to “Reinforcement Moments”, Name to “L1: Concrete Dead Loads” and Set
to “RS1: 500 Sag”.
28. In the graphics toolbar, the Results For field should be set to “Design –
Sagging Main”.
29. Change the viewing direction to plan by clicking on the Graphics toolbar icon
and click on the “Auto Redraw” button if the graphics are not automatically
updated.
9-7
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Hold left mouse button

down on this line and drag
to adjust window size
30. All the other reinforcement sets and components can be displayed and printed
in a similar way.
32. Use the main menu File | Save As... to save the data file with a name of “My
Summary
This example illustrates that if reinforcement moments are to be created for different
components of a structure, then each component should be in a separate sub model,
and that results can be obtained separately for each component. This will mean that
discontinuities, occurring at the boundaries of different thickness slabs, are correctly
allowed for.
Although in this example we have only considered one load case, the results for
compilations and envelopes are also available.
It should be pointed out that the results for compilations are not obtained by simply
summing the reinforcement moment results for each constituent load case. This
would be incorrect as the Wood Armer equations are not a linear set of equations.
They are calculated by summing the component moment triad results and then
performing the Wood Armer calculations on the resultant moment triad.
In this example we have only considered the calculation of Design Moment. It should
be noted that there are an equivalent set of equations (Denton Burgoyne) which can
be used for assessing the adequacy of a known set of reinforcement. This will be
covered in a separate example.
9-8
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
9.2. Dynamics – Normal Modes Analysis – Simple Footbridge

Subjects Covered:
Steel Footbridge; Normal Modes; Natural Frequencies; Mode Shapes; Participation
Factors; Sturm Sequence Checks; Structural Mass; Density; Lumped Mass;
Dynamic Compilations; Animation
Outline
Many structures have dynamic characteristics which are undesirable and, if not
checked, would fail to meet certain design requirements. Footbridges are structures
which are often susceptible to dynamic problems caused by wind or simply by
pedestrians using the structure. These vibrations can sometimes be excessive and
although they may not cause any structural failure, they may cause discomfort and
alarm to any user of the bridge.
It is therefore generally required to check that undamped natural frequencies of

footbridges do not fall within a specified range.
In the following example, the vibration modes of a tubular steel footbridge, as

described and modelled in Example 6.3, are to be examined.
It is required to establish the undamped natural frequencies and mode shapes of:
• The fundamental vertical bending mode
• The fundamental horizontal bending mode
• The first torsional mode.
It is also required to establish how many vibration modes there are below 45Hz and if
all these modes are considered, what percentage of mass participation is achieved in
the vertical and transverse horizontal directions.
The total mass acting on the structure is made up from the structural mass of the
structure members which we assume to have a weight density of 78.0kN/m3 (to
include a small amount for paint etc and connections) and some non-structural mass,
due to surface finishing of the deck, of 0.7kN/m2.
9-9
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Procedure
which was created in Example 6.3. Close the Structure overview with the
“Done” button.
2. Change the Title sub title of the example to “Example 9.2” using the
File | Titles... menu option, Change the Job Number to “9.2” and put your
initials in the Calculations by field before closing the form in the normal way.
Structural Mass
To check the structural mass applied to the structure we can look at a data
report to inspect the densities applied to each member.
3. Click on the Menu item File | Data Reports... to open the Data Reports form.
Scroll to the bottom of the form and tick to include Section Property Data then
click on the “View” button. Click ✓ OK on any warning message may that
appear.
4. Inspect the density of each of the properties. You will notice that they are all
77kN/m3.
5. Close the Results viewer with the green EXIT button and then the Data
Reports form with the ✓ Done button.
6. The density is generally defined in the property definitions, so these could be

changed here but in this example we will show how to be more specific in
changing densities for individual members/elements.
7. Change the Navigation window to Structure Properties by clicking on the

appropriate button at the bottom.
8. Click on at the top of the navigation window and select “Advanced Beam
Assignments | Modified Density” from the dropdown list.
9. Change Name to be “All Steel Modified” and the Density to “78”. Now window
round the whole structure in the graphics window to select all the members
9-10
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
10. Close the Specify Beam Density form with the ✓ OK button.
Structural Mass
The surfacing mass of 0.7 kN/m2 is to be added as Lumped mass on the nodes
of the bottom boom. The deck is 55m long and 3.5 m wide so the added
weight is 134.75kN. This will be applied to the 22 nodes in the deck, with the
two end nodes at each end having half the mass of the others. This works out
to 6.74kN (0.687Tonnes) on internal nodes and 3.37kN (0.344Tonnes) on the
end nodes.
11. Change the Navigation window to Structure Loads and click on in the
toolbar and select Lumped Mass from the dropdown list.
12. In the first row set mX mY and mZ to be all “0.687” and then click on each of
the 18 inner nodes in the deck. (This may be easier to see by filtering in the
“Bottom Bracing Deck” sub-model).
13. In the second row set mX mY and mZ to be all “0.344” and then click on each
of the 4 end nodes in the deck. (Don’t forget to remove the filter if you applied it
in the step before).
14. Change Name to be “Surfacing Mass” and then close the form with the ✓ OK
button.
15. To enable the addition of this into the structural mass we need to create a
dynamic compilation with this mass in it. Change the Navigation window to
Structure Compilations.
16. Click on at the top of the navigation window and select Dynamic from the
dropdown list. Click on the “+” button near the bottom of the form to add a row
to the table.
17. In the first row of the table we select the Load Name as “Surfacing Mass”. The
default value for the Factor is 1.0 which is correct. Change the Name to “With
Added Mass” before closing the form with the ✓ OK button.
9-11
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Analysis
18. In the main menu select Calculate | Dynamic Analysis... to open the Dynamic
Analysis Control form.
19. Set the Compilation for Dynamic Analysis data field to “C1: With Added Mass”.
20. The first analysis is a Sturm Sequence Check which checks the number of
modes below a given frequency. Check that this option is selected on the data
form and enter a frequency of “45”.
21. Click on the Analyse button. Click OK on a warning message that may appear.
22. When the analysis is complete click on the “Log File” icon at the bottom right-
hand corner of the Analysis form to open up the log file. This should report that
there are 39 modes below 45 Hz.
9-12
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
23. Close the Analysis Log File with the green EXIT button and the Analysis form
with the ✓ Done button.
24. On the Dynamics Analysis Control form (which should still be open) select the
Modal Analysis for radio button and set the data field to 39 Modes.
25. Click on the Analyse button. (The software may take a few seconds to perform
the analysis).
26. When the analysis is complete, close the analysis form with ✓ Done and close
the Dynamic Analysis Control form with the ✓ OK button.
27. Open the Results Viewer using the Menu item File | Results....
28. In the dark blue Results Control area tick the Show Participation Factors tick
box to display the following table
29. The percentage mass participation (at the bottom of the table) shows 93.7%
vertically and almost 100% laterally.
30. On inspection of the displacement participation factors for each of the first few
modes, it is clear that the first vertical deflection mode is mode 2 and the first
lateral deflection mode is mode 1.
9-13
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
31. These mode shapes can be visually checked by un-ticking the Show
Participation Factors tick box, setting Effect to “Deflected Shape” and clicking
on the “Auto Redraw” button on the graphics toolbar. Each mode can then be
selected in the Mode Shape data field and the mode shape will be displayed.
32. It may be easier to interpret the shapes if they are viewed in animation by using
the controls in the graphics toolbar . It is clear that mode 3 is
the first twisting mode.
33. Close the Results Viewer.
34. Use the main menu File | Save As... to save the data file with a name of “My
Summary
This example shows the very basics of carrying out a normal modes analysis using an
Autodesk® Structural Bridge Design structural model. It does not give any assistance
in creating models specifically for dynamic analysis where an understanding of
dynamic behaviour is required.
This is essentially a very simple model as all the structural material is the same and
has the same density. When composite beams are used where there is a mixture of
materials and densities, then a transformed density will be required. If composite
beams created by Autodesk Structural Bridge Design are used in the analysis then
this transformed density is calculated automatically.
9-14
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
9.3. Staged Construction - Steel Composite Grillage

Subjects Covered:
Define Construction Stages; Construction Stage Loading; Dead Load Compilations;
Recommended Outline Procedure for Staged Construction
Outline
In this example we are going to model a 2 span steel composite bridge. The bridge
has 4 longitudinal beams as shown in the diagram below.
The basic structure layout and mesh, together with the necessary design sections and
beams have been pre-defined in a data file that can be used as a starting point. The
creation/definition of these items is covered in earlier chapters of this manual, allowing
this example to concentrate on the procedures related to staged construction.
The girders have a uniform section throughout with a top flange of 500mm x 40mm, a
bottom flange of 600mm x 40mm and a web of 14mm thickness. The overall height of
the steel section is 1100mm and there is a 50mm deep haunch at the underside of the
slab. The slab thickness is 250mm. All concrete is grade C32/40. The structural steel
is grade S335 with appropriate yield strength in relation to the plate thickness.
To define construction stages for grillages it is not just a case of making various beam
elements active or inactive at each stage, but it is necessary to change section
properties to reflect whether a particular section is composite or steel only. The steel
only properties will be defined by the design sections and the composite properties by
the design beam.
9-15
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
There will be 4 construction stages as follows:

Stage 1 – Steel beams only continuous over pier
Self weight of steel beams span 1 and 2
Self weight of wet concrete at span 1
Construction loads on span 1
Stage 2 – Composite steel/concrete deck at span 1, steel only span 2
Self weight of wet concrete at span 2
Construction loads on span 2
Removal of construction loads on span 1
Stage 3 – Composite steel/concrete deck at span 1 & 2
Self weight concrete upstand
Construction loads for upstand
Removal of construction loads on span 2
Stage 4 – Edge upstand composite with deck to complete the structure
All superimposed dead loads and surfacing
Removal of construction loads for upstand
The loads applied at each stage will be combined into ULS compilations and SLS
compilations giving a total of 8 compilations. After analysing the load cases, the load
effects for each compilation, on one inner row of beams, will be transferred into the
construction stage loading tables associated with each beam.
9-16
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Procedure
Defining the Structure

The details of defining the basic structure are not discussed in this example as the
creation of Design Sections, the creation of Design Beams and the creation of a
Structure Definition have been covered in Chapters 2, 4 and 6 of the examples
manual. Instead we will open a pre-prepared data file that contains the starting
structure for this example and we will concentrate of defining the processes
necessary to carry out a staged analysis and to transfer the load effects into the
Design Beam loading tables for subsequent design.
However, not all sections/beams have been defined so this example does illustrate
how to extract a complete design section from a design beam and how to make
multiple copies of design beams.
1. Start the program and in the main menu select File | Open... to load the data
file named “EU Example 9_3 Start.sst”
2. In the main menu select File | Titles... to set the sub-title to “Example 9.3” and
the Job Number to “9.3”. Also add your initials to the Calculated by data item.
Click ✓ OK to close the form.
Check the data that has already been defined. It is worth noting the following:
• There are two structural steel material defined, grades S355/355 and
S335/345 as the different plate thicknesses of the plate girder require
different yield stresses.
• There are two Design Sections:
1. A section of the Edge Detail which is a rectangular section with its

centre at 1275mm above the origin, which coincides with the level
of the centre of the concrete slab.
2. A rectangular concrete section, 10 x 10mm, which is named

“nominal”, which will be used on connecting beam elements
where neglibable stiffness is required.
• There is only one Design Beam defined. If this was to be used where
no contraction stages were considered then this would be sufficient, as
all the beams are the same, all the load effects will be the same and the
structure is symmetrical. However, as we are considering staged
construction it will be necessary to have one beam for span 1 and
another for span 2, as the construction load effects will be different
Another interesting point to note about the beam is that it is defined with
2 construction stages (No. of construction stages in the Define
Composite Beam Form). However, the Location of Construction Stages
(defined in Define and locate span feature options) shows that the slab
is cast in one. The reason for this is that although the individual beam
only has one construction stage the structural analysis may have
9-17
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
multiple stages, as in our case. We therefore need two construction

load effect tables in each beam, one for all the analysis construction
cases where the girder is not composite and one for all the analysis
construction cases were the girder is composite.
• The layout of the structure model is quite simple with one mesh for each
span. It should be noted that the mesh in span 1 has been rotated
(using the Rotate Mesh button on the Define Mesh form) by 180
degrees so that the resulting longitudinal beams in span 1are defined
from right to left (as shown by the arrows) so that the design beams will
be assigned in the right direction
Creating Additional Components

The first step is to copy span 1 beam as a second beam and to define a new
section of the steel plate girder only, which can be extracted from the beam.
3. In the navigation window move to the Design Beam group, select “SB1: Steel
Composite Span 1” and use the toolbar button to copy this as a separate
entity. Right mouse click in the navigation window and select “Rename” to
rename this as “Steel Composite Span 2”. Close the Rename form with ✓ OK.
4. Click on the Analyse button in the navigation window toolbar and

immediately close the Analysis form with ✓ OK. This is just to activate the
points of interest from which a section can be extracted.
5. Right mouse click in the navigation window and select “Create Design
Sections...” to open the Design Section Creation form. Tick the middle point to
create a section at mid span and close the form with ✓ OK.
The program automatically moves to the Design Section navigation

window where it can be observed that a new section has been created
called “SB2 at 14.000m”. It is necessary to remove the reinforcement
and concrete components to leave a “Plate Girder Only” section
6. Select “Reinforcement” in this section to open up the Define Reinforcement

form. Click on the Clear button followed by ✓ OK.
7. Select the “Rectangle” component of the section and use the (Delete)
toolbar button at the top of the navigation window. Repeat this for the
“Trapezoidal” component. Close the open form with ✓ OK.
Note that the plate girder is constructed from three components so that
different material properties can be applied to each.
8. Rename this new section as “Plate Girder Only”
Defining Analysis Construction Stages and Assigning Properties

Before defining the construction stages for the analysis it is beneficial to assign
some structural properties to the structural components. The reason for this is
that if we create a new construction stage, before or after an existing stage,
9-18
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
then the existing stage property assignments are also copied. This can help to
minimise the changing of properties from stage to stage.
There is no hard and fast rule to the procedure to adopt but in this example we
are going to start by initially assigning the “Nominal” section property to all
structure members except the inner longitudinal beams where the “Plate Girder
Only” section is applied. This will represent the first construction stage.
A second construction stage is created copying the assignments from the first
and the structure properties changed to represent the second stage.
This is repeated for the third and final stages .
9. At the bottom of the Structure Properties navigation window select the Create
Sections and Beam Groups task to create an entry for each Design Beam and
Design Section defined.
10. Select the “Nominal” property to open the Structure Properties: Section form
and window round the entire structure in the graphics window before closing
the form with ✓ OK.
11. The longitudinal members now need to be re-assigned the correct property for
stage 1 so select the “Plate Girder Only” property in the navigation window and
in the data form change the Section Reference Axis Relative to: to “Origin. Set
the filter to “Longitudinal Beams” and draw a window round the four inner
longitudinal beams in both spans to overwrite the existing properties. Reset the
filter to “Select All” and close the form with ✓ OK.
12. At the bottom of the Structure Definition navigation window select the Open
Construction Stages task to open the Construction Stages data form.
13. Select the Stage Task Insert After to add a second construction stage.
In this example, all construction stages will have exactly the same
number of members and supports as the first, so we will not be
removing or adding members here, but in some examples this will be
required.
14. Close the Construction Stages form with ✓ OK (dismissing the information
message) and move to the Structure Properties navigation window. The
Construction Stage: selection field is now visible at the top of the window and
this should be set to “Stage 2”.
The structure property assignments are currently defined as being exactly the
same as the first stage so it necessary to overwrite these with the correct
assignments for this second stage.
15. Select the “Steel Composite Span 1” property in the navigation window to open
the Structure Properties: Beam form and ensure that the Beam Section
Reference Axis Relative to: is set to “origin”. Change the graphics view to a
plan view and draw a box around the four inner longitudinal beams in span 1 to
9-19
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
assign these beams for this stage. It is necessary to confirm that the properties
should be overwritten with “Yes to All”. Close the data form with ✓ OK.
16. The transverse bending of the structural slab is represented by the transverse
members having properties of a 250mm thick concrete slab. In the navigation
toolbar click on and select “Continuous Slab” to add this new property.
Change the Depth to “250”, set the filter in the graphics window to “Transverse
Members” and draw a box around the first span to overwrite the properties for
these members at this stage. Close the data form with ✓ OK.
17. To check what the structure looks like at this stage use the 3D Elements view
by clicking on in the main toolbar and remove any filters. This shows that
the transverse slab has been created at the same level as the supports and will
therefore need to be elevated by 1275mm.
18. Move to the Structure Definition navigation window and select in the toolbar
to add an Advanced Beam Set | Eccentricities to open the Define Beam
Eccentricities form. Add a new data line by clicking on the “+” button at the
bottom of the form. Enter “1275” in the Start Z field and also click in the End Z
field which should automatically update to the same value. Change the
Graphics Pick Mode to “Transverse beam” and window around the first span
before changing the Name to “Slab”. Close the form with ✓ OK. The 3D
elements View should now show the slab at the correct level.
Construction Stages task to open the Construction Stages data form. Ensure
the last data line is selected and then select the Stage Task Insert After to add
a third construction stage before closing the form with ✓ OK.
20. Move to the Structure Properties navigation window and ensure that the
Construction Stage: selection field at the top of the navigation window is set to
“Stage 3”.
21. Select the “Steel Composite Span 2” property in the navigation window to open
the Structure Properties: Beam form and ensure that the Beam Section
Reference Axis Relative to is set to “origin”. Change the graphics view to a
plan view and draw a box around the four inner longitudinal beams in span 2 to
assign these beams for this stage. It is necessary to confirm that the properties
should be overwritten with “Yes to All”. Close the data form with ✓ OK.
22. Select the “Slab” property in the navigation window to open up the Structure
Properties form. It should be noted that the member assignments for this
property from the previous stage are also applied in this stage so we need to
just add the rest of the slab. Set the graphics filter to “Transverse Beams” and
window round the remaining members in span 2. Before closing the Structure
Properties data form with ✓ OK.
23. In the Structure Definition navigation window select the “BE2: Slab” item which
contains the member eccentricities for the slab. It is necessary to add the
remaining transverse members in span 2 so set the Graphics Pick Mode to
9-20
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
“transverse beam” and then window round span 2 to select the remaining
members. Close the data form with ✓ OK.
24. Use the 3D elements view again to check the property assignments for this
stage.
Construction Stages task to open the Construction Stages data form again.
Ensure the last data line is selected and then select the Stage Task Insert After
to add a fourth construction stage before closing the form with ✓ OK.
26. Move to the Structure Properties navigation window and ensure that the
Construction Stage: selection field at the top of the navigation window is set to
“Stage 4”.
27. Select the “Concrete upstand” property in the Structure Properties navigation
window to open the data form. Set the Section Reference Axis Relative to: field
to “origin” and then window round the two edge longitudinal beams for both
spans (one edge at a time) to overwrite the edge properties for these
members.
28. Close the data form with ✓ OK and check the assignment with the 3D
Elements View. Note that you can view any construction stage whilst in the 3D
Element View by selecting the appropriate stage at the top of the navigation
window.
39. Click on the File | Save As menu item and save your model as “My EU
Example 9_3 Construction Stages.sst”.
Defining basic loads

We will now apply some basic loads to our model, starting with dead loads for
steel.
Please note that it is not important to have the correct construction

Stage selected at the top of the navigation window as the loads are
assigned to the correct stage in a later operation
40. Open the Structure Loads group on the Navigation Pane then click on the
toolbar button to select Beam Member Load | Beam Element Load from the
drop down list, which will open the Define Beam Loading form. In the first row
of the table set Load Type to “F Uniform”, Direction to “Global Z”, Load Value to
“Volume” and Load W1 to “-77kN/m3”. Change the Name to “Steel Girder Dead
Load”.
41. On the graphics window, click on the filter drop down menu and select
“Longitudinal Beams”. Draw a box around the internal longitudinal beams to
assign the loads. Click on ✓ OK to close the form.
9-21
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
We will now apply the dead loads for the concrete slab, including the
additional load due to the reinforcement.
42. Click on the toolbar button and select Beam Member Load | Beam
Element Load from the drop down list to open the Define Beam Loading form.
In the first row of the table set Load Type to “F Uniform”, Direction to “Global
Z”, Load Value to “Length” and Load W1 to “-23.1kN/m”. Change the Name to
“Span 1 Concrete Slab” and select the 4 inner beams in the left span. Click on
✓ OK to close the form.
43. Repeat the step above for the concrete slab in span 2 (ie in a different load
case).
The next step is to assign dead loads for the concrete edge upstands to
the model.
44. Click on the toolbar button and select Beam Member Load| Beam
Z”, Load Value to “Volume” and Load W1 to “-25kN/m3”. Draw a box around the
9-22
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
full length of the edge beams. Change Name to “Concrete Upstand Dead
Load” and click on ✓ OK to close the Define Beam Loading form.
Three SDL cases can now be created using bridge deck patch loads.
45. Click on the toolbar button and select Bridge Deck Patch Load from the
drop down list to open the Define Bridge Deck Patch Loading form.
46. On the graphics window, move the mouse pointer to the Objects side menu
and deselect “Design / Setting Out Lines”, “Construction Lines” and “Beam
Elements”. The graphics now shows the carriageway and span end lines only
which makes it easier to select the correct lines. Click on the bottom edge of
the main carriageway, the right hand span end line, the top edge of the
carriageway and the left hand span end line. This will apply a patch to the
carriageway. Set Load per unit area to “4.63kN/m2” and change Name to “SDL
Surfacing”. Click ✓ OK to close the form.
47. Right mouse click in the navigation window to copy the last patch load which
again opens the Define Bridge Deck Patch Loading form.
9-23
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
48. Click on the bottom edge of the bottom footway, the right hand span end line,
the top edge of the bottom footway and the left hand span end line. This will
apply a patch to the south footway. Set Load per unit area to “4.8kN/m2”,
change Name to “SDL Footway 1” then click ✓ OK to close the form.
49. Repeat the process for the north footway using the name “SDL Footway 2”.
50. We will now define a SDL barrier load.Click on the toolbar button and select
Beam Member Load | Beam Element Load from the drop down list to open
the Define Beam Loading form and then use the orange Object side menu in
the graphics window to turn on the display of beam members.
51. In the first row of the table set Load Type to “F Uniform”, Direction to “Global
Z”, Load Value to “Length” and Load W1 to “-2kN/m”.
52. On the graphics window, click on the filter drop down menu and select
“Longitudinal Beams”. Draw boxes around the edge longitudinal beams to
assign the loads.
53. Change Name to “SDL Barriers” and click on ✓ OK to close the Define Beam
Loading form.
9-24
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
49. The next step is to define the temporary loads due to construction and the
water contained in the wet concrete of the slabs. Click on the toolbar button
and select Beam Member Load | Beam Element Load from the drop down list
to open the Define Beam Loading form. In the first row of the table set Load
Type to “F Uniform”, Direction to “Global Z”, Load Value to “Length” and Load
W1 to “-4.6kN/m”. Draw a box around the 4 inner beams of the left hand span
to assign the loads. Change Name to “Construction Loads Span 1” and click
on ✓ OK to close the Define Beam Loading form.
50. Now define the construction loads for Span 2 in a similar way.
It is also required to add a temporary load to represent the water in the wet
concrete at the edge upstand.
51. Click on the toolbar button and select Beam Member Load | Beam
Z”, Load Value to “Volume” and Load W1 to “-1kN/m3”. Draw a box around the
full length of the edge beams.
Change Name to “Concrete Upstand Temp Water” and click on ✓ OK to close

the Define Beam Loading form
Construction Stage Loading

The next step is to define the construction stage loading. This defines which
loads are present at each construction stage.
52. Click on Open Construction Stage Loading... task near bottom of the Structure
Loads Navigation Pane to open the Define Construction Stage Loading form. In
this form, click on the Stage drop down on the form and select “Stage 1:
Construction”. In the Construction Stages table at the left hand side of the form
9-25
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
click on the Status drop down to select “Add Load” for loadcases L1, L2 and
L9.
Click on the Stage drop down on the form and select “Stage 2: Construction”.
Click on the Status drop down to select “Remove Load” for loadcase L9 and
“Add Load” for loadcases L3 and L10.
Click on the Status drop down to select “Remove Load” for loadcase L10 and
“Add Load” for loadcase L4 and L11.
9-26
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Click on the Status drop down to select “No Change” for loadcase L1, L2, L3,
L4, L9 and L10. Select “Remove Load” for loadcase L11.
The Show Overview button can be clicked on to show an overview of the

construction stage loading. There is a scroll bar at the bottom of the form which
can be used to check at what construction stage each load is applied or
removed. Click on the Hide Overview button when you have checked that the
construction stage loading has been defined correctly. Click on ✓ OK to close
the form.
53. In the main menu select File | Save As... to save your model as “My EU
Example 9_3 Basic Loads.sst”.
Load Compilations
The next step is to create dead load compilations for ULS.
54. In the Structure Compilations navigation window toolbar click on the button
and select “Dead Loads at Stage 1”. Ensure that the Limit State is set to “ULS
STR/GEO” and click on the Find and Add to Table button to input the three
dead loads at stage 1. In the first row of the table change the value of  to “1.2”.
Change Name to “DL at Stage 1 ULS”. Click on ✓ OK to close the Compile
Loading Patterns form.
9-27
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
55. Click on the button and select “Dead Loads at Stage 2”. Ensure that the
Limit State is set to “ULS STR/GEO” and click on the Find and Add to Table
button to input the three dead loads at stage 2. Change Name to “DL at Stage
2 ULS”. Click on ✓ OK to close the form.
56. This can be repeated for “Dead Loads at Stage 3” using an appropriate Name.
57. This can also be repeated for “Dead Loads at Stage 4” except that in the first,
second, third and fourth rows of the table change the  value to “1.2”, as these
are SDL loads, and use an appropriate Name.
The next step is to create dead load compilations for SLS.
58. In the navigation window select “DL at stage 1 ULS” and right mouse click to
select “Copy” to create a copy of the compilation. Click on the Limit State drop
down and select “SLS Characteristic”. Click on “Yes” on the Confirm form to
change the values of the  factor to the correct values of “1.0”. Change Name
to “DL at Stage 1 SLS”. Click on ✓ OK to close the form.
9-28
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
59. Now define the serviceability compilations for construction stages 2, 3 and 4 in
a similar way.
Example 9_3 Compilations.sst”.
Analysis and Exporting Results

61. In the main menu select Calculate | Analyse Structure.... The program will
open a form showing the progress of the analysis. Once the analysis has
completed, click on the ✓ Done button.
9-29
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
49. In the main menu select Calculate | Transfer Results... to open the Transfer
Results form.
50. Multiple “transfer sets” can be created so one set will created for span 1 loads
and another for span 2 loads. The current set will be for span 1 so set the
Name to be “Inner Beam Span 1”.
51. In the graphics window select the Design Beam just below the centre of the
span 1 which will then be highlighted in red.
It is worth noting that a construction stage at which the selected Design

Beam is active has to be selected at the top of the Navigation Pane in
order for selection of that Design Beam to be possible.
52. The Design beam and associated structure property will be listed in the
Transfer Results form. Click on the “+” button 8 times at the bottom of the table
to add 8 blank rows of data, 4 for ULS and 4 for SLS
53. Fill in the data form as shown below. It should be noted that for the span 1
beam, both analysis stages 2 and 3 are associated with Design Beam
constructions stage 2 because for this stage the beam is fully composite, so
they will be added together in the same table.
9-30
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
54. A second “Transfer Set” can now be created by clicking on the “+” button in the
right top corner of the form. This should be given a Name of “Inner Beam Span
2”. The table can be populated with exactly the same data as the Span 1 set,
by clicking on the Copy Transfer Details From button and selecting the Span 1
case.
55. In the graphics window select the same beam in the second span and then
make the changes to the table as shown below. This is because for Span 2
beams both analysis stages 1 and 2 occur while the Design Beam is not
composite
56. When the table is as shown above, click on the Transfer Results button and
select “Transfer All Sets”. A Transfer Report form should indicate that the
transfer was successful and this can be closed. Close the Transfer Results
form with the ✓ OK button before using the Design Beam navigation window to
inspect the transferred results in the Beam Loads tables.
57. Save the results in a .sld file called “My EU Example 9_3 DL and SDL Span
1.sld”. Click on the ✓ OK button to close the Define Composite Beam Loads
form.
Summary
In this example we defined a 2 span grillage consisting of two meshes and then
assigned section properties to it using beam and section files created earlier in this
example. Construction stages were defined. We then applied some basic dead and
superimposed dead loads to the structure. Load compilations were then defined. The
structure was analysed and the results exported to a .sld file. For a structure such as
this, where construction stages have been defined, the recommended working
procedure would be to follow the steps above and then re-open the file “My EU
Example 9_3 Section properties.sst” and use the automated load optimisation to
generate live loads for the carriageway on the structure. The results from this .sst file
would be exported to a second .sld file. In addition, a line beam module file would be
9-31
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
defined and used to analyse the effects of temperature and shrinkage. Refer to
Example 8.1 in this example manual for information on the line beam module.
Note that the differential temperature parameters would have to be set in the beam
module file prior to it being assigned in the line beam module. The line beam module
would be analysed and the results exported to a third .sld file. The three .sld files
would then be imported into the composite beam file so that design checks could be
performed. See Example 5.1 of this example manual for advice on composite beam
design using Autodesk Structural Bridge Design.
9-32
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
9.4. Non-Linear Analysis – Flat Slab Bridge Deck

Subjects Covered:
Grillage model; Carriageway Definition; Setting Out Lines; Construction Lines; Slab
Properties; Lift Off Supports; Basic Loads; Dead Load Compilations; Live Load
Optimisation; Non-Linear Analysis; Results
Outline
In this example we are going to model a 2 span concrete flat slab structure with a
constant thickness of 600mm. It is to be modelled as a grillage and because the skew
of the deck is 45 degrees (ie. greater than 15 to 20 degrees), an orthogonal mesh will
be defined. The deck will have 7 discrete bearings at each end of each span. The
bridge will have lift-off supports. The left hand span will be 11 metres and the right
hand span will be 20 metres.
Dead and superimposed dead loads will be applied manually. We will then use the
automated load optimisation to create live loads for the model. After performing a
linear analysis of the load cases, we will examine those load compilations for which
non-linear effects are considered to be significant. The Non-Linear Analysis Control
form will then be used to add the concurrent dead and superimposed dead load
compilations to the relevant live load compilations. We will then run a non-linear
analysis and look at some results.
9-33
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Procedure
Creating the structure layout

1. Start the program and then create a new project using the menu File | New |
Create from Template... and select “EU Project”. Set the correct analysis type
using the main menu Data | Structure Type | Refined Analysis.
2. From the main menu select File | Titles and set Project Title to “2 Span Flat
Slab Bridge Deck – Lift Off Supports” with a sub-title of “Example 9.4” and a
Job Number “9.4”. Add your initials in the Calculations by: field and click ✓ OK
to close the form.
3. The next step is to define the alignment of the structure. Click on the
toolbar button at the top of the Structure Definition Navigation Pane and select
“Design Line” from the drop down list. This will open the Define Design Line
form. Click on the green plus button at the bottom left of the form to add a new
segment to the design line. On the Define Line Segment form select the “Line”
option then click on the Next > button twice. Enter (0,0) for the coordinates of
point 1 and (42,0) for the coordinates of point 2. Click on the Next > button and
then click ✓ OK to define the design line. Click ✓ OK to close the Define
Design Line form.
4. The next step is to define the carriageway that will run over the structure. Click
on the toolbar button and select “Carriageway” from the drop down menu to
open the Define Carriageway form. Click on the Design Line field and select
“DL1: Design Line” from the drop down list. Set Carriageway Type to “Single”
and enter the following coordinates in the Offset A/B fields:
(-5.5, -4.5), (-4.5, 4.5), (4.5, 5.5).
The number of notional lanes will automatically update. The notional lanes are
shown in the graphics window with the traffic flow direction indicated by an
arrow. Click on each of the arrows until they are shown as double-headed.
This shows that traffic can flow in either direction along each lane. Click on the
✓ OK button to close the Define Carriageway form.
9-34
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
5. Add a sub-model to the structure by clicking on the button and selecting

“2D Sub Model (GCS, Z=0)” from the drop down menu. This creates a new
sub-model object within the Navigation Pane.
6. The next task is to describe the edges of the structure and lines along each
abutment and pier using setting out objects and construction lines.
Click on the 2D Sub Model as shown above and click on the button again.
The menu list has changed to list objects that can be added to a sub-model.
Select “Setting Out Objects” to open the Define Setting Out Object form. Click
on the small “+” button at the bottom of the form to open the Define Line
Segment form. Set the Type to “Line” then click on the Next > button. Select
the “start point, angle and length” radio button, then click Next >. Enter (0, -5.5)
for the co-ordinates of the point, “45” for the angle and “16” for the length. Click
Next > then ✓ OK to close the Define Line Segment form. Click ✓ OK again to
close the Define Setting Out Object form.
7. Click on the button again and select “Construction Lines” to open the
Define Construction Lines form. On the left hand side of the form there is a list
of line types. Click on Offset parallel to DL/SOL to add a new row to the table.
Click in the DL/SOL Ref column and select “DL1: Design Line” from the drop
down list. Give the line an offset of “5.5m” and press “Enter” on the keyboard.
Click on Offset parallel to DL/SOL again to add a new row to the table. Click in
the DL/SOL Ref column and select “DL1: Design Line” from the drop down list
and give it an offset of “-5.5m”.
8. Click on Offset E/W of DL/SOL then click in the DL/SOL Ref column and select
“SO1: Setting Out Object” from the drop down list. Give it an offset of “11m”.
Repeat this process to add a line at “31m”. Click on the ✓ OK button to close
9-35
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
the Define Construction Lines form. The graphics window will now show an
outline of the structure as shown below.
9. In the main menu select File | Save as... to save your project file as “My EU
Example 9_4 Layout.sst”.
Defining the mesh and supports

To define the grillage mesh and supports the first step is to define the locations
of the span ends.
10. Click on Structure at the top of the Navigation Pane then click on the
button. Select “Span End Lines” from the drop down menu. This will open the
Define Span End Lines form.
11. Click on the bottom left and top left corners of the left-hand abutment on the
graphics window. This will draw a heavy black span end line. Repeat this to
locate the pier and second abutment. The span end lines will be shown in the
table as above and on the graphics as below:
12. Click on ✓ OK to close the Define Span End Lines form.
9-36
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
The next step is to define the two meshes which make up the grillage.
13. Select the 2D sub-model in the Navigation Pane and then click on the
button to select “Mesh” from the drop down menu. This will open the Define
Mesh form. Set Name to “Span 1” and set Mesh Type to “Orthogonal to span”.
Set Longitudinal to “7” and Transverse to “2” and then click on the four edges
of the left hand span, starting with the bottom edge. (You may need to press
“Enter” on the keyboard in order for the numerical data to be input properly
before clicking in the graphics window). Click ✓ OK to close the Define Mesh
form.
14. Select the 2D sub-model in the Navigation Pane again and click on the
button to select “Mesh” which will open the Define Mesh form. Select the four
edges of the right hand span, starting with the bottom edge then click on the
Copy Mesh Details From button and select “M1: Span 1 (“2D Model A”) from
the drop down list. Set Transverse to “6” and change Name to “Span 2” before
clicking ✓ OK to close the Define Mesh form.
There is no physical diaphragm at the abutments or at the pier so we

could delete the members that have been created along the span end
lines. However, patch loads and vehicle loads rely on the members
along the abutments to define the deck area. So, we will just delete the
row of members along the middle span end line and apply just nominal
properties to the two abutment rows.
15. To delete these unwanted members click on Sub Model Members in the
Navigation window to open the Define Sub Model Members form. Select each
of the unwanted members in the graphics window (holding down the <Ctrl> key
to make a multiple selection) then use either the <Delete> key or the “-“ button
at the bottom of the table.
The graphics will now show a plot of the grillage as shown below (if all but the
member lines are switched off using the side Objects menu):
The next task will define which nodes in the structure are supported.
16. Click on Structure at the top of the navigation tree and then click on the
button to select “Supported Nodes” from the drop down menu. This will open
the Define Supported Nodes form.
9-37
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
17. Click on the Select drop down menu in the graphics window and set it to “Along
Span End Lines”, then draw a box around the entire structure.
18. Click on the Support Type drop down menu on the form and set it to “Lift Off”.
In the first row of the support table, change the support conditions so that only
the DZ direction is fixed. Change Group Type to “Variable” then click on the
centre node on the left abutment (node 22). Change the support conditions for
this node so that it is also fixed in DX and DY.
19. Click on the centre node on the right abutment (node 93) and change the
support conditions so it is also fixed in the DY direction. Click on ✓ OK to close
the form.
Assigning section properties

Section properties can now be assigned to the grillage.
20. In the Structure Properties Navigation window toolbar click on the button
and select “Continuous Slab”. In the Structure Properties: Continuous Slab
form change the depth to “600” and ensure Material Property is set to the
grade C32/40 concrete property. Draw a box around the entire structure to
assign this property to all members and then close the form with ✓ OK.
21. Click on the button again and select “Specify Values” from the drop down
menu which will open the Structure Properties: Specify Values form. Change
Description to “Nominal Diaphragm” and set Cross Section Area to “100”, both
Iyy and Izz to “833” and the Torsion Constant to “100”. Again, leave the other
properties at their default values and select the diaphragm members at both
the leftmost and rightmost ends. Click “Yes to all” on the Confirm form to
overwrite these 12 members. Click on ✓ OK to close the form.
9-38
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac

Some basic loads can now be applied to the model, starting with dead loads for
concrete.
22. In the Structure Loads Navigation window click on the button and select
“Beam Member Load | Beam Element Load” from the drop down list to open
the Define Beam Loading form.
23. In the first row of the table set Load Type to “F Uniform”, Direction to “Global
Z”, Load Value to “Volume” and Load W1 to “-25kN/m3”. On the graphics
window, click on the filter drop down menu to select “Longitudinal Beams” and
then draw a box around the entire structure.
Change Name to “Concrete Dead Load” and click on ✓ OK to close the Define
Beam Loading form. Use the filter drop down menu and select “Select All”.
9-39
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
The next task is to create three SDL cases using bridge deck patch loads.
24. Click on the toolbar button and select “Bridge Deck Patch Load” from the
drop down list to open the Define Bridge Deck Patch Loading form. Set Load
per unit area to “4kN/m2” and press <Enter> on the keyboard.
25. On the graphics window, move the mouse pointer over the Objects tab and
select “Carriageway” and “Span End Lines” to display the carriageway and
span end lines. Click on the bottom edge of the main carriageway, the right
hand span end line, the top edge of the carriageway and the left hand span
end line. (See the screen shot below for details of the carriageway edge
locations). This will apply a patch to the carriageway. Change Name to “SDL
Carriageway”. Click ✓ OK to close the form.
26. Click on the button and select “Bridge Deck Patch Load” from the drop
down list to open the Define Bridge Deck Patch Loading form. Set Load per
unit area to “5kN/m2”.
27. Click on the bottom edge of the bottom verge, the right hand span end line, the
top edge of the bottom verge and the left hand span end line. This will apply a
patch to the bottom verge. Change Name to “SDL Bottom Verge” then click ✓
28. Repeat the process for the top verge, changing the Name to “SDL Top Verge”.
On the graphics window, move the mouse pointer over the Objects side menu
and click on the “Select All” button before using ✓ OK to close the form.
9-40
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
The next step is to create dead load compilations for ULS and SLS.
29. In the Structure Compilations navigation window toolbar, click on the

button and select “Dead Loads at Stage 1”. Set the Limit State field to “ULS
STR/GEO”. Click on the “+” button near the bottom of the form to add a row to
the table. In the first row of the compilation table use the drop down list to
select the “Concrete Dead Load” case. Ensure the gamma value is set to 1.35
and change the Name: to “DL ULS”. Close the form with the ✓ OK button.
30. Repeat the previous step above but this time set the Limit State: field to “SLS
Characteristic” (a prompt to confirm changing the load factors will appear) and
the Name: to “DL SLS”.
31. Click on the button again to add a “Superimposed Dead Loads”

compilation. Set the Limit State field to “ULS STR/GEO”. Click 3 times on the
“+” button near the bottom of the form to add 3 rows to the table. In the
compilation table use the drop down list to select the three SDL load cases.
The gamma for each load should be set to “1.2”. Change the Name: to “SDL
ULS”. Close the form with the ✓ OK button.
and changing the Limit State: field to “SLS Characteristic”. A confirmation form
appears which will change the factors to “1”. Close the form with the ✓ OK
button.
Live Load Optimisation

The next task is to create some influence surfaces and generate live load patterns
using the load optimisation in the program. The first step is to define the influence
surfaces that are required.
33. In the main menu select Data | Influence Surface... to open the Influence
Surface Generation form. Set Pick Mode to “Joint” then click on the joints at
the top left corner of span 1 and the bottom left corner of span 1 in the graphics
window (joints 1 and 43 respectively). Set the Scope field to “Negative” in the
top two rows of the table. This will define influence surfaces for negative
support reactions at these two joints.
9-41
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
34. Ensure that the Generate by field is set to “Reciprocal” and click on the 
Analyse... button. A progress box will open. Click on the ✓ Done button when
the analysis has completed.
The next task is to compile the loading patterns for the influence surfaces that
have just been generated.
35. Set Type to “Road Traffic” then click on the Run Optimisation... button to open
the Road Traffic Load Optimisation form. Use the Group & Limit States tick
boxes to create loads for gr1a and gr5 combined, ULS-STR/GEO (B) and SLS
Characteristic. Untick the tick boxes for ULS-EQU limit state loads. Also use
the tick box to apply the SV80 Special Vehicle.
36. Once you have set the options, click on the  Compile Loading Patterns button
to carry out the load optimisation. The form will change to show the status of
the load optimisation. When it is complete it will show a summary of the loads
generated and the graphics window will show the loading pattern for the
selected influence surface.
9-42
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
37. Click ✓ OK on the Road Traffic Load Optimisation form and click ✓ OK on the
Influence Surface Generation form to close them both.
The next task is to solve all the load cases.
38. In the main menu selects Calculate | Analyse Structure.... The Activate
Loading Sets form will open. Make sure all tick boxes on the form are selected
and click ✓ OK.Click on “Yes to All” on the Confirm form that opens.
The program will open a form showing the progress of the analysis. Once the
analysis has completed, this form will show a line of text stating that “Non-linear
9-43
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
effects are significant in 12 compilations”. This condition is checked as there

are lift off supports applied to the structure and results will not be available for
12 compilations until a non-linear analysis has been performed. Click on the ✓
Done button to close the form.
Results Processing
The relevant dead and superimposed dead load compilation effects will be added
to those compilations that are affected by the non-linearity. This is necessary
because, by their nature, the results of compilations in which non-linear results are
significant cannot be simply added together after the linear analysis has been
performed. Instead the applied loads in those compilations must be added
together and then analysed together in a non linear method. When the non-linear
analysis has been run some of the results can then be examined.
39. In the main menu select Calculate | Non-linear analysis... where the Non-
Linear Analysis Control form will open. A red circle next to a compilation
denotes a compilation in which non-linear effects are significant.
40. Click on the Include Controller button to open the Include Controller sub-form.
Tick the tickboxes for compilations C5, C6, C9 and C10. These are ultimate
limit state compilations so the ultimate limit state compilations C1 and C3 for
dead and superimposed dead load are selected using the tickboxes in the
Dead Load Compilations dropdown. Click on the Apply to All Selected
Compilations button.
41. Click on the Clear Selection button and tick the tickboxes for compilations C7,
C8, C11 and C12. These are serviceability limit state compilations so the
serviceability limit state compilations C2 and C4 for dead and superimposed
dead load are selected using the tickboxes in the Dead Load Compilations
dropdown. Click on the Apply to All Selected Compilations button. Click ✓ OK
to close the sub-form.
9-44
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Note that live load compilations C5 to C10 continue to be denoted by a

red circle indicating that they are still non-linear, despite the addition of
the dead loads. However, compilations C11 and C12 are now denoted
by a green circle indicating that they are now linear as the dead loads
have been added. This indicates that the dead loads have counteracted
the lift-off effects caused by the live loads in compilations C11 and C12.
42. Click on the  Analyse button on the Non-Linear Analysis Control form to run
the non-linear analysis. Click on the ✓ Done buttons on both forms to close
both forms.
We will now look at the results produced for the analysis run in the previous
step.
43. Use the main menu File | Results... to open the Results Viewer. Click on the
Result Type drop down and select “Compilation” from the list of options. In the
Name drop down select compilation C5, set Result For to “Joint” and Effect to
“Support Reactions”. Ensure that the Results For drop down menu on the
graphics toolbar is set to Fz. Note that the names of the dead and
superimposed dead load compilations which were defined as acting
concurrently with this live load compilation on the Non-Linear Analysis Control
form are displayed in the Dead Load Compilations field.
The results in the table show that the support reactions at 4 of the nodes are
effectively zero. This indicates that there is lift-off of supports at 4 bearings
when this live compilation is considered together with the concurrent dead and
superimposed dead compilations.
9-45
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
44. Changing the Effect: to “Displacements and Rotations”, filtering to just the west
diaphragm members and viewing in a west elevation clearly shows the lift off at
these nodes with a maximum of 10.7mm.
45. Now click on the Name drop down and select compilation C9. The results in the
table show that the support reactions at all of the bearings are positive, non-
9-46
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
zero values. This indicates that there is no lift-off of supports when this live
compilation is considered together with the concurrent dead and superimposed
dead load compilations. Close the Results Viewer.
46. In the main menu select File | Save As... to save the model as “My EU
Example 9_4.sst” and close the program.
Summary
In this example we defined a 2 span grillage consisting of two meshes, removed the
members for the diaphragm over the pier and then assigned section properties to the
remaining members. We then applied some basic loads to the structure and used the
automated load optimisation to generate specific live loads in order to investigate lift-
off of supports. After running a linear analysis of the structure we found that non-linear
effects were significant in several load combinations. The Non-Linear Analysis Control
form was then used to add the concurrent dead and superimposed dead load
compilations to the relevant live load compilations before running a non-linear
analysis. We then looked at some of the results.
9-47
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
9-48
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
9.5. Offset Beams – For Finite Element Decks

Subjects Covered:
Carriageway Definition; Setting Out Lines; Construction Lines; Composite Beam
Structures; FE deck with Offset Beams; Member Eccentricities; Dead Load
Compilations; Transfer Results to Beam Design
Outline
This example demonstrates how to model a single span bridge deck using the
composite action of shell finite elements and offset beam members. The bridge deck
has a span of 21m and is constructed with four Y7 prestress beams acting
compositely with a concrete slab. The deck is modelled using a finite element slab
with imported prestress beams which are assigned as ‘Offset Beams’. This process
defines the prestress beam as a beam element with an automatically defined vertical
offset relative to the deck. Upstands are added as edge beam members with an
appropriate vertical offset.
The beam data for the two inner beams will be imported directly from design beam
files created in example 4.3. The two outer edge beams will be created by copying an
inner beam and adding an edge section with a width and depth of 200mm. The slab
has a thickness of 200mm and the deck is supported on 4 discrete bearings at each
end of the span.
9-49
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Dead and superimposed dead loads will be applied manually. After performing an
analysis of the load cases, some of the results will be transferred to one of the design
beams.
Procedure
Define the Design Beams and upstand Design Section

using the main menu Data | Structure Type | Refined Analysis.
2. From the main menu select File | Titles and set Project Title to “Composite FE
Slab and offset Beams” with a sub-title of “Example 9.5” and a Job Number
“9.5”. Add your initials in the Calculations by: field and click ✓ OK to close the
form.
3. In the Design Beams navigation window click on the toolbar button to add
an “Existing Design Beam” called “EU Example 4_3.sam”. Embed this beam
and rename it to “Inner Beam”.
4. Copy “Inner Beam” as a second design beam and rename this to “Outer
Beam”. Select Beam Definition for this beam in the navigation window and
then use the Define dropdown to open the Section Definition form
5. Click on the Component column in the third row of the table and select “In situ
– regular”. This will open the Define Precast Beam Component form. The
Shape Reference will be set to “Rectangle” already so enter “200mm” in both
the Width and Depth fields and click ✓ OK.
6. Change the Y offset to “-900” and Z offset to “1470” to put the edge section in
the correct location. Click ✓ OK to close both forms.
9-50
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
7. In the Design Sections navigation window click on the toolbar button to add
an “Existing Design Section...” called “Upstand.sam”. Embed this section and
rename it to “Upstand”.
Creating the structure layout

8. In the Structure Definition navigation window click on the button and select
“Design Line” from the list. This will open the Define Design Line form. Click
on the green plus button at the bottom left of the form to add a new segment to
the design line.
9. On the Define Line Segment form select the “Line” option then click on the
Next > button twice. Enter (0,0) for the coordinates of point 1 and (21,0) for the
coordinates of point 2. Click on the Next > button and then click ✓ OK to
define the design line. Click ✓ OK to close the Define Design Line form.
10. Click on the button and select “Carriageway” from the drop down list to
open the Define Carriageway form. Click on the Design Line field and select
“DL1: Design Line” from the drop down list. Set Carriageway Type to “Single”
and enter the following coordinates in the Offset A/B fields:
(-3.8, -3), (-3, 3), (3, 3.8).
The number of notional lanes will automatically update. The notional lanes are
shown in the graphics window with the traffic flow direction indicated by an
arrow.
11. Click on each of the arrows until they are shown as double-headed. This
shows that traffic can flow in either direction along each lane. Click on the ✓
OK button to close the Define Carriageway form.
9-51
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
A new sub-model is added to the structure.
12. Click on the toolbar button and select “2D Sub Model (GCS, Z=0)” from the
drop down menu. This creates a new sub-model in the Structure navigation
tree.
Next we will describe the edges of the structure and lines along each abutment
and pier using setting out objects and construction lines.
13. Select the sub-model as shown above and click on the button. The menu
list has changed to list objects that can be added to a sub-model. Select
“Setting Out Objects” to open the Define Setting Out Object form. Click on the
Insert Line Segment button at the bottom left of the form (this is the small “+”
button). Set the Type to “Line” then click on the Next > button twice. Enter (0, -
4) for the co-ordinates of point 1 and (0, 4) for point 2. Click Next > then ✓ OK
to close the Define Line Segment form. Click ✓ OK again to close the Define
Setting Out Object form.
Define Construction Lines form. On the left hand side of the form there is a list
of line types. Click on Offset parallel to DL/SOL to add a new row to the table.
Click in the DL/SOL Ref column and select “DL1: Design Line” from the drop
down list. Give the line an offset of 4m and press “Enter” on the keyboard.
Click on Offset parallel to DL/SOL again to add a new row to the table. Click in
the DL/SOL Ref column and select “DL1: Design Line” from the drop down list
and give it an offset of -4m.
15. Click on Offset parallel to DL/SOL again to add a third row to the table then
click in the DL/SOL Ref column and select “SO1: Setting Out Object” from the
drop down list. Give it an offset of 21m. Click on the ✓ OK button to close the
Define Construction Lines form. The graphics window will now show an outline
of the structure as shown below:
9-52
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Defining the mesh and supports

The next step is to define the geometry and layout of the mesh
16. Click on the button again and select “Mesh” from the drop down list. This
will open the Define Mesh form. Set Member Type to “Finite Elements” and
Mesh Type to “Orthogonal to span”. Set Longitudinal to “14” and Transverse to
“8” and then click on the four edges of the deck, starting with the bottom edge.
(You may need to press “Enter” on the keyboard in order for the numerical data
to be input properly before clicking in the graphics window). Change the “equal
size” option for the Longitudinal elements to “set size”. In the Set Longitudinal
Size form that should now be visible set the spacing factor for the two end
elements to “0.5” and click ✓ OK to close the sub-form. Click ✓ OK to close the
Define Mesh form.
The graphics will now show a plot of the mesh as shown below:
It is now necessary to define the locations of the span ends.
17. Click on Structure in the navigation window then click on the button to
select “Span End Lines” from the drop down list. This will open the Define
Span End Lines form.
9-53
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
18. Click on the bottom left and top left corners of the left-hand abutment on the
graphics window. This will draw a heavy black span end line. Repeat this to
locate the second abutment. The span end lines will be shown in the table as
above and on the graphics as below:
19. Click on ✓ OK to close the Define Span End Lines form.
The next step will be to define the location and type of the supported nodes.
20. Click on the Structure node at the top of the navigation window and click on the
button to select “Supported Nodes” from the drop down list. This will open
the Define Supported Nodes form.
21. In the graphics window select the 8 nodes shown below. In the first row of the
support table, change the support conditions so that only the DZ direction is
fixed. Change Group Type to “Variable” then click on the node just above
centre of the left abutment (node 46). Change the support conditions for this
node so that it is also fixed in DX and DY. Click on the node just above the
centre of the right abutment (node 60) and change the support conditions so it
is also fixed in the DY direction. Click on ✓ OK to close the form.
Although the offset beams representing the main girders will be automatically
generated when we assign the offset beams to the structure, the upstand at the
edges will not be automatically created. It is therefore necessary to manually
add beam members along the edges of the slab to represent the upstand.
22. This is done by clicking on Sub Model Members in the navigation window to
open the Define Sub Model Members form, where additional members can be
created.
9-54
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
23. In the graphics window click on the toolbar button to draw a single member.
Click on the bottom left corner node of the mesh and then again on the bottom
right node to draw one member. Repeat this on the top edge of the mesh.
Click ✓ OK on any information form that may appear. These members can
then be split into 14 beam element segments by using the Split Beam
Element... task in the Define Sub Model Members form.
24. In the Split Beam Elements form select the at nodes along element option, click
on the bottom edge beam and then click on the Apply button. Dismiss the
information window and repeat for the beam on the top edge of the mesh. Click
✓ OK to close the both the open forms.
Assigning the offset beam and general section properties

25. Click on Structure in the navigation window and then click on the button to
select “Offset Beam” from the drop down list. This will open the Define Offset
Beam form.
26. Set Beam Reference: to “Inner Beam” and Name to “Beam 2” then click on the
row of joints just above the centre of the deck. It will be highlighted in red and
an Information form will appear. Click OK on the Information form and then
click on the Add Additional Offset Beam... button. For this new offset beam set
Beam Reference: to “Inner Beam” and Name to “Beam 3” then click on the row
of joints just below the centre of the deck where It will then be highlighted in
red.
27. Again click on the Add Additional Offset Beam... button to create a third offset
beam. In this case use the Beam Reference dropdown to select “Outer Beam”,
change the Name to “Beam 1” and then click on the row of joints one in from
9-55
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
the top edge of the deck. It offset beam will be highlighted in red as shown
below.
28. Once more click on the Add Additional Offset Beam... button to define a fourth
offset beam. Set the Beam Reference dropdown to “Outer Beam”, change the
Name to “Beam 4” and then click on the row of joints one in from the bottom
edge of the deck. Click ✓ OK to close the form.
In the Structure Properties navigation window it can be seen that five structure
properties have been automatically created and assigned, four for the precast
girders and one Finite Element property for the slab. It is therefore necessary to
assign a structure property for the upstand using the design section created
earlier.
29. In the Structure Properties navigation window click on the button to select
Design Section. There is only one Design Section in the projects, which is
automatically reference, so change the Section Reference Axis Relative to:
field to “Origin” and then window round the whole structure. Select “No to All”
in the Confirm form so that only un-assigned members are assigned this
property. Click ✓ OK to close the form.
30. In the main menu select File | 3D Elements View... to open the 3D Elements
viewer.
It can be clearly seen that the lateral offset of the upstand has been set in the
wrong direction but this can easily be rectified by reversing the direction of the
edge longitudinal beam.
9-56
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
31. In the Structure Definition navigation window select Longitudinal Beams to

open the Longitudinal Beams form. The two upstand edges have not yet been
created as Longitudinal beams so first window around the bottom edge and
then the top edge to create them. Selects the bottom edge in the table and
then use the Beam Task Reverse Order to change the direction (as seen by
the arrow). Click ✓ OK to close the form. The 3D elements view will then
show the corrected location of the upstand.
When the offset beams were created the program automatically created “virtual
members” that would represent the stiffness and behaviour, and contain the
results of the complete composite prestressed beam. These virtual members
contain a collection of finite elements and beams that make up the composite
beams together with a reference axis at the centroid of the composite section.
The next step is to modify the virtual members defined for the outer beams so
that they include the upstand edge members.
32. In the main menu select Calculate | Define Virtual Member to open the
Define Virtual Member form, which already contains the four virtual members.
Change to a plan view and make sure the pick mode is set to “Beam Element”.
Select Offset Beam C and draw a box around the top upstand. Repeat the
process for Offset Beam D, adding the bottom upstand and then click ✓ OK to
close the Define Virtual Member form.
33. To check that the structure has been defined correctly use the 3D Elements
view by clicking on the icon in the main toolbar. Click on the icon in the
graphics toolbar to activate the dynamic view function.
9-57
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac

We will now apply some basic concrete dead loads for the prestress beams
and edge upstand sections of our model. (Other examples in this manual, such
as those in chapter 10, give guidance on applying superimposed dead loads
and live load optimisation).
34. In the Structure Loads navigation window click on the button and select
Beam Member Load | Beam Element Load from the drop down list to open
the Define Beam Loading form. In the first row of the table set Load Type to “F
Uniform”, Direction to “Global Z”, Load Value to “Volume” and Load W1 to “-
25kN/m”.
35. Draw a box around the entire structure to assign concrete dead loads to the
prestress beams and edge upstands. (Note that because the deck is a finite
element deck and the load type selected is a beam element load, loads have
only been assigned to the prestress beams and edge upstands. Under different
circumstances the filter tool could be used to ensure that loads are assigned
only to certain members).
36. Change Name to “Concrete Beam Dead Load” and click on ✓ OK to close the
Define Beam Loading form.
Next we will apply some concrete dead loads to the slab.
37. Click on the toolbar button and select Finite Element Load | External
Load. Draw a box around the entire structure. Change the Load Type to
“Force/volume”, Direction to “Global Z”, Load to “-25” and Name to “Concrete
FE Dead Load”. Click ✓ OK to close the form.
9-58
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Before solving these load cases a ULS compilation of the dead loads will be
created.
28. In the Structure Compilations navigation window click on the button and
select “Dead Loads at Stage 1”. Set the Limit State to “ULS STR/GEO” and
then click twice on the “+” button near the bottom of the form to add 2 rows to
the table. In the first row of the table click on the Load Name column and
select “L1: Concrete Beam Dead Load” from the list. In the second row, click in
the Load Name column and select “L2: Concrete FE Dead Load” from the list.
Check that the gamma values are set to 1.35 and change the Name to “DL
ULS”. Click on ✓ OK to close the Compile Loading Patterns form.

Before viewing the results and transferring them to the Design Beam Load
tables it is necessary to solve the load cases.
30. In the main menu select Calculate | Analyse Structure... to solve the load
cases.
31. The program will open a form showing the progress of the analysis. Once the
analysis has completed, click on the ✓ Done button.
32. In the main menu select File | Results to open the Results Viewer. Click on
the Result Type field drop down and select “Compilation”. Click on the Result
For drop down and select “Virtual Member” from the list. The Name field should
show compilation C1. Click on the Results For drop down menu on the
graphics toolbar. You will see tick boxes next to each result type with Fz
9-59
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
already ticked. Tick the My option as well to add the bending moment diagram
to the plot.
Click on the Filter toolbar button to open the Member Selection Filter form.
Click on “De-select all” then set Select by to “Virtual Member”. Add “Offset
Beam D” to the Selected Groups list and click ✓ OK to close the filter form.
Click on the icon to change the viewing direction.
When you have finished viewing the results click on the Member selection filter
drop down and select “Select All” to remove the filter. Select File | Close
Tabular Results to close the Results Viewer.
It is required to transfer results from the analysis to the loading tables of one of
the Design Beams
Results form. In the graphics window select the centre of the virtual beam near
the bottom edge of the deck. Note that “Offset Beam D” is shown in the Virtual
Member field and it is highlighted in red in the graphics view.
9-60
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
34. Change Name: to “DL Outer Beam” and then click on “+” at the bottom of the
table to add a row of data. Click in the Design Load Case column and select “+
Construction stage 1A”. Click in the Type column to select “Compilation” and in
the Analysis Load Case column select “C1: DL ULS”. The ULS Factor will be
automatically set to 1. For this example we will set Method to “(2) Original”.
The Transfer Results form will look like this:
Beam” to transfer the results to the Design Beam load tables. Click ✓ OK to
close the Transfer Results form.
36. In the Design Beam navigation window select SB2: Outer Beam | Beam
Loads | Construction Stage 1a to examine the results just transferred.
37. In the main menu select File | Save as... to save the data file as “My EU
Example 9_5.sst”.
Summary
In this example we defined a single span structure. The slab and beam properties
were derived from the design beams and assigned as ‘Offset Beams’. Using this
method to assign the section properties means that the properties of the slab are
assigned to the FE deck and the properties of the prestress beam are assigned to
9-61
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
beam elements which are offset vertically from the soffit of the deck. We then applied
some basic dead loads to the structure and analysed them to investigate some of the
results. We then transferred the analysis results to a design beam load tables where
the design of the beam could be checked following steps similar to those outlined in
Example 5.2 of this guide.
Note that the design beams were defined in such a way that the widths of the slabs
were suitable for the widths of the finite elements in the deck to which they were
assigned and the spans of the beams were defined such that they matched the span
of the deck.
9-62
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
9.6. Integral FE Bridge Deck with Soil & Hydrostatic Pressure Loads
Subjects Covered:
Refined Analysis; 3D FE Model; Sub Model Planes; Setting Out Objects; Construction
Lines; Meshing; Support Local Axes; Spring Supports; Filtering; Copying Sub Models;
Conforming Sides; Temperature Effects in FE Slabs; Compilations; Hydrostatic Loads;
Soil Pressure Loads; Transfer Results to .sld File
Outline
In this example we are going to model a single span portal FE structure to represent
am integral bridge deck. Two models will be defined as described below for two
different design situations.
Model 1
This first model will be used to ascertain the load effects in the deck when live loads
and positive temperature effects are combined with dead load and superimposed
dead load. It is assumed that the passive resistance of the soil will be mobilised when
the live loads and positive temperature effects cause a net outward deflection at the
tops of the abutments. Hence, in this model the horizontal stiffness of the soil is
modelled by spring supports to estimate the effect of the abutments on the span
moments. Each abutment consists of a row of piles acting compositely with a
reinforced concrete wall. It is assumed that the piles are embedded in rock at the
9-63
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
bottom of the walls and therefore the base of each abutment is fully fixed in all
directions.
The deck will be a flat level concrete slab of 800mm thickness and the abutment walls
will be 600mm thick. The skew of the deck is 30 degrees, however because the deck
is to be modelled as a finite element structure, a skew mesh will be sufficiently
accurate. The abutments will also be modelled as finite element structures and
‘conforming sides’ will be assigned to both sides of the fold where the deck adjoins
the abutments. Defining these ‘conforming sides’ will prevent spurious rotations of the
nodes along the fold when load is applied. The span of the deck will be 15 metres and
height of the abutment walls will be 7 metres.
The deck has been defined as a pre-prepared file in which the deck geometry,
carriageway, dead and superimposed dead loads have already been defined.
After the abutments have been defined, dead loads and temperature loads will be
applied manually. We will then use the automated load optimisation to create live
loads for the model.
After performing an analysis, the results for a virtual member that has been defined in
the deck model will be saved in a .sld file.
The virtual member is made of from two rows of finite elements in the deck (rows 6
and 7 from the south edge) with the axis defined along the centre of the two rows.
9-64
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Model 2
The second model will be used to ascertain the load effects in the deck when negative
temperature effects are combined with dead load and superimposed dead load. In this
model it is assumed that the active soil pressure will be mobilised when the negative
temperature effects cause a net inward deflection at the tops of the abutments.
Hence, in this model the spring supports of ‘Model 1’ are replaced by a uniform
horizontal soil pressure. A hydrostatic load which varies with depth will also be added
to this model to represent the water contained in the soil. The water table will be 2
metres below the level of the deck. In all other respects, this model will be identical to
‘Model 1’.
Other models may have to be defined to ascertain the load effects to be used in the
design of other elements of the bridge.
As with all of the examples in this manual, this example is primarily intended to be a
guide to using the program. It is recommended that users consult current technical
documentation on the analysis and design of integral bridges.
Procedure
Setup & Geometry

1. Start the program and open the pre-prepared data file “EU Example 9_6
Deck.sst”.
2. Set the Project Title to “Deck with Abutments” using the File | Titles main
menu option and put your initials in the Calculations by: field.
3. The first task is to define the abutment at the left hand end of the deck. In the
Structure Definition navigation window click on the toolbar button to select
“2D Sub Model” from the selection list. This will create an entry in the
navigation tree and open the 2D Sub Model Plane form.
4. The plane of the sub model needs to be parallel to the edge of the deck, so
click on the “Define” button to define a new origin and plane for the sub model.
5. Define the origin by clicking on the joint at the top left corner of the deck as
shown below and click on the Next > button.
9-65
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
6. The orientation of the plane needs changing for the new sub-model so click on
the joint at the bottom left corner of the deck and click on the Next > button
twice. Click ✓ OK on both forms.
7. Rename the new sub model by selecting it in the navigation window, and then
a right mouse click will give a Rename option allowing a name “Left Abutment”
to be entered. Click OK to close the sub form.
9-66
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Before creating structural elements in the sub model it is advisable to describe

the edges of the abutment using setting out objects and construction lines.
8. Selects 2D Sub Model: Left Abutment in the Navigation Pane then click on
the toolbar button to select “Setting Out Objects” which will open the Define
Setting Out Object form.
9. Click on the “+” button at the bottom left of the form to add a new segment. Set
the Type to “Line” then click on the Next > button twice. Enter (0, 0) for the co-
ordinates of point 1 and (0, -7) for point 2. Click Next > then ✓ OK to close the
Define Line Segment form.
10. Click ✓ OK again to close the Define Setting Out Object form.
Define Construction Lines form.
12. On the left hand side of the form there is a list of line types. Select Offset
parallel to DL/SOL to add a new row to the table. Set SOL Ref to “SO1:
Setting Out Object” and give the line an offset of -11.547m before pressing
<Enter> on the keyboard.
13. Select Perpendicular to SOL to add a new row to the table. Set SOL Ref to
“SO1: Setting Out Object” and give it an chainage of 7m.
14. Click on the ✓ OK button to close the Define Construction Lines form. The
graphics window will now show an outline of the structure as shown below:
15. To create a mesh for the abutment, select 2D Sub Model: Left Abutment in
the Navigation Pane and then click on the toolbar button to select “Mesh”
from the drop down list, which will open the Define Mesh form.
16. Set Member Type to “Finite Elements” and Mesh Type to “Skew”. Also set
Longitudinal to “11” and Transverse to “8” and then click on the four edges of
the abutment, starting with the bottom edge and working around in an anti-
9-67
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
clockwise direction. (You may need to press <Enter> on the keyboard in order
for the numerical data to be input properly before clicking in the graphics
window).
17. Change the “equal size” option for the Longitudinal elements to “set size”. In
the Set Longitudinal Size form that should now be visible set the spacing factor
for the two end elements to “0.5”. Click ✓ OK to close the sub-form. Repeat
this for the Transverse elements. Change the Name to “Left Abutment mesh”
and click ✓ OK to close the Define Mesh form. Click ✓ OK on the Information
form. The graphics will now show a plot of the mesh as shown below:
Defining supports
Horizontal spring supports on each node in the abutment will be defined based
upon the surface area attributed to each node. There are six different areas so
there will be six different stiffnesses. (Note that in most cases the stiffness of
the soil will increase with depth, however for this example a constant modulus
of sub grade reaction of 51962kN/m3 has been assumed over the height of the
wall). The base of the abutment will be fully fixed. First filter the graphics.
11. Click on the Filter toolbar button to open the Member Selection Filter form.
Click on “De-select all” then set Select by to “Sub Model Group”. Add “Left
Abutment” to the Selected Groups list and click ✓ OK to close the filter form.
12. Select Structure at the top of the navigation tree and then click on the
toolbar button and select “Supported Nodes” from the drop down list. This will
open the Define Supported Nodes form. Click on the Select drop down menu in
the graphics window and set it to “All Joints”, then select the top 2 corner
nodes shown below. In the first row of the support table, change the support
conditions so that the DY direction is set to “Spring” and DX and DZ directions
are free. Set the value in the first row of the Direct Stiffness Y column to “3750”.
9-68
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
The direction of the spring supports will currently be defined relative to the
global axes but is required to redefined them to ensure that the springs act in a
direction normal to the plane of the abutment wall.
13. Click on the icon to change the viewing direction to isometric. Click on the
“+” button next to the Support Constraints about field to open the Define
Support Local Axes sub-form. In the graphics screen, click on the joint at the
top right corner of the abutment then click on the joint at the top left corner of
the abutment. Note that the angle in the Beta field has changed to 60 degrees.
Change Name to “Y Perpendicular to Abutment”. Click ✓ OK to close the sub-
form.
Each different stiffness group could be entered into a different group of

Support, and this would be perfectly acceptable. However, in this
example the use of copying and pasting from a spreadsheet can be
used to add all sprung supports into a single support group.
9-69
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
14. To get the format for the data required, right mouse click anywhere in the
support table in the Define Supported Nodes form and select “Copy Table to
Clipboard”. Open a blank spreadsheet workbook and paste into the first cell
which will provide the data format. The data in the table below could then
easily be added in the same format.
Spring Stiffness Node Numbers

(kN/m)
3750 1 & 144
11250 14, 131, 157, 168, 229 , 240
15000 27, 40, 53, 66, 79, 92, 105, 118, 169, 180, 181, 192, 193,
204, 205, 216, 217, 228
33750 158, 167, 230, 239
45000 159, 160, 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 166, 170, 179, 182,
191, 194, 203, 206, 215, 218, 227, 231, 232, 233, 234,
235, 236, 237, 238
60000 171, 172, 173, 174, 175, 176, 177, 178, 183, 184, 185,
186, 187, 188, 189, 190, 195, 196, 197, 198, 199, 200,
201, 202, 207, 208, 209, 210, 211, 212, 213, 214, 219,
220, 221, 222, 223, 224, 225, 226
15. A spreadsheet containing this data is provided with a name “EU Example 9_6
Supports.xlsx”. Open this spreadsheet, window round the data and copy to the
clipboard.
16. In the Structural Bridge Design Define Supported Nodes form, change the
Group Type to “Variable” and then right mouse click anywhere in the table to
select “Paste from Clipboard”. Change Name to “Abutment Springs” and then
close the form with ✓ OK.
9-70
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
The fixed supports at the base of the abutment can now be defined.
17. In the navigation window toolbar click on the toolbar button and select
“Supported Nodes” from the drop down list. This will create an additional
supports group and open the Define Supported Nodes form. Click on the
Select drop down menu in the graphics window and set it to “All Joints”, then
select the 12 nodes at the bottom of the abutment in the graphics window. In
the first row of the support table change the support conditions so that all six
degrees of freedom are fully fixed (which will apply to all 12 nodes). In the
Support Constraints about: field select the “Y Perpendicular to Abutment” user
defined group. Change Name to “Fixed Base” and click on ✓ OK to close the
form.
Structure Properties
Structure properties can now be assigned to the finite elements of the
abutment.
18. In the Structure Properties Navigation Pane click on the button and select
Finite Element. In the Finite Element Properties form, change the Thickness
to “600”. Box around the whole structure and change the Description to
“600mm thick”. Click ✓ OK to close the form.
Creating the Second Abutment

The first abutment sub-model can be copied to the right hand end of the
structure to define the right hand end abutment. This copy procedure will
include all structure properties and support conditions
19. Click on the drop down and select “Select All” to remove any filter.
20. In the Structure Definition Navigation Pane select the “Left Abutment” sub
model, right mouse click and select “Copy”. In the Copy Sub Model form click
on the “Define” button to define a new origin and plane for the copied sub
model.
21. Click on the joint at the top right corner of the deck to specify the location of the
origin then click on the Next > button.
9-71
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
22. The orientation of the new sub-model plane is the same as the first so click on
the Next > next button twice then ✓ OK to confirm. Click Next > and ✓ OK to
close the Copy Sub Model form.
23. Rename the new sub model to “Right Abutment” and also, change the name of
the mesh in the new sub-model to “Right Abutment” and click ✓ OK to close
the form and click ✓ OK on the Information form. Change the view to an
isometric view to see the full model.
In plate finite element models where elements meet at right angles to each
other, spurious rotations may occur as out of plane stiffness is not represented.
These rotations may be prevented by the concept of ‘Conforming sides’ which
we can assign to both sides of the fold where the deck adjoins the abutments.
24. In the Structure Properties navigation pane click on the toolbar button and
select Advanced FE Properties |Conforming Sides.
25. In the Specify FE Conforming Sides form, ensure that the Both sides of fold
radio button is selected and the Stiffness Factor is set to “1”. Click on or near
the two folds in the graphics window to select them. They will be highlighted as
shown below. Click ✓ OK to close the form.
9-72
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Structure Loads
The dead and superimposed dead loads have already been applied at the deck
in the pre-prepared file. We will now apply the concrete self-weight to the
abutments.
26. In the Structure Loads Navigation Pane click on the button and select
Finite Element Load | External Load from the drop down list to open the
Define Finite Element Loading form. In the first row of the table set Load Type
to “Force/volume”, Direction to “Global Z” and Load to “-25kN/m3”. Change
Name to “Concrete DL Abutments”.
Click on “De-select all” then set Select by to “Sub Model Group”. Add “Left
Abutment” and “Right Abutment” to the Selected Groups list and click ✓ OK to
close the filter form.
28. Draw a box around the entire structure to assign concrete dead loads to the
abutments. Click ✓ OK to close the form. Click on the Member selection filter
drop down and select “Select All” to remove the filter.
9-73
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
In this model we will apply positive temperature loads to the deck as discussed
in the introduction to ‘Model 1’. First we will apply the differential temperature
effects. (The temperature input data has been derived using a procedure
similar to that outlined in Example 7.4 of this manual).
29. Click on the button and select Finite Element Load |Temperature Load
from the drop down list to open the Define Finite Element Loading form. In the
first row of the table set Temperature Type to “Membrane”, T-Bottom to “2.84”
and press Enter on the keyboard.
Click on “De-select all” then set Select by to “Sub Model Group”. Add “Deck” to
the Selected Groups list and click ✓ OK to close the filter form then draw a box
around the entire structure to assign differential temperature loads to the deck.
31. In the second row set Temperature Type to “Gradient” and Grad to “13.6”.
Draw a box around the entire structure again to assign the gradient loads.
Change Name to “Diff Temperature +ve Loads”. Click ✓ OK to close the form.
Now we will apply the seasonal temperature load effects to the deck.
32. Click on the button and select Finite Element Load |Temperature Load
from the drop down list to open the Define Finite Element Loading form. In the
first row of the table set Temperature Type to “Membrane” and T-Bottom to
“10”. Change Name to “Seasonal Temp Loads +ve”.
9-74
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
33. Draw a box around the entire structure to assign seasonal temperature loads to
the deck. Click ✓ OK to close the form. Click on the Member selection filter
drop down and select “Select All” to remove the filter.
The next step is to create ULS and SLS compilations for dead load,
superimposed dead loads, differential temperature +ve loads and seasonal
temperature +ve loads (8 in total).
34. Open the Structure Compilations tab in the Navigation Window, then click on
the button to select Dead Loads at Stage 1. Click twice on the “+” button
near the bottom of the form to add 2 rows to the table. Set the Limit State field
to “ULS STR/GEO” then in the first row of the compilation table use the drop
down list to select the “Concrete DL Deck” case. In the second row of the
compilation table use the drop down list to select the “Concrete DL Abutments”
case. Check the gamma factor are1.35 and change the Name to “DL ULS”.
Close the form with the ✓ OK button.
22. The compilation for DL SLS can be created by copying the ULS compilation
and changing the Limit State field to “SLS Characteristic”. The factors are
changed by the program to “1”. Change the Name to “DL SLS” and close the
form with ✓ OK.
23. Click on the button to add a Superimposed Dead Loads compilation. Set
the Limit State field to “ULS STR/GEO”. Click 3 times on the “+” button near
the bottom of the form to add 3 rows to the table. In the compilation table use
the drop down list to select the three SDL load cases. The gamma (γ) for each
load is “1.2”. Change the Name to “SDL ULS” and close the form with ✓ OK.
and changing the Limit State field to “SLS Characteristic”. The factors are
changed by the program “1”. Change the Name accordingly and click ✓ OK to
close the form.
25. Click on the button to add an Other compilation. Set the Limit State field to
“ULS STR/GEO”. Click on the “+” button near the bottom of the form to add a
row to the table. In the compilation table use the drop down list to select the
“Diff Temperature +ve Loads” load case. Set the gamma (γ) for the load to
“1.55”. Change the Name to “Diff Temperature ULS”. Click ✓ OK to close the
form.
26. The compilation for SLS differential temperature can be created by copying the
ULS compilation and changing the Limit State field to “SLS Characteristic”. The
factors are changed by the program “1”. Change the Name to “Diff
Temperature SLS” and click ✓ OK to close the form.
27. Click on the button to add an Other compilation. Set the Limit State field to
“ULS STR/GEO”. Click on the “+” button near the bottom of the form to add a
row to the table. In the compilation table use the drop down list to select the “
Seasonal Temp Loads +ve” load case. Set the gamma for the load to “1.55”.
9-75
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Change the Name to “Seasonal Temperature ULS” and click ✓ OK to close

the form.
28. The compilation for SLS seasonal temperature can be created by copying the
ULS compilation and changing the Limit State field to “SLS Characteristic”. The
factors are changed by the program to “1”. Change the Name accordingly and
click ✓ OK to close the form.
Live Load Optimisation

We will now create some influence surfaces and generate live load patterns,
using the load optimisation in the program, to define the maximum mid span
sagging moment along the ref axis of the virtual member. The first step is to
define the influence surfaces we want to generate.
Surface Generation form. Set Pick Mode to “Virtual Member Element” then
click on the element shown below. Set the Direction/Axis field to “y” and the
Scope field to “Sagging” in the top row of the table. This will define an influence
surface for mid-span sagging at this “virtual node”.
9-76
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
The next step is to generate the influence surface.
30. Set Generate by to “Direct (Defined)” and set Method to “(2) Original”. Click on
the  Analyse button. A progress box will open. Click on the ✓ Done button
when the analysis has completed.
Next we will compile ULS and SLS loading patterns for the influence surface
we have just generated.
the Road Traffic Load Optimisation form. Use the Group & Limit States tick
boxes to create loads for gr1a, ULS-STR/GEO (B) and SLS Characteristic.
Untick the tick boxes for ULS-EQU limit state loads.
9-77
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
32. Once you have set the options, click on the  Compile Loading Patterns button
to carry out the load optimisation. The form will change to show the status of
the load optimisation. When it is complete it will show a summary of the loads
generated and the graphics window will show the loading pattern for the
selected influence surface.
Click ✓ OK on the Road Traffic Load Optimisation form and click ✓ OK on the
Influence Surface Generation form.
33. In the main menu select File |Save As to save your model as “My EU Example
9_6 Model 1 Loads.sst”.
9-78
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac

34. In the main menu select Calculate | Analyse.
35. An activate Loading Sets form will be displayed, so ensure both sets are ticked
and then click ✓ OK to start the analysis. The program will open a form
showing the progress of the analysis. Once the analysis has completed, click
on the ✓ Done button.
We will now export the results from the analysis to a .sld file.
Results form. Click in the Virtual Member field and select “Virtual Member: 1”.
It will be highlighted in the graphics view. Set the Name: to “Virtual Member 1”
37. There are ten compilations to create load effects for so click on the small “+”
button at the bottom of the table ten times. In the first row set Design Load
Case to “Construction Stage 1A”, Type to “Compilation” and Structural
Analysis/Load Case to “C1: DL ULS”. The other lines of data should be
completed as shown below.
It should be noted that the ULS and SLS factors are automatically set to 1.0 as
appropriate to the compilation selected. The gamma factors are already
included in the compilations themselves.
The Method used to resolve the Virtual Member results is automatically set to
the method used in the load optimisation but this can be changed if required.
9-79
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
38. When the table is as shown above, click on the Transfer Results... and select
“Export Current Set to SLD file” to save the results in a file called “My EU
Example 9_6 Model 1.sld”.
Defining Model 2
We will now adjust the model we have defined to convert it to ‘Model 2’. We will
start by removing the spring supports at the abutment.
39. In the Structure Definition Navigation Window select the Supports | SN1:
Abutment Springs group and then right mouse click and select “Delete”.
Now that the spring supports representing the stiffness of the soil have been
deleted we will define some external loads representing the horizontal soil
pressure on the wall.
NB: In the following steps check the orientation of the horizontal loads applied
to the abutments in the graphics window and compare these with the diagram
in the introduction to ‘Model 2’ at the beginning of this example. Alter the sign
convention of the magnitude of the load as necessary to ensure that the loads
have the correct orientation as shown in the diagram.
40. In the Structure Loads Navigation Window toolbar click on the button and
select Finite Element Load | External Load from the drop down list to open
the Define Finite Element Loading form. In the first row of the table set Load
Type to “Force/area”, Direction to “Local Z” and Load to “ 21kN/m2”. Change
Name to “Soil Pressure”.
9-80
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
41. Click on the Filter toolbar button dropdown and select “Left Abutment”. Draw a
box around the structure to assign soil pressure loads to the left abutment.
42. In the second row of the table set Load Type to “Force/area”, Direction to
“Local Z” and Load to “-21kN/m2”. Set the filter to “Right Abutment” and draw a
box around the structure to assign the soil pressure. Click ✓ OK to close the
form.
Hydrostatic loads will now be applied to the abutments. The datum height will
be input as being 2 metres below the level of the deck because that is the
height of the water table.
43. Click on the button and select Finite Element Load | Hydrostatic Load
from the drop down list to open the Define Finite Element Loading form.
44. In the first row of the table set Load w.r.t. datum to “Below datum”, Density to
“10” and Datum to “-2”. Set the filter to “Left Abutment” and draw a box around
the structure to assign hydrostatic loads to the left abutment.
45. In the second row of the table set Load w.r.t. datum to “Below datum”, Density
to “-10” and Datum to “-2”. Set the filter to “Left Abutment” and draw a box
around the structure to assign hydrostatic loads to the left abutment. Click ✓
9-81
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
It is necessary to adjust the differential temperature loads applied to the deck.
46. Select Diff Temperature +ve Loads in the Navigation Window to open the
Define Finite Element Loading form. In the first row of the table set T-Bottom to
“2.37” and press Enter on the keyboard. In the second row set Grad to “3.7”.
Change the Name to “Diff Temperature –ve Loads” and then click ✓ OK to
close the form.
It is also necessary to adjust the seasonal load effects in the deck.
47. Select Seasonal Temp Loads +ve” in the Navigation Window to open the
Define Finite Element Loading form. In the first row of the table set Grad to “-
10”. Change Name to “Seasonal Temp Loads -ve”. Click ✓ OK to close the
form. Click on the Member selection filter drop down and select “Select All” to
remove the filter.
The next step is to create a compilation for soil pressure and hydrostatic loads.
48. In the Structure Compilations Navigation Window toolbar click on the

button and select Other. Set the Limit State field to “ULS STR/GEO”. Click
twice on the “+” button near the bottom of the form to add 2 rows to the table.
In the first row of the compilation table use the drop down list to select the “Soil
9-82
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Pressure” case. In the second row of the compilation table use the drop down
list to select the “FE Hydrostatic” case. Set Gamma factor to “1.35” in both rows
and change the Name: to “Soil & Hydro ULS”. Click ✓ OK to close the form.
43. The compilation for SLS soil pressure and hydro static load can be created by
copying the ULS compilation and changing the Limit State: field to “SLS
Characteristic”. The factors are changed by the program to “1”. Change the
Name accordingly and click ✓ OK to close the form.
44. We can check that the other compilations have the adjusted loads assigned to
them with the correct gamma factors by opening and closing the Compile
Loading Patterns forms.
45. In the main menu select File |Save As to save the data file as “My EU
Example 9_6 Model 2 Loads.sst”.
Follow a procedure similar to that outlined in steps 34 to 37 to analyse the

structure and save the results in a .sld file. Note that dead loads, superimposed
dead loads and live loads should be omitted from the Transfer Results form for
model 2. The Transfer Results form for model 2 should look like this:
Summary
In this example we defined a 3 sided FE structure consisting of a single span finite
element deck with finite element meshes representing the abutment walls.
Support conditions and loads relating to two different design situations were
defined. In the first model spring supports were defined to represent the stiffness
of the soil. The local axes of these spring supports were defined as being normal
to the plane of the abutment wall. In the second model the spring supports were
replaced by a horizontal soil pressure and a hydrostatic load to represent the
water contained in the soil. The resulting load effects for each design situation
were saved in two .sld files. Load effects from .sld files created in different
analysis files can be imported into the same design beam file.
9-83
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
9-84
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
9.7. Time dependant Creep Effects in Prestressed beams

Subjects Covered:
Construction on Centring; Staged construction; Creep Factor; Ageing coefficient;
Total Construction Effects; Elevated Temperature Curing Profile
General background
Annex KK of EN1992-2 is an informative annex related to the structural behaviour
of time dependant effects. It is primarily concerned with the redistribution of
internal stresses when a bridge is built in stages. A typical example of this effect is
produced when a precast prestressed composite beam bridge deck is constructed
with the insitu slab being cast onto, and supported by, the un-propped prestressed
beams which have already been placed into position. Although there are a
number of time dependant effects that may affect the distribution of stresses in the
deck, such as concrete shrinkage and prestressing steel relaxation, the effect that
generally causes most difficulty, especially when the deck is statically
indeterminate, is concrete creep.
Consider the simplest case of a simply supported precast prestressed composite

beam with the complete insitu slab cast in one stage after the beams have been
placed into position.
a. Immediately after the slab has been cast the

dead loads of both the beam and slab,
together with the prestress, are carried by the
precast beam alone and there are no stresses
in the slab.
b. After a period of time, in which a certain

amount of the total creep has occurred, the
bending moments will remain the same but,
due to the displacements caused by the
concrete creep, the stresses are redistributed
such that some of the dead load and prestress
will now be carried by the composite section.
There are therefore some stresses in the slab.
c. The degree of redistribution is dependent on a

number of parameters, one of which is the
relative ages of the insitu and prestressed
concrete. Consider the extreme fictitious case
where the insitu and prestressed concrete are
cast at exactly the same time and all
permanent actions are applied at the time that
the shuttering is removed. This would result in
all permanent moments being resisted by the
composite section. This is often referred to as
“Construction on Centring”.
9-85
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
The stresses in b. will be the stresses in a. (modified to take account of long term
losses) plus a proportion of the difference between the stresses in c. and a. The
basis of the simplified method in Annex KK.7 is to determine what proportion of the
difference is to be used based upon an “Ageing coefficient”.
Although this is the simplest of cases, the procedure can be extended to structures
that may be statically indeterminate and constructed in a number of stages. In
these cases the redistribution of secondary effects of prestress will also be
considered as well as redistribution of primary prestress and permanent effects.
Outline of Example
The definition of a two span prestressed beam bridge deck is given in Example
10.1 and will be used for the basis of this example.
The objective of the exercise is to compare the permanent action stresses at the
time the bridge is open to traffic (60 days) with those at the end of the bridges life.
The top and bottom precast beam and insitu stresses will be compared at the end
of the beam nearest the pier and at mid-span. The aging coefficient will be
determined by the program.
All other parameters can be found in the outline of example 10.1
9-86
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Procedure
General
• Define 2 beams, one for each span ensuring that any time dependant
parameters and stage construction details are set. Reduce the number of
active tendons in each beam so that the basic stresses at transfer are
acceptable. This is necessary so that the correct primary and secondary
prestress effects can be established in the line beam.
• Define a line beam combining the two beams into a two span structure and
generate the construction and differential shrinkage load effects using the
automated load generator.
• Transfer these load effects back to the beam load effect tables for the both
spans. This is necessary to enable the correct calculation of the prestress
secondary effects in a second line beam analysis.
• In the Automated loading form for dead load set the beam to be continuous
from Girder only; this will represent the structure having the permanent and
prestressing effects applied to the composite section instantaneously.
• Analyse for dead loads only and transfer the total construction load into the
beam load effects table called “Construction on centring” for both spans.
• To evaluate the SLS stresses due to permanent actions in the program at a

given time it is necessary to carry out a “nominal” variable action load case
analysis at a given time. Therefore a table of “Traffic gr1a TS – For Bending
design” will therefore need to be defined, with negligible values entered, to
achieve this. This will only be done for Span 1.
Beam Definition
A basic beam has already been defined and can be found in a file called “EU
Example 9_7 Span 1.sam”, which can be used to create both spans
1. Start the program and in the main menu select File | New Create From
Template... to create a new “EU Project”
2. Use the main menu File | Titles to change the Project Title to “Time
Dependant Effects in a Line Beam” with a sub title of “Example 9.7”. Also
change the Job Number to “9.7” and put your initials in the Calculations by field
before closing the form in the normal way.
3. At the bottom of the Materials Navigation pane select the task Clear All to
delete all materials.
4. Change the navigation window to Design Beams and use the toolbar
button to add an Existing Design Beam..., choosing the file “EU Example 9_7
Span 1.sam” to create a linked design beam for span 1.
9-87
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
5. Right mouse click in the navigation window and select “Break Link” to embed
this data into the project. This will of course create the material properties
associated with it.
6. Select the button in the navigation toolbar to open the analysis form and set
the Analyse for data field to “Transfer”. It can be seen that the compressive
stresses at the bottom of the beam far exceed the stress limits.
7. Click anywhere on the beam side elevation in the graphics window to open the
Pre-tensioned Beam Tendon Definition form which will allow editing of the
tendon data. Use the mouse on the section graphics display to window round
all the tendons except those in the top and two bottom rows. Click on the small
“-“ button at the bottom of the tendon table to make these tendons inactive.
Click on the ✓ OK button to close the form and return to the analysis.
8. The analysis graphical display should now show that the stresses are more
acceptable and that with some debonding at the ends of the tendons the
section will work.
9. For this example we are going to reduce the curing time from 4 to 3 days but
elevate the curing temperature from 20 to 32 degrees. This temperature will be
ramped up over three hours and ramped down at the end over 4 hours. On the
Analysis form, select “Time dependent effect calculations” in the Set
parameters for field. This opens the “Time Dependent Effect Calculations”
form.
10. Set the Age (in days) at start of drying shrinkage field to a value of “1”.
11. In the “Elevated Temperature Curing” table near the bottom of the form, click
on the “+” button four times to add four rows to the table. Set the time in
ascending order to be “0,3,68,72” hours and the corresponding temperatures to
“20,32,32,20”. Close the form with the ✓ OK button.
9-88
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
12. For this example we want to compare stresses without the effects of primary
temperature stresses so we need to remove the default differential temperature
profile. This is done by changing the Analyse for field to “Differential
Temperature Primary Stresses” to open the Diff Temp Analysis form and then
changing the Type of profile to “User Defined” and then clicking on the clear
button.
13. Close both the Differential Temperature Analysis and the Pre-tensioned Beam
Analysis form using the ✓ OK button.
14. Select Beam Definition in the navigation window to open the Pre-tensioned
Beam Definition form. Click on the Define drop down menu and select “Section
1” from the list to open the Pre-tensioned Beam Section Definition form.
Change the Precast Age (days) for the PC beam from 4 to 3 days. This
automatically sets the beam in Section 2, so we can now close both forms with
the ✓ OK button.
15. Select the SB1: Prestress Inner Beam - Span 1 object in the navigation
window and right mouse click to select “Copy”.
16. Right mouse click again to select “Reverse” to swap any in-span features so
that they are reversed in the span length.
17. Right mouse click again to select “Rename” to rename the second beam to
“Prestress Inner Beam – Span 2”.
Line Beam Analysis for as built construction load effects

The line beam analysis needs to be carried out in two parts where the first part
defines the load effects for each stage of the construction as it is built.
18. Use the main menu Data | Structure Type and select “Line Beam”. Click “Yes”
in the Confirm form then change the navigation window to Structure Definition.
9-89
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
19. Click on the “Structure Geometry” icon in the navigation panel to open the Line
Beam Geometry form and set the number of spans to “2”. Set Span Length in
both rows to “21” and both Divide *** Span into fields to a value of “42”. Close
the Line Beam Geometry form using the ✓ OK button.
20. Open the Structure Properties group on the navigation pane. At the bottom of
the pane select the structure property task Create Section and Beam Groups to
define one instance of each of the two Design Beams defined earlier.
21. Click on the Prestress Inner Beam - Span 1 object in the navigation pane to
open the Structure Properties: Beam form.
22. Set the Properties / Type: fields to “Transformed section” and “beam & slab”.
Click on the left hand span in the graphics window to assign it where the span
will be highlighted in red. Click on ✓ OK to close the form.
23. Repeat the last two steps to assign the property Prestress Inner beam - Span
2 to the right hand span.
24. In the main menu select Data | Automated Loading... to open the Automated
Loadings form. Select the Dead and SDL Loading tab at the top of the form
and set the Continuous from stage field to “Stage 2 Concrete”. Tick the tickbox
for Analyse for Shrinkage and ensure that no other boxes are ticked. Click on
the  Analyse button. The bending moment for each construction stage should
be that for a simply supported beam. This is because the beam only becomes
continuous after the stage 1b concrete has hardened.
9-90
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
25. Click on the Transfer Results... button and click on the left span in the graphics
window. Change the Name of the transfer set to “DL Span 1” and then click on
the “Set Default Mapping” toolbar button at the bottom of the form to map
the default construction loads cases to the appropriate load effects tables in the
Design Beam. Add (+) one more row to include the differential shrinkage load
case (note the load factors).
A second transfer set can now be created for the same load cases but for the
second span.
26. Click on the “+” button in the top right corner of the form to add an additional
set. Set the Name to “DL Span 2” and then replicate the transfer table by
clicking on the Copy Transfer Details From button and selecting “DL Span 1”.
27. To complete this second transfer set, ensure that the second span beam is
selected in the graphics window so that the correct Design Beam is shown in
the data form.
28. Click on the Transfer Results button and select “Transfer All Sets”. A Transfer
Report form is displayed which can be closed if all is successful. The Transfer
Results form can also be closed with ✓ OK, but keep the Automated Loadings
form open for now. The initial construction stage load effects tables should be
complete for both Design Beams.
9-91
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Line Beam Analysis for “Construction on Centring” load effects

The Automated line beam loading now needs to be run again to create the load
effects that would occur if the structure and prestress were applied
instantaneously. This will be used in the beam design to help calculate the
time dependant effects.
29. In the Automated Loadings form set the Continuous from stage field to “Girder
Only” and ensure that no tickboxes are ticked. Click on the  Analyse button
(Click on “Yes to All” on the confirm form if it appears).
30. Click on the Transfer Results... button to open the Transfer Results form. Add
an additional transfer set using the “+” button in the top right corner of the form
and change the Name to “COC Span 1”. (Ensure Span 1 is selected).
31. Add a new data line in the transfer table using the “+” toolbar button at the
bottom of the form. This should be filled in as shown below.
32. Before transferring the results create a fourth transfer set named “COC Span 2”
and copy the table contents from span 1 and ensuring that span 2 is selected
in the graphics.
Beam” which should transfer the results for span 2.
34. Change the current transfer set to “COC Span 1” by clicking on the tab at the
top of the form and then repeat the last step.
35. The Transfer Results form can now be closed with the ✓ OK button, as well as
the Automated Loadings form.
36. To view these results change the navigation window to Design Beams and
select the appropriate Beam Loads table. The results for the “Construction on
Centring” loadcase will show that there are three components to this data 1)
the external loading, 2) The primary prestress effects and 3) the prestress
secondary effects. The results below are displayed by selecting the relevant
Prestress Effects radio buttons on the form.
9-92
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
37. After inspecting this data click ✓ OK on the Define Pre-tensioned Beam Load
form.
38. To inspect the stresses at different times we need to analyse the beam for a
nominal live load case so that all the time dependencies are applied correctly,
so, a nominal traffic loading with very low values will be created for span 1.
39. With the span 1 beam selected in the Design Beam navigation window click on
the toolbar button to add “Beam Loads” for “Traffic gr1a TS – for Bending
design”. Click on the “Generate” button and click “Yes” on the confirm form.
Enter the UDL intensity Start and End as “0.00001kN/m” and click ✓ OK to
close the Generate Beam Loads form. Click ✓ OK to close the Define Pre-
tensioned Beam Loads form.
40. Click on the toolbar button at the top of the navigation window to open the
Pre-tensioned Beam Analysis form. Set the Analyse for field to “Bending for
gr1a 1” and dismiss any confirm and warning forms that may be displayed by
9-93
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
clicking “Yes” and ✓ OK as necessary. Ensure that the Limit State field is set
to “SLS Characteristic”. Set the Time considered to be “61” days and set the
point of interest to be at point 14 (20.091m from left end of beam). Click on the
Results button to display the results.
31. The default graphical display is the stress plots of the top and bottom of the
precast concrete. By clicking on the slab in the section view in the graphics
window the display changes to the stresses at the top and bottom of the slab.
32. Click on the Results button to open the Results Viewer. Scroll through the
results viewer until the stress summary is reached. At the bottom of the stress
summary for SLS Characteristic loading, the values of stress at the top and
bottom of both prestressed and insitu concrete are displayed and should be the
same as those displayed on the graphics. These are:
Slab PC Beam
Top Stress 0.014 N/mm2 -1.36 N/mm2
Bottom Stress 0.014 N/mm2 18.51 N/mm2
33. Just above the Stress Summary Table are the calculations for the “Structural
Effects of Time Dependant Behaviour”. The calculated value for the ageing
coefficient is 0.90942
34. Change the Time Considered: to be infinity and the stresses are recalculated to
be:
Slab PC Beam
Top Stress 1.37 N/mm2 2.57 N/mm2
Bottom Stress 1.07 N/mm2 11.27 N/mm2
35. The calculated value of the ageing coefficient is 0.82948. Below is a summary
of the stresses at the section.
9-94
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Example 9_7.sst”. Close the program.
Summary
This example clearly shows how the program can be used to model the
redistribution of concrete stresses in a precast pretensioned beam due to the age
dependant effects of creep. Although we have focused on stresses, the
redistribution will also have an effect on other design effects such as bending
moments and deflections. The stresses above could be resolved into bending
moments to determine the redistribution and the change in deflections can be
found in the ‘SLS Flexure’ table at the end of the analysis reports.
9-95
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
9-96
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
9.8. User Defined Vehicles and Convoys

Subjects Covered:
User Defined Vehicles; User Defined Convoys
General background
User Defined Vehicles and Convoys can be used when a vehicle is not included in
the list of default vehicles available in Autodesk Structural Bridge Design.
In this example a user defined convoy is created to represent a train of two

Assessment Load Wagons in accordance with Network Rail’s ‘Structural
Assessment of Underbridges’ document’. Each of the 4 bogies in the 2 wagons
will be defined as individual user defined vehicles which will ensures that the
orientation of each bogie remains radial when the train is applied to a curved track.
It is worth noting that both user defined ‘Road’ vehicles and convoys can be used
in a ‘Road’ Load Optimisation within Autodesk Structural Bridge Design but only a
convoy of user defined ‘Rail’ vehicles can be used.
Outline
A pre-prepared two span grillage model of a 500mm thick, curved slab, as shown
below is supplied with dead and superimposed loads already applied. A convoy
load which will represent two Assessment Load Wagons will also be applied.
Details of the characteristic loads are as follows (4 dead loads already applied):
• Dead load of the concrete slab is 25kN/m3 (G = 1.35)

• Ballast 0.3m deep x 1.3 (Table NA1 of EN1991-1-1). Density 20kN/m3 (G = 1.35)
• Track and sleepers 5kN/m (G = 1.35)
• Footway loading 7kN/m2 (G = 1.2)
• 2 Assessment Load Wagons as outlined above (Q = 1.45):
9-97
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Procedure
42. Start the program and open the pre-prepared data file with a name of “EU
Example 9_8 grillage.sst”. Close the Structure overview with the “Done”
button.
43. Change the title of the example to “Curved Grillage Model with Convoy Load”
using the Date | Titles menu option and put your initials in the Calculations by:
field before closing the form in the normal way.
User Defined Special Vehicles

The dead and superimposed dead loads of the slab, ballast, track, sleepers
and footways have been applied already in the pre-prepared file. The bogies,
each containing 2 axles, will be defined as user defined special vehicles.
44. Select the menu item Data | Define Special Vehicles... to open the Define
Special Vehicles form.
45. Click on the “+” button to add a new special vehicle and change the Name to
“Wagon Bogie”.
46. Set the Number of Axles and Number of Tracks to “2” and enter a value of
“125kN” in the Nominal Wheel Load field. This will ensure that each of the 4
wheel loads has the same value, although different wheel loads can be entered
directly in the Load column if required.
47. In the Edit field select “axle spacing” from the drop down list. On the sub form
that has opened enter a value of “1.829” on the second row of the table. This
will ensure that the axle spacing in the bogie is 1.829 metres as per the vehicle
load diagram. Click ✓ OK to close the sub form.
48. In the Edit field select “track spacing” from the drop down list. On the sub form
that has opened enter a value of “1.435” on the second row of the table. This
will ensure that the track spacing in the bogie is 1.435 metres as per the
standard track spacing. Click ✓ OK to close the sub form.
9-98
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
49. In this example the default value of “1.935m” for the Overall Width of Vehicle
will be used. Note that the program automatically alters this default value when
the value of the track spacing is set.
50. We will now define the 4 wheels in the bogie as being at the 4 locations where
the blue construction lines intersect.
Select “wheel positions” in the Edit field and click “Yes” on the confirm form.
The 4 wheels in the bogie have been defined and are represented by green
circles on the graphics window. Note that as an alternative the wheels could be
defined by clicking in the graphics window at the locations where the blue
construction lines intersect.
51. Set the Front Axle Overhang and Rear Axle Overhang fields to “1.464m”. This
would ensure that the appropriate swept path allowance would be set correctly
if the convoy were to be considered in the Load Optimisation process.
In this example we will use the default value of “5m” for the Unloaded Length
Front and Unloaded Length Back fields. This will ensure that no load is applied
to the structure over that length immediately in front of, or behind, each
bogie/vehicle. It is worth noting that, as an alternative, the unloaded length can
be set in the EN1991-2 tab of the Nationally Determined Parameters form.
Toggling between the 2 radio buttons at the bottom of the form determines
whether the unloaded length value is set by the value on the NDP form or the
Define Special Vehicles form. However, the unloaded lane length only effects
road vehicles and hence it is not directly relevant to the rail loads specified in
this example.
52. The Define Special Vehicles form will now be as shown below.
9-99
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
53. Click ✓ OK to close the Define Special Vehicles form.
Convoy of Vehicles
The train will be defined as a single convoy of 4 bogies, each of which will
consist of the user defined vehicle “Wagon Bogie”.
54. In the main menu select Data | Define Convoy... to open the Define Convoy of
Vehicles form.
55. Click on the “+” button to add a new convoy and change the Name to “Two
Wagon Convoy”.
56. Set the Convoy Type to “Non-uniform”. This will enable bogies to be positioned
at varying distances within the convoy. Set the Vehicle Type to “Wagon Bogie”
in the top 4 rows of the table and enter the values shown below in the Vehicle
Separation fields. These dimensions position the bogies along the length of the
convoy as per the diagram in the introduction to this example. Click ✓ OK to
close the form.
9-100
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Applying the Convoy Load to the Structure

A rail convoy load can be included in the Load Optimisation process. However,
in this example the convoy load will be applied manually to the structure.
57. Change the navigation window on the left hand side of the screen to Structure
Loads.
58. Click on the button in the navigation window toolbar and select Rail Traffic
Load | Convoy Load to open a Define Rail Traffic Load form. Use the default
values on the form. Position the Convoy Load approximately by clicking twice
in the north most lane somewhere near the right hand end of span 1 (leave a
gap of a few seconds between clicks). Now set the Chainage in the form to
“15m” to position it more accurately. Note that the axles in the 4 bogies align
radially with the curved deck.
59. It is worth noting that when “Defined” is selected in the Wheels field the Wheels
Included sub form opens in which tick boxes can be selected or deselected to
include or ignore individual wheel loads in the convoy. This may be useful
when a user wants to ensure that loads are not applied in relieving areas as
mentioned in EN1990:AMD1:Tables A2.4(A) to (C). Close the sub form if it has
been opened. Close the Define Rail Traffic Load form with the ✓ OK button.
Example 9_8 with Convoy Loads.sst”. Close the program.
9-101
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Summary
This example provides an introduction to defining user defined special vehicles
and user defined convoys.
The user defined a special vehicle and a user defined convoy. The convoy load
was placed on the structure manually. Users can create loading patterns manually
based on engineering experience. The appropriate load factors would be input
manually in the Compile Loading Patterns form.
Alternatively, the convoy could be included in the Load Optimisation process which
is described in Chapter 10 of this manual.
Any additional wagons or locomotives could be defined and included in the convoy
as necessary.
9-102
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
10. Complete Examples
Contents
10.1. 2 Span Prestress Beam Deck ................................................................................. 10-3
10.2. Steel Composite “Banana” Farm Access Bridge ................................................... 10-32
10-1
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
10-2
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
10.1. 2 Span Prestress Beam Deck

Subjects Covered:
Prestressed Precast beam structures;
Outline
This two span bridge deck is constructed of Y beams (6 in each span with the outer
beams being YE beams) acting compositely with a 200mm thick concrete slab.
600mm wide diaphragms are cast to the bottom of the beams along the three lines of
support and bearings are placed under the ends of the beams. There is a small
300mm deep upstand at the edge of the slab.
10-3
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Both spans are 21m from support centre lines which are slightly skewed as shown
below.
The slab, diaphragm and upstand are created with grade C32/40 concrete and the
prestress beam with grade C50/60 concrete.
Reinforcement is grade B500B with a ductility factor k of 1.15 and an ultimate strain of
0.05. 25mm diameter bars are placed longitudinally at 200mm centres in the top of
the slab with 50mm cover. These bars extend 6m into the slab either side of the
central support.
The prestressed tendons have a 0.1% proof strength of 1600MPa.
The structure is modelled using a skewed grillage with vertical offsets so that the
centroids of each component are at the correct height.
The construction sequence is firstly to place the beams onto supports so that they
carry their own weight. The insitu slab (excluding the edge upstand) is then cast for
the first 18m of each span, measured from the free ends, leaving a 6m infill over the
central row of supports (the end diaphragms are cast as part of stage 1A). The next
stage is to cast the 6m infill slab with the central diaphragm, which, when hardened
will make the beams continuous over the central supports. Lastly the upstand is cast.
The carriageway is 18m wide with a 1.5m footway on either side.
It is required to design an adequate prestress strand layout with appropriate debond

locations to satisfy all execution and persistent design situations for one of the central
inner beams. ULS:STR moments and shears should be checked against section
resistance, providing shear reinforcement where required. Section stresses under
SLS Characteristic combinations of actions should be checked against material limits
for all execution stages as well as persistent design situations for normal use.
The actions to consider on the structure are:
1. Concrete dead loads assuming 25kN/m3.
2. Surfacing loads of 2kN/m2 over the carriageway and 3kN/m2 over the footways.
3. Crash barrier dead loads of 1.3kN/m along the upstands.
10-4
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
4. Non linear differential temperature considering a surfacing thickness of 75mm.
5. Differential shrinkage assuming that shrinkage drying starts after 2 days and
that ambient relative humidity is 80%. Both ambient and curing temperatures
are 20 degrees C.
6. Traffic actions from Gr1a and Gr5 combinations with a special vehicle of SV80.
All partial factors, combination factors etc should conform to the values in the UK
national annex.
Procedure
The general procedure is as follows:
• Create a new project for a line girder and add tiles etc
• Define the materials needed
• Define 4 prestressed design beams, two edges two inner
• Define a two span line beam representing an inner line of beams and
assign properties from the design beams
• Analyse (automated) for construction, diff temperature and diff shrinkage.
• Transfer the results for the two spans into the design beam load tables.
• Save the beam data into beam files by linking the design beams and save
the project file.
• Change the structure type to a refined analysis.
• Define a grillage structure and any additional design sections required
• Define basic loads and compilations for superimposed dead loads
• Define traffic load patterns for bending and shear using Influence surfaces
and load optimisation procedures.
• Change one of the linked beam to an embedded beam an transfer load

effects back to it.
• Inspect the results and carry out some design checks.
• Re-link the design beam to update the beam file and save the project file to
a new file.
Set up and Materials

using the main menu Data | Structure Type | Line Beam.
10-5
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
2. From the main menu select File | Titles and set Project Title to “2 Span
Prestressed Line Beam” with a sub-title of “Example 10.1” and a Job Number
“10.1”. Add your initials in the Calculations by: field and click ✓ OK to close the
form.
3. In the Materials Navigation window, select the C40/50 concrete material to

open the Property Details form, and change the cube strength to 60MPa, thus
creating a C50/60 grade concrete. Click ✓ OK to close the form.
4. Next, click on the Reinforcing Steel material and set the value of k to “1.15” and
the Characteristic Strain Limit to “0.05”. Click ✓ OK to close the form.
5. Finally, click on the Prestressing Steel material and then right mouse button
click to Change Type to “Prestressing steel – Horizontal”. Ensure that the 0.1%
Proof Strength is set to “1600MPa” and the relaxation class is set to “Class 1”
before closing the form with ✓ OK.
Beam Definition
In theory only three different design beams (one internal one north edge and
one south edge) are require as the spans and carriageway are completely
symmetrical. This is only true if the beam directions can be reversed, which is
ok for a refined analysis but unfortunately not for a line beam analysis
So, four beams are required, one edge and one inner for each span (The north
edge in span 1 can also be used for the south edge of span 2 and vice versa).
Initially we will create the inner beam for span 1.
6. In the Design Beam navigation window click on the toolbar button to select
New Pre-tensioned Prestressed beam from the available list.
7. The Beam length is “21m” and Location is “Interior beam”. Cross section is
“varying” and No. of different sections is “2”. Use the Suggest size of:
dropdown to select “Y Beam” which will open the Initial Sizing sub form. On the
sub form set the Beams at: “2000 centres” and select the “Y7” beam type. Click
✓ OK on the sub-form.
10-6
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
8. Select “Section 1” in the Define field and add an “In situ – regular” component
in the second row of the table of width 2000 x depth 200mm. Click ✓ OK on the
sub form and ensure that the Z offset of the slab is 1270mm. Click the Merge
by stage # button and click on the vertical edges of this slab component to
ensure that it is continuous. Also check that the Stage for the slab is set to
“Stage 1A”. The Concrete Property for the beam and slab should be C50/60
and C32/40 respectively. Close the section definition form with ✓ OK.
9. For “Section 2” the program assumes the same section as section 1 so just
change Stage for the slab to “Stage 1B”. Note that for both beams the age of
the precast concrete is 4 days at transfer and 60 days when it is made
composite with the slab. Click ✓ OK on the Pre-tensioned Beam Section
Definition form.
10. To define the reinforcement, select “Reinforcement” in the Define field. Click
on the “+” button near the bottom of the form to open the Define Reinforcement
form. Set the fields to those as shown on the right-hand part of the Define
Reinforcement sub form and define the cover as 50mm when clicking on the
top face of the slab to define the bars. Close the Define Reinforcement sub
form with ✓ OK.
11. On the Define Pre-Tensioned Beam Reinforcement form, highlight all 10 rows
in the table (<Ctrl A>) and click on the icon near the bottom of the form to
open the Edit Reinforcement Attributes form. Tick the Modify? tickbox and
enter “15” in the Dimension/Start field. Close both the Edit Reinforcement
Attributes form and the Define Pre-Tensioned Beam Reinforcement form with
✓ OK.
10-7
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
12. Select “Section Locations” in the Define field and set the values as shown
below in the Beam Feature Definition sub-form. Close this sub-form and the
Pre-tensioned Beam Definition form with ✓ OK.
Parameters that affect differential temperature calculations and time dependant

effects are also stored with the beam data so these can be defined now
13. In the Design Beams navigation window, select the defined prestressed beam
and then click on the toolbar button to open the Pre-tensioned Beam
Analysis form.
14. Click on the Analyse for drop down and select “Differential temperature primary
stresses” to open the Differential Temperature Analysis sub form. Set the Type
of Deck field to “Type 3b: concrete beams”, the Surfacing field to “Surfaced”
and the surface thickness to “0.075mm”. The resulting diff temp profile can be
seen in both the table and the graphic. Close this form with ✓ OK.
15. Click on the Set parameters for drop down and select “Time dependent effect
calculations”. On the Time Dependent Effect Calculation sub form set the value
in the Age (in days)... field to “2” and ensure that all the other values are set to
those shown below. Click ✓ OK to close this sub form.
10-8
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
16. Finally, click ✓ OK to close the Pre-tensioned Beam Analysis form
It is now necessary to copy and modify this beam to create the three other
beams
17. With the first beam selected right mouse click in the navigation window to
Rename this beam “Inner Beam Span 1”. Right mouse click again and select
Copy from the list of options. Right mouse click again and select Reverse to
reverse the direction of the in-span features. Right mouse click yet again to
Rename the new beam “Inner Beam Span 2”.
18. To create the north edge beam of span 1, first copy “Inner Beam Span 1 and
then open the Beam Definition form for the new beam. Change the Location to
“Exterior Beam” Open the section definition for “Section 1” and make the
following changes
a. Change the Y7 Beam to a YE7 beam.

b. Change the In-situ slab to a 1500 by 200 section
c. Change the y offset for the slab to 250
d. Define an additional In-situ regular section (Stage 2) 200 by 500
e. Set the offsets for this parapet to (-600, 1270)
f. Merge by stage #
Do the same for Section 2 where necessary
Delete the two reinforcing bars that are now outside the boundary of the
section.
Rename the beam as “Edge Beam Span 1”.
19. The north edge beam of span 2 can be created by simply copying “Edge Beam
Span 1”, reversing it and renaming it.
20. For completeness the differential temperature profile for each of the edge
beams needs modifying to take into account the parapet edge. This is done by
changing the profile Type to “User Defined” and then adjusting the table values
as shown below
0 15.65 0 -9.5
0.3 15.65 0.3 -9.5
0.45 3.5 0.55 -0.6
0.7 0 0.75 0
1.595 0 1.32 0
1.77 2.3 1.52 -0.9
0 0 1.77 -6.55
Line Beam Analysis of Construction Loads

21. In the main menu select Data | Structure Type | Line Beam
10-9
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
22. In the Structure Definition navigation window click on the Structure Geometry
Icon to open the Line Beam Geometry form. Set the number of spans to “2”
and set all Span Length and Divide Span into fields to a value of “21”. The
default support conditions are as required so close the form with ✓ OK.
23. In the Section Properties navigation window. Click on the button and select
Design Beam from the list to open the Structure Properties: Beam form. In the
Beam Reference field use the dropdown to select “Inner Beam Span 1” and set
the Type: field to “Transformed section”. Set the value in the Cracked
Section/Proportion/from right field to “0.15”. Click on the left-hand span on the
beam elevation and click ✓ OK to assign the beam and close the form.
24. Repeat the previous step but select “Inner Beam Span 2” to assign the
appropriate beam to the right-hand span (remembering to set the value in the
Cracked Section/Proportion/from left field to “0.15”).
25. In the main menu select Data | Automated Loading... to open the Automated
Loadings form. Click on the Dead and SDL Loading tab and un-tick the
Analyse for SDL tick box. Select “Stage 2 Concrete” in the Continuous from
Stage field and tick the Analyse for Diff Temp and Analyse for Shrinkage tick
boxes. Click on the Analyse button to carry out the load optimisation.
26. When this has completed click on the Transfer Results... button. Click on the
left-hand span and change the Name: field in the Transfer Results form to
“Span 1 Construction”. At the bottom of the table click on the Set Default
Mapping Button to create a mapping between the analysis load results and
the design beam load tables.
27. Create a second transfer set by clicking on the + button at the top of the form
and then clicking on the right span in the graphics window. Set the Name: for
this second set to “Span 2 Construction” and then carry out the automatic
mapping again. Click on the Transfer Results button and select “Transfer All
Sets” from the list.
10-10
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
28. Exit the Transfer Report form and the close the Transfer Results form using ✓
OK.
29. In the Design Beams navigation window it can be seen that all the construction
load cases and the differential temperature/shrinkage cases have entries for
the two Inner beams.
Before saving the project, all the design beams should be changed to
linked beams (which will save the beam data into .sam beam file and
create links to them). This is not absolutely necessary but advisable as
we are going to use the same beams in two different analysis projects
(line beam and grillage) so any changes made by one project will
automatically be seen by the other.
30. In the Design Beams navigation window click on the beam “Inner Beam Span
1, right mouse click and select Link from the dropdown list. Save the file as
“My EU Example 10_1 Inner Beam Span 1.sam”
31. Repeat this for the other beams, saving with appropriate names
(NB. The design beam task Embed All Linked Beams could have been
used to link all the files in one go, but generic names would have been
created for the file names which may not have been suitable. Further
linking and embedding could use this method as the filenames now form
part of the beam data.
32. The Line beam project file can now be saved using the main menu File | Save
As... naming the file “My EU Example 10_1 Line Beam Inner.sst”.
Grillage generation
33. Change the analysis type for a grillage using the main menu Data |Structure
Type | Refined Analysis... This will delete all the structure data for the line
beam, which is intended, so accept the confirmation request. Use the main
menu item File | Titles... to change the Project Title to “2 Span Prestress
Grillage” and close the Titles form with ✓ OK.
All the material and design beams are already defined but for the
grillage it is necessary to define two Design Sections, one to represent
the concrete transverse diaphragm and the other to represent a
nominally flexible member that will be situated along the edge of the
deck
34. In the Design Sections navigation window toolbar click on the button and
select New Section | Parametric Shape to open the Define Section Element
form. Set Width to “600”, Depth to “1470” and the Property to C32/40 concrete.
The Hook Point | Reference should be set to “-1” and the Y&Z coordinates to
“0” and “0”. Close the Define Section Element form with ✓ OK. Rename the
SS1:Section to “Diaphragm” using the right mouse button menu
35. In the Design Sections navigation window click on Design Sections, at the
very top, and then click on in the toolbar to add a new parametric
10-11
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
rectangular section. Set Width to “10”, Depth to “10” and the Property to
C32/40 concrete. The Hook Point | Reference should be set to “0” and the
Y&Z coordinates to “0” and “1370”. Close the Define Section Element form with
✓ OK. Rename the SS2:Section to “Nominal”.
36. In the Structure Definition navigation window toolbar click on the button
and select “Design line” to open the Define Design Line form. Click the “+”
button. Select the Line radio button and click the “Next” button twice. Enter (-1,
6) for the co-ordinates of point 1 and (45, 6) for point 2. Click Next and ✓ OK
twice to close all the forms.
37. Click on the button and select “Carriageway” from the dropdown list to
open the Define Carriageway form. Set the fields to the selections and values
shown below. (Note that the traffic flow direction is indicated by a triangular
arrow head in each notional lane and clicking on each of the arrows until they
are double-headed will show that traffic can flow in either direction. However, in
this example we will leave the lanes as single direction). Click ✓ OK to close
the Define Carriageway form.
38. Add another Design Line with the co-ordinates (0, 0) for point 1 and (2, 12) for
point 2.
39. Click on the button and select 2D Sub Model (GCS, Z=0) from the list to
create a new sub-model. Select the sub-model, as shown below, and then
click on the button to select Construction Lines which will open the
Define Construction Lines form. Use the Offset Line Types to enter the
selections and values shown below. Click ✓ OK on the Define Construction
Lines form.
10-12
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
40. Click on the 2D Model A sub-model then click on the button and select
“Mesh” from the dropdown list. This opens the Define Mesh form.
41. Set the Mesh Type to “Skew”. Click on the four edges of the left-hand span,
starting with the bottom edge. Set the Longitudinal Number to “8” and the
Transverse Number to “13”.
42. Select “set spacing” in the Longitudinal field to open the Set Longitudinal
Spacing sub form. Set the values in this sub form to those shown below. Select
“set spacing” in the Transverse field to open the Set Longitudinal Spacing sub
form. Set the values in this sub form to those shown below. Set the Name to
“Span 1” and click ✓ OK on all the forms.
Set Longitudinal Spacing Set Transverse Spacing
43. Click on the 2D Model A sub-model then click on the button and select
“Mesh” from the dropdown list again. Click on the four edges of the left-hand
span, starting with the bottom edge then click on the Copy Mesh Details From
button and select the first mesh to give the same mesh spacing. Set the Name
to “Span 2” and close the form with ✓ OK.
44. Select Structure at the top of the Navigation window, click on the toolbar
button and select Span End Lines to open the Define Span End Lines form.
Click on the bottom left and top left-hand corners of the structure on the
graphics window. This will draw a heavy black line. Repeat this for the central
row of supports and the right-hand abutment to define the span end lines as
shown below. Click ✓ OK to close the form.
10-13
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
45. Select Structure at the top of the Navigation window, click on the toolbar
button and select Supported Nodes. Ensure that the Select: field is set to
“Along Span End Line” and select the nodes shown below.
46. With the Group Type set to “Uniform” set all restraints to “Free” except Direct
Restraint Z, which is “Fixed”. Now set the Group Type to “Variable” and click on
the node just above the centre of the left-hand abutment. Adjust this to be
“Fixed” in the X and Y directions. Then select the node just above the centre of
the right-hand abutment and adjust this to be “Fixed” in the Y direction. Click ✓
Grillage Section Properties

47. In the Structure Properties navigation window click on the Create Section and
Beam Groups task to create one instance of each of the Design Beams and
Design Section previously defined.
48. Select SP3: Inner Beam Span 1 in the navigation tree to open the Structure
Properties: Beam form for this Beam Reference. Change Type: to
“Transformed section”, and Beam Section Reference Axis Relative to: to
“origin”. The concrete beams are to be cracked for 15% of their length either
side of the central support, so set the value in the Cracked Section from
right/Proportion field to “0.15”. In the graphics window select the four inner
beams in the left-hand span. Click on ✓ OK to close the form.
10-14
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
49. Follow similar procedures to those in the previous step to assign the
appropriate section properties to the other beams.
50. Click on the Show 3D Elements view icon in the main toolbar to view the
elements of the structure in a 3D representation. It should be noted that the
south edge beams are back to front. This can be corrected by swapping the
property assignments and changing the orientation of the longitudinal beams.
51. In the Structure Properties navigation window select SP5: Edge Beam Span 1
and then assign this to the south edge beam of span 2 (Yes to overwrite). Also
do the same for SP6: Edge Beam Span 2 assigning it to span 1.
The direction of beams can be altered in the Structure Definition navigation

window by selecting Longitudinal Beams. This opens the Longitudinal Beams
form. Select the two southern edge beams (holding the <Ctrl> key for multiple
selections) and select “Reverse Order” in the Beam Tasks list. The orientation
of each beam is denoted by the small red arrow at the end of beam. Click ✓
OK to close the form. Check the 3D Elements view again.
52. In the Structure Properties navigation window select SP2: Nominal to open the
Structure Properties: Section form. Assign this section to the longitudinal
members at the extreme edges of the deck and change Section Reference
Axis Relative to: to “origin” before closing the form with ✓ OK.
53. Select SP1: Diaphragm in the navigation window, set the Reference Axis
Relative to: field to “origin” and assign this to the three transverse diaphragms
before closing the form.
54. Click on the button and select “Continuous slab” from the dropdown list.
This will open the Structure Properties: Continuous Slab form. Change the
Depth to “200mm” and Description to “Transverse Slab” and ensure that the
Material Property is the grade “32/40 property. Click on the Member selection
filter dropdown menu and select “Transverse Beams”. Draw a box around the
whole structure and answer “No to All” on the confirmation box that appears.
This stops the program form overwriting the diaphragm section assignments.
10-15
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Now remove the filter by clicking on the Member selection filter drop down and
selecting “Select All”. Click on ✓ OK to close the form.
55. Click on the 3D Element View icon to view the elements of the structure in
a 3D representation. Note that the transverse slab members are incorrectly
located at the soffit of the pre-cast beams.
56. In the Structure Definition navigation window. Click on the button and
select Advanced Beam Set | Eccentricities form the dropdown list to open
the Define Beam Eccentricities form. Click on the “+” button to add a row in the
table and enter a value of “1370” in the Start Z and End Z columns. Apply this
eccentricity to the transverse slab members which can be achieved by opening
the filter form to first Deselect all and then Select By “Structure Property” where
just the “Transverse Slab” property is selected before closing the filter form.
Drawing a window round the whole structure will then apply these offsets to
just the slab members. Close the Beam Eccentricities form with the ✓ OK
button.
57. Set the filter to “Select All” before using the 3D Element viewer to check the
outcome of these changes
Note that the members are now correctly located. Clicking on the Object
Browser tab below the Navigation Pane and selecting an element in the
graphics window displays detailed information about that element in the space
that is normally occupied by the Navigation Pane.
Grillage Basic Loading

The next step is to apply some basic superimposed dead and live loads to our
model, (the dead loads for concrete have already been input into the beam files
by means of transfer from the Line Beam module).
10-16
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
58. In the Structure Loads Navigation window click on the toolbar button and
select Bridge Deck Patch Load from the drop down list to open the Define
Bridge Deck Patch Loading form. Set Load per unit area to “2kN/m2” (press
the enter key to register it).
deselect “Design / Setting Out Lines”, “Construction Lines” and “Beam
Elements” (click on the Objects tab if it does not open when the mouse pointer
is moved over it). The graphics now shows the carriageway and span end
lines. Click on the bottom edge of the main carriageway, the right hand span
end line, the top edge of the carriageway and the left hand span end line. (See
the screen shot on the following page for details of the carriageway edge
locations). This will apply a patch to the carriageway. Change Name to “SDL –
Carriageway”. Click ✓ OK to close the form.
60. Create a second Bridge Deck Path Load with a Load per unit area of “3kN/m2”.
61. Click on the bottom edge of the south verge, the right hand span end line, the
top edge of the south verge and the left hand span end line. This will apply a
patch to the south verge. Change Name to “SDL – South Verge” then click ✓
62. Repeat the process for the north verge to assign a Bridge Deck Patch Load of
3kN/m2 as shown below.
10-17
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
The next step is to define an SDL barrier load.
select “Beam Elements”. Click on the button and select Beam Member
Load| Beam Element Load from the drop down list to open the Define Beam
Loading form. In the first row of the table set Load Type to “F Uniform”,
Direction to “Global Z”, Load Value to “Length” and Load W1 to “-1.3kN/m”.
64. On the graphics window, click on the filter drop down and select
“Longitudinal Beams”. Draw boxes around the edge longitudinal beams to
assign the loads. Press <Ctrl-A> on the keyboard to remove the filter.
65. Change Name to “SDL - Barriers” and click on ✓ OK to close the Define Beam
Loading form.
The next step is to create SDL compilations for ULS and SLS.
66. In the Structure Compilations navigation window click on the toolbar button
and select Superimposed Dead Load to open the Compile Loading Patterns
form. Set the Limit State field to “ULS STR/GEO” and click the Find and Add to
Table button to add all the basic loads into the table. Change the Name to
“SDL ULS” and click on ✓ OK to close the form.
10-18
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Right click on compilation “C1: SDL ULS” on the Navigation Pane, then select
Copy to create a duplicate of the first compilation. On the Compile Loading
Patterns form, change Limit State to “SLS Characteristic” and click on “Yes” in
the confirmation dialog. Change the Name to “SDL SLS” and click on ✓ OK to
close the form.
Grillage Traffic Load Optimisation

The next task is to create some influence surfaces and generate live load
patterns using the load optimisation in the program. The first step is to define
the influence surfaces we want to generate, which are bending moment
influences at each point along one inner beam in span 1.
Surface Generation form. Set Pick Mode to “Longitudinal Beam” then click on
the inner beam located just above the centre of the deck in the left-hand span
in the graphics window. This will define 13 influence surfaces for My Sagging.
10-19
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
The next step is to analyse the structure to generate the influence surfaces.
68. Set Generate by to “Reciprocal” and click on the  Analyse button. A progress
box will open. Click on the ✓ Done button when the analysis has completed.
The graphics window will now show the influence surface for the first member
selected. Change the view to isometric then click the first line in the Name
column on the Influence Surface Generation form. Use the up and down
cursor keys on the keyboard to move through the influence surfaces.
For each influence surface an optimised traffic load pattern can be created for
different types of Eurocode load combination. Each load pattern is defined as
an ASBD load compilation.
the Road Traffic Load Optimisation form.
70. In the Groups and Limit States area click on the button and select “Clear All”
before expanding the ULS-STR/GEO (B) and SLS Characteristic groups to
select both gr1a and gr5 in each. As the gr5 combination has been selected it
is necessary to specify the type of Load Model 3 Special Vehicle(s) which in
this case should be SV80 only. Ensure that the Scope field on the Key data
tab is set to “Both” to ensure both sagging and hogging load patterns are
generated.
71. Click on the  Compile Loading Patterns button to run the load optimisation.
10-20
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Details of the load optimisation run will be shown together with the loads
created both on the form and in the graphics window. (2 notes may appear on
the Results Viewer regarding the SV80 influence surface which are for
information and can be ignored i.e. close the results viewer).
72. Use ✓ OK on the load optimisation forms to close it and save the loads and
compilations that have been created.
With some small modifications the data in the influence table can be
used to create influences for shear force.
73. In the first row of the Effect column, change “Moment” to “Shear Forces” and
respond with “Yes” when asked if all other points below this are to be changed.
10-21
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
In the first row of the Start/End column change “Start” to “End” and then delete
the very last row in the table (it is not possible to use the reciprocal method for
shear at nodes that are supported)
74. Click on the Run Optimisation... button to open the Road Traffic Load
Optimisation form and then click on the  Compile Loading Patterns button to
run the load optimisation as all the parameters are the same. In the
confirmation window select “No” to deleting the previously generated loads.
Use ✓ OK on the load optimisation forms to close it and save the loads and
compilations that have been created and also close the Influence Surface
Generation form with ✓ OK.
The next task is to solve all the load cases.
75. In the main menu select Calculate | Analyse Structure... where the Activate
Loading Sets form will open. This allows you to select which loading sets you
want to solve. Each time the load optimisation is run, a new loading set is
automatically generated for the load cases produced by that run so in this case
there will be two cases. The list also includes any load cases not included in a
loading set (as Unassigned Load Cases). Make sure all tick boxes are ticked
and click ✓ OK.
76. The program will open a form showing the progress of the analysis. Once the
analysis has completed, click on the ✓ Done button.
It is good practice to inspect the results produced in the analysis, to

check that they make sense, before transferring them to the design
beam load tables.
77. In the main menu select File | Results... to open the Results Viewer. Click on
the Result Type drop down and select “Compilation” from the list of options. In
the Name dropdown select compilation C7 (which is an SLS compilation), set
the Result for to “Joint” and Effect to “Displacements and Rotations”.
78. It is required to inspect the results with other permanent load effects at SLS
added. (Note that in this model we can only add in SDL because the self-
10-22
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
weight of the concrete is only included in the individual Pre-stress beam files).
Click on the Dead Load Compilations dropdown and tick C2. This will add the
effects of this compilation to compilation C7 and show the displacements for
the load cases in the two compilations applied together.
The load pattern causing this displacement can also be displayed by clicking
on the icon in the graphics toolbar, as shown, and the resolved nodal loads
from this loading displayed by ticking Show Joint Loading.
Filtering can be applied to limit the results to certain parts of the structure, for
example, a line of edge members.
79. Click on the Result For dropdown and select “Beam” from the list. In the Name
field, select compilation C6. Click on the Filter toolbar to open the Member
Selection Filter form. Click on De-select all then set Pick Mode to “Longitudinal
Beam”. Change the graphics view to plan and click on the bottom edge beam
in span 1. Click on ✓ OK to close the filter form and change the view back to
isometric. The graphics now shows a plot of the Z member end forces.
We can also overlay a bending moment diagram on the plot.
80. To do this, click on the Results for dropdown menu on the graphics toolbar (not
in the header). You will see tick boxes next to each result type with Fz already
ticked. Tick the My option as well to add the bending moment diagram to the
plot.
81. The scale is a bit small for the plot so move the mouse over to the Results tab
on the right hand side of the graphics and tick both the Specify Scale tick
boxes. Enter values of 10kN and 50kNm in the two boxes. The Results Viewer
will now look like this:
10-23
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
We can also look at the joint displacements for all compilations for the centre
joint of span 1.
82. To do this, change Result For to “Joint” then click on the Edit | Multiple
Results Selection menu item. This will open the Multiple Results Selection
and Include Controller form.
83. Click on the “Select All” button then un-tick the first two compilations. Click on
✓ OK to close the form and display the displacements for the selected
compilations. All the displacements are there but they are grouped by
compilation.
If it was required to establish the max negative DZ displacement for one

particular node over all live load compilations (without having to create an
10-24
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
envelope), say node 46, then the table could be ungrouped and the table
sorted so the max was at the top.
84. Drag Including Dead Load Compilations and Compilation Name off the orange
bar to ungroup the results.
85. Click on the Customize... button at the top right of the results table. On the
Filter Builder form click on the button marked press the button to add a new
condition then click on the green text and select “Joint”. Click on the blue text
which says <empty> and type “46” then click on the ✓ OK button.
86. Set the Results For: drop down menu on the graphics toolbar to “Joint
Displacement-DZ”. Click once on the DZ column header to sort the list from low
to high, then scroll to the top to see the maximum negative displacement for
joint 46.
87. To see which compilation produces this displacement, additional columns can
be added to the table. Click on the menu option to the left of the Reference
heading in the results table. Tick “Compilation” then click on the menu below
and tick “Name” and “Ref”.
10-25
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
The load optimisation was carried out for one longitudinal beam so the program
automatically created bending moment envelopes for that particular beam. To
see these enveloped results:
88. Click on the Result Type drop down and select “Envelope”. The Name field
should show envelope E1. Click on the Filter button then De-select all, set Pick
Mode to “Longitudinal Beam” and click on the inner beam just above the centre
of the deck in span 1 on the screen. Click on ✓ OK to close the filter form. Put
your mouse over the Results tab on the right of the graphics and untick the two
Specify Scale tick boxes. Put your mouse over the General tab and tick the
Result tick box. This will show the maximum My moment.
10-26
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
89. Finally, close the Results Viewer.
Transfer Grillage results to beam file

The analysis results can now be transferred to the pre-stress concrete beam
design load effects tables. There are three basic methods of transferring
results that can be chosen for this example
• Embed the linked beam and transfer the results to the beam tables in
the current project.
• Transfer the results directly to the linked beams which will update the
linked beam files.
• Transfer the results to an intermediate ASCI .sld file which can then be
imported into the beam tables at a later time
In this example the first method will be used so that the resulting tables can be
seen instantly and design checks carried out in the project. The embedded
design beam can then be linked to the existing beam file which will of course
be updated with the current data. This will ensure that any other project linked
to this file (eg the line beam analysis, saved earlier) will automatically see these
changes
90. In the Design Beams navigation window select the linked beam “Inner Beam
Span 1” then in the navigation toolbar click on the icon to break the link and
embed the data
91. In the main menu select Calculate | Transfer Results ... to open the Transfer
Results form. In the graphics window click on the inner beam just north of the
centre of the deck in span 1. It will be highlighted in red. It is now required to
10-27
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
match envelopes/compilations produced during the analysis with design load

cases in the Design Beam.
92. Starting with SDL cases, add two lines of data using the “+” button at the
bottom of the table. In the Design | Load Case column select “Surfacing 1” in
both rows. In the Type column select “Compilation” in both rows and in the
Structural Analysis | Load Case column, select SDL ULS in the first row and
“SDL SLS” in the second. The Factors will be automatically set to 1 in the
appropriate column. Change Name: to “SDL Inner Beam Span 1”
93. Create an additional transfer set by using the button at the top right of the
form, select the same beam in the graphics and change the Name: to
“Moments inner Beam Span 1”. Add eight lines of data using the “+” button at
the bottom of the table as there will be four sagging cases and four hogging
cases and select entries in each field as shown below:
94. Create an additional transfer set and change the Name: to “Shear inner Beam
Span 1”. Add four lines of data using the “+” button at the bottom of the table
as there will be four shear envelopes and select entries in each field as shown
below:
10-28
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
95. Click on the Transfer Results button and select “Transfer All Sets” to transfer
the results to the beam design tables. Use ✓ OK to close the Transfer Results
form.
96. In the Design Beams navigation window it can be observed that all of the Beam
Loads tables are now available for inspection and subsequent code checking.
It should be noted that each of the gr1a traffic loading cases has been split into
three components, one for the UDL, another for the Tandem system (TS) and
the third the footway load. The reason for this is that each component may
have different psi factors when combining it with other variable actions when
looking at different design checks.
To display the load effects that have just been transferred, in tabular and
graphical form, just click on the load table in the navigation window and it will
be displayed.
10-29
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Beam Analysis/Design
97. In the Design Beams navigation window toolbar click on the analyse icon to
open the Pre-tensioned Beam Analysis form and then set the Analyse for: field
to “Transfer”.
This shows that the design stresses in the bottom of the beam far exceed the
limiting compressive stress for this age of concrete. There are a number of
design changes that can be utilised to correct this (removing tendons,
debonding tendons, changing material properties etc) but in this example the
tendon optimisation can be used to see if there is a good solution by just
removing and debonding some tendons.
98. Click on the Tendon Optimisation button on the analysis form and then dismiss
the information message displayed. Tick the four Applied Load boxes and the
Debond option but un-tick the Straight box. All other default data is acceptable
so click on the Design Optimised Layout button.
It may take a few minutes to complete the optimisation and a few warning
messages may be displayed (which can be accepted)
10-30
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
99. Close the Tendon Optimisation form with ✓ OK and the affect of the optimised
tendon layout is immediately obvious showing that the stresses are now
acceptable
100. All other design checks can then be carried out to ensure compliance with
stress limits etc. by changing the various parameters on the Analysis form.
For instructions on how to carry out these various checks on the design beam,
in accordance with Eurocodes, see Section 5.2 of this Examples Manual.
101. Once all the checks (and changes if necessary) have been made, close the
Pre-tensioned Beam Analysis form with ✓ OK.
102. To save all Design Beam changes to the original linked Design Beam file the
embedded beam can be changed to a linked Design Beam using the same
name as the original design beam file. This will update the data in this file to
reflect the changes made in this project.
103. Finally, use the main menu File | Save As... to save the project data to a file
called “My EU Example 10.1 Grillage.sst” and close the program.
10-31
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
10.2. Steel Composite “Banana” Farm Access Bridge

Subjects Covered:
Composite beam structures; FE webs; 3D structures; virtual members; member
eccentricities; joint editing;
Outline
This access bridge is constructed with two steel plate girders supported on “H” piles
acting compositely with a concrete slab. The top flange of the beam has an arched
profile and it is deeper in the centre than at the ends.
The slab, diaphragm and upstand are created with grade C32/40 concrete and the
girder with grade 355 structural steel.
The structure is modelled using a 3D shell finite element slab (curved in elevation)
with a steel composite beam inserted as an FE web beam to explicitly model the web
as finite elements and the flanges as beam elements. Upstands are added as edge
beam members with the appropriate vertical offset and the diaphragm is represented
with finite elements.
The beam, a 30m span, is assumed to be continuous at its ends as there will be some
hogging at this location and this will affect the effective breadth of concrete flange.
The adjacent spans (the piles) are assumed to be 4m long and fixed into rock at the
remote end.
10-32
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
The girder has uniform thickness of web and flanges throughout (28mm & 50mm
respectively) and the flanges are 500mm wide. The overall depth is set to 1000mm
deep but with a sagging profile such that the overall depth at the ends is 500mm. This
is done with 20 straight segments, as the curved profile is limited to hogging shapes.
The profile points are not exactly on a circular curve but are close to it.
The slab in the beam representation is 2m wide and 0.2m thick, but is offset by 0.5m.
An edge upstand 200mm wide and 250mm deep is added above each edge of the
slab and is assumed to be structural and cast with the slab.
Profile of Top Of Beam

0.00 0.00
1.50 0.19
3.00 0.36
4.50 0.51
6.00 0.64
7.50 0.75
9.00 0.84
10.50 0.91
12.00 0.96
13.50 1.00
15.00 1.00
16.50 1.00
18.00 0.96
19.50 0.91
21.00 0.84
22.50 0.75
24.00 0.64
25.50 0.51
27.00 0.36
Mid Span Section 28.50 0.19
30.00 0.00
The carriageway on the bridge is a single lane of 3.8m, centred on the deck, with no
footway or verges.
10-33
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Procedure
The general procedure is as follows:
• Create a Beam for a composite girder and add tiles etc
o Define the materials needed
o Define a composite design beams representing the north girder
o Save the beam for subsequent use in a structural project.
• Create a structural project and add title etc.
• Define a design beam in the project using the save file and embed the data
(which will add material properties to the project)
• Create a 2D sub-model consisting of a flat 2d finite element slab and the

edge upstand beams
• Change the 2D sub-model to 3D and adjust vertical coordinates to give a

vertically curved slab.
• Create design section in the project to represent the upstand and the piles.
• Assign the composite girders to the structure as “FE Web” members and
the edge section to the edge beam elements.
• Define two 2D sub-models containing the piles and diaphragms and assign
properties and supports
• Define dead load and SDL load cases and compilations
• Live load optimisation for one point on the south main girder
• Analyse the structure/load cases.
• Transfer the results to the design beam load effect tables.
• Perform one or two design checks.
10-34
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Beam Definition
Only one girder needs to be defined (the north one) as it can be mirrored for
the south girder.
1. Start the program and create a new beam using the main menu File | New |
Create from template selecting “EU Steel Composite” from the list.
2. Use the main menu File | Titles... to set a title for the beam as “Composite
banana beam” with a sub title of “Example 10.2”, a Job Number of “10.2” and
add your initials in the Calculations by: field before closing with ✓ OK.
3. In the navigation window delete the concrete material C40/50 and

the prestress material Grade 1637 by selecting them, one by one, and using
the navigation toolbar button ; which will leave three materials. Open the
structural steel S355/355 material and change the Yield Strength to “345” to
make it S355/345 before closing the form with ✓ OK.
4. Define a second structural steel material S355/335.
5. In the navigation window select the item Beam Definition to

open the Define Composite Beam form. Set the MAIN SPAN to be
“Continuous-internal span” with a span of 30m and the SIDE SPANS as “End
spans” with spans of 4.0m (accept the warning message about spans being
outside expected range). Set the Cross section to “uniform” and the Location
as “Inner beam”.
6. In the Define field select “Section” to open the Composite Beam Section
Definition form. Create a “Hybrid Girder - I” component with “500mm” wide
flanges and a “1000mm” depth overall. The thickness of flange and web are
“50mm” and “28mm” respectively. Close the Component form using the ✓ OK
button.
7. Click in the Property field for this component which allows different grades of
steel to be assigned to each plate component. Assign S355/345 to the web
and S355/335 to both flanges.
8. Create a second component as a “Concrete Slab” setting the slab Width to be

2000mm and the Depth to be 200mm. Close the component form using the ✓
OK button. In the Slab Details set the Y offset to be 0.5m. Now add a third
10-35
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
component as “Concrete Edge” and create 5 coordinate points by using the “+”
button at the bottom of the form and entering the data as shown below:
9. Close the User Defined Edge Detail form with the ✓ OK button and ensure the
material properties are assigned correctly (grade C32/40 concrete) and that the
edge detail is structural and it is cast with the slab.
10. Close the Section Definition form. Note and click Yes on the confirm form.
11. Open the Define soffit profile form using the appropriate option in the Define
field. Enter the profile points into the table as shown below:
Proportion of
Offset (mm)
span
0.0 500
0.1 320
0.2 180
0.3 80
0.4 20
0.5 0
0.6 20
0.7 80
0.8 180
0.9 320
1.0 500
10-36
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
The general beam has now been defined – lateral restraints, web stiffeners and
shear connecters may be added in the design stage.
12. Close all the open forms (using the ✓ OK button) and save the file as “My EU
Example 10_2 banana_beam.sam” using the File | Save as... menu option.
Project Setup Including Design Beam and Sections

The first steps in creating the structural model can now be taken by defining
the design Sections to be used and setting up the flat slab 30m long by 4m
wide. There will be 20 equally spaced elements longitudinally and 6 elements
transversely, with the edge element 0.5m and the internal element 0.75m.
13. Begin a new project using the main menu File | New | Create From
Template... and selecting “EU Project” from the options.
14. In the Titles form add a Project Title of “Composite Banana Bridge” with a sub-
title “EU Example 10.2” and Job Number: “10.2”. Add your initials in the
Calculations by: field.
15. In the navigation window delete all the materials using the Clear
All task as the required materials will be defined when the beam file is imported
16. In the navigation window toolbar click on to add an “Existing

Design Beam” and select the beam file “EU Example 10_2
Banana_beam.sam”. Then click on the toolbar to embed the beam (also
creating the project materials)
17. In the navigation window click on the button, select New

Section | Parametric Shape and add a rectangular parametric shape, 200mm
wide by 250mm deep . Set the Hook Point Reference to 1 with coordinates Y
“0” and Z “100” (to give it the correct elevation with respect to the slab centre).
Set the property to the C32/40 concrete material before closing the form with ✓
OK. Rename this Design Section to “Edge Upstand” using the right mouse
button in the navigation window.
10-37
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
It is also necessary to define a Design Section for the “H” shaped piles, again
using a parametric shape.
18. Click on the toolbar button to select New Section | Parametric Shape...
Set Shape Reference to H and enter a width and height of 450mm. Enter a
thickness of 28mm for both horizontal and vertical and change Property to
“S355/345”. The Hook Point Reference should be set to “0” with Y and Z
Coordinates of “0” and “0”. Close the form with ✓ OK and then rename the
section in the navigation window to “H Piles”.
Creating the flat slab

19. In the main menu, select Data | Structure Type | Refined Analysis to ensure
this is the current structure type.
20. In the navigation window toolbar click on to create a

new 2D sub-model (GCS, z=0.0) to the structure.
21. Add a new mesh to this sub-model and create a Finite Element mesh using a
Mesh Type of “Orthogonal to span” and pick mode “by point”. (Remember to
set the Member Type: radio button to “Finite Elements”). Set the Snap mode to
“Grid” in the graphics window tool bar and click on the appropriate grid points in
the graphic window to define the boundary of the slab (30m x 4m). The display
of the coordinates in the top right hand corner can be used for guidance.
22. Set the number of elements transversely to 6 and longitudinally to 20 then

change the “Equal Size” option for the transverse elements to “Set Size”. In
the Set Transverse Size form that should now be visible set the spacing factors
as shown below for the elements and then close this form with the ✓ OK
button. Change the Name: of the mesh to “Slab” and close the meshing form
in the usual way. A warning message about aspect ratio size may be
displayed which will be acceptable so click on Continue.
10-38
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
23. The next step is to add beam members along the edges of the slab to
represent the upstand. This is done by clicking on “Sub Model Members” in the
navigation window which opens the Define Sub Model Members form so that
additional members can be created.
24. In the graphics window click on the toolbar button to draw a single member .
Then click on the bottom left corner node of the mesh and then again on the
bottom right node to draw one member. Repeat this on the top edge of the
mesh. These members can then be split into 20 beam element segments by
using the Split Beam Element task in the Define Sub Model Members form.
10-39
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
25. In the split beam elements form select the at nodes along element option, click
on the edge beam and then click on the Apply button. Dismiss the information
window and repeat for the beam on the top edge of the mesh and then close
both forms with ✓ OK.
26. At this stage it is worth saving the slab model as an intermediate data file so
that we can come back to this stage if necessary. Close all the open forms in
the normal way and save the model as “My EU Example 10_2 Slab.sst”.
Creating the curved slab

The next step is to alter the z coordinates of the slab nodes to represent the
curved profile. To do this the 2D sub model needs converting to a 3D sub
model (losing all details of the mesh).
27. This is done by clicking on the sub model in the Navigation Window and, by
using the right mouse button, choosing the menu option Convert to 3D sub
model. Confirm the conversion when asked.
28. Open up the Joint Details form by clicking on this item in the Navigation Pane
and ensure the view direction is a plan view. Draw a selection window round
the left most transverse row of joints to select them. These joints will be
displayed as red. Hold the “Ctrl” key down and draw a selection window round
the right most transverse row of joints to add these to the selection set. Click
on the Edit... joint task to display a secondary form to allow editing of the
coordinates.
29. Choose the Specific value option and enter “-1.000” in the Z field before
clicking on the “Apply” button
10-40
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
30. Without closing the Edit Joint Coordinates data Row of Z Coord (m)
form, select the second column of joints from each joint
end in the same way as before, and change the z 1 -1.000
coordinate to “-0.810” before clicking the “Apply” 2 -0.810
button. 3 -0.640
4 -0.490
31. Repeat this with appropriate Z values (given in the 5 -0.360
6 -0.250
table) for the other columns of joints. Close the 7 -0.160
Edit Joint Coordinates form and use the graphic 8 -0.090
toolbar button to set the view as isometric. 9 -0.040
10 0.000
32. Close the Joint Details form in the normal way. 11 0.000
Before moving away from the curved slab geometry it is worth checking the
local axis directions of the finite elements and beams as the rules for elements
not in a global plane are different to those that are.
33. Click on the General button on the right side of the graphics window and tick
the Local Axis box. Some of the finite elements may have different direction to
the others, depending on the order in which they were generated, and to
ensure that any propertied assigned and results output are sensible then it is
necessary to make them consistent.
34. In the navigation window, first click on Structure and then

use to add an Advanced FE set | Local Axes which will open the Specify
FE Local Axes Set form. Type should be set to “by Plane” and Orientate
Element w.r.t. set to “Plane XY”. Window round the entire slab in the graphics
window to apply this to all the finite elements and then in the Confirm form
select “Yes to All” and then close the data form with ✓ OK.
The deck slab geometry is now complete so a design line, carriageway and
span end lines can be added to the structure definition. The local axes display
can now be turned off if required.
35. In the navigation window click on Structure and use the toolbar button and
select Design Line to open the Define Design line form. The structure will be
displayed in an xy view. Click on the middle node at the left hand edge of the
structure, then on the middle joint at the right hand edge of the slab to create a
design line “DL1”. Click on ✓ OK to close the Define Design Line form.
36. To create the carriageway use the button (when Structure is highlighted)
and select Carriageway. In the Define Carriageway form set the design line to
“DL1” and change the offsets to +/- 1.9m on either side of the design line for
both footway and carriageway. Click on ✓ OK to close the Carriageway form.
37. The two span end lines are added in a similar way and are best created by
opening the Span End Lines form, inserting two rows in the table and entering
the four coordinates manually (0,0) (0,4) (30,0) (30,4). Click on ✓ OK when the
span end lines have been defined.
10-41
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
38. Close the data forms in the normal way and save the data file as “My EU
Example 10_2 Curved Slab.sst”.
Assigning the composite beam

39. In the navigation window click on the button and select
FE Web from the list. To allow cracked concrete properties to be assumed in
the end hogging regions of the slab, the field Proportion from left/right can be
entered at “0.06” (i.e. just over one element). Set Name to “North Girder”,
change to a plan view and click on the bottom edge of one of the top row
elements. Accept the two information messages.
40. Click on the Add Additional FE Web... button (accepting the information
message about aspect ratios) and tick the Mirror Design Beam button.
41. Set Name: to “South Girder” and click on the top edge of one of the bottom row
elements and accept the information message, then close the form. Click ✓ OK
on the Define FE Web form and accept the information message about aspect
ratios.
42. There should be no changes to be made but, it is worth inspecting the section
properties that have been created in the process of assigning FE Web
members by using the navigation window
10-42
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
43. In the navigation window click on the button and

select Design Section to open the Structure Properties: Section data form.
Select a Section Reference of “Edge Upstand”, the Section Reference Axis
Relative to to “Origin” and then window round both the north and south edge of
the structure before closing the form with ✓ OK.
44. Use the main menu File | 3D Elements View to view a 3D representation of
the structure as it stands.
It should be noted that the upstand on the south edge of the structure is not
situated correctly in a lateral position. To rectify this, a longitudinal beam
(string of beam elements) can be created for this edge and then reversed.
45. In the navigation window select Longitudinal Beams to

open the Longitudinal Beams form. Window round the south edge beam, to
create a longitudinal beam between span end lines, and then in the Beam
Tasks click on Reverse Order to change the direction of the local axes of these
beams. Now the 3D elements view will show the corrected location of the edge
beams.
46. The next step is to modify the virtual members, created when the FE webs
were defined, to include the upstand edge beam members. To do this, go to
the Calculate | Define Virtual Member menu item. Change to a plan view and
make sure the pick mode is set to “Beam Element”. Select “FE Web A” and
draw a box around the top edge of the slab. Repeat the process for “FE Web
B”, selecting the bottom edge. Rename “FE Web A” and “FE Web B” to “North
Girder” and “South Girder” respectively, by selecting and overtyping. Then
close the Define Virtual Member form with ✓ OK.
Adding the pile and diaphragm sub models

The next step is to define the pile and diaphragm sub models which can be
achieved by creating a 2D sub-model in the vertical plane along the east
abutment. This can then be copied to the west abutment.
47. In the navigation window toolbar click on the button to

select 2D Sub Model and lick on the YZ button then click ✓ OK.
48. Click on “Sub Model Members” in the 2D Sub Model: 2D Model A object to
open the Define Sub Model Members form. Click on the Single Member
draw mode toolbar button and click on the bottom left hand node on the beam
web. Click on the Draw to a specific position or offset toolbar button then
click on the Offset value button. Enter a v offset of “-4m”. Repeat the process
to define the other pile.
49. Click on Split Beam Element from the list of Member Tasks then click on the by
specified divisions button, set the number of new elements to 8, then click on
the “Apply” button. Click on the first pile and click on the “Apply” button again,
then close both the forms.
10-43
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
50. Click on 2D Sub Model: 2D Model A in the navigation window then click on the
to select “Mesh” from the drop down list. Set the Member type to “Finite
Elements”, the Transverse Number to “2” and the Longitudinal Number to “4”.
Set Pick to “by point”.
51. On the graphics window put the mouse on the General tab and tick the Show
Nodes option. The nodes will show up as blue dots. Set the Snap mode to
“Node in Plane” and click on the 4 nodes highlighted in the screenshot below,
starting with the bottom left then bottom right, top right and top left. This will
create a finite element mesh. Change the Name to “Diaphragm” and close the
Define Sub-Model Members form with ✓ OK and clicking “Yes” on the confirm
form.
52. In the navigation window click on the button and

select Design Section to open the Structure Properties: Section data form.
Select a Section Reference of “H Pile”, and set the Section Reference Axis
Relative to: to “Origin”; then window round the whole structure. This will try to
apply this section to all beams in the structure, so select “No to All” when asked
if beams already assigned should be overwritten. This will ensure that only the
pile members will be assigned. Close the form with ✓ OK.
53. Click on the toolbar button again and select Finite Element from the
dropdown list. Set Thickness to “500mm” and then select the 8 finite elements
in the diaphragm. Change Description to “Diaphragm and close the forms.
54. In the navigation window use the button to add

Supported Nodes. Change the Select field on the graphics toolbar to “All
Joints” and click on the two bottom nodes of the piles. Fix the joints in all six
directions then click ✓ OK to close the form.
55. The next step is to copy the sub model to the other end of the structure. Right
click on 2D Sub Model: 2D Model A and select “Copy” from the popup menu.
Click on the Define button and set X to be “30m”, leaving Y and Z at their
current values. Click on the “Next” button 3 times on the Define Plane form
and then the ✓ OK button. Click on the “Next” button on the Copy Sub Model
form to copy the sub model. A summary of the new members, elements, joints
10-44
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
and supports created is then displayed. Click on ✓ OK to close the Copy Sub
Model form.
56. Click on the Show advanced model view icon to view the elements of the
structure in a 3D representation. Clicking on the Object Browser tab below the
Navigation Pane and selecting an element in the graphics window displays
detailed information about that element in the space that is normally occupied
by the Navigation Pane. Note that unless the Filter is set to “Select all” then not
all of the members will be rendered in the 3D representation.
57. Save the file as “My EU Example 10_2 Full Structure.sst”.
Adding dead and superimposed dead load

The next step is to define the dead and superimposed dead loads.
58. In the navigation window click on the toolbar button

and select Beam Member Load | Beam Element Load from the drop down
list.
59. Click on the toolbar button then click on “De-select all”. Set Select By to
“Structure Property” and add “Steel Flanges”, “H Piles” and “Steel Web” to the
Selected Groups list. Click on the “Save” button and save the member
selection as “Steel only” before closing the Member Selection Filter form.
Change Direction to “Global Z” in the first row of the table, Load Value to
“Volume”, Load W1 to “-77” and the Name to “Steel Dead Loads (Beam)” .
Draw a box around the entire structure before closing the Define Beam
Loading form.
60. Click on the toolbar button and select “Finite Element Load | External
Load”. Change the Load Type to “Force/volume”, Direction to “Global Z”, Load
to “-77” and Name to “Steel Dead Loads (FE)”. Draw a box around the entire
structure and then close the Define Finite Element Loading form.
61. Click on the toolbar button and add another Beam Member Load | Beam
Element Load. Click on the toolbar button and de-select all. Set Select By
to “Structure Property” and add “Edge Upstand”, “Cracked Slab”, “Slab” and
“Diaphragm” to the Selected Groups. Click on the “Save” button, and save the
selection as “Concrete Only” before closing the Member Selection Filter form.
Change Direction to “Global Z”, Load Value to “Volume”, Load W1 to “-25” and
the Name to “Concrete Dead Loads (Beam)”. Draw a box around the structure
to select all the concrete beams before closing the Define Beam Loading form.
62. Click on the toolbar button and select “Finite Element Load | External Load”.
Change the Load Type to “Force/volume”, Direction to “Global Z”, Load to “-25”
and Name to “Concrete Dead Loads (FE)”. Draw a box around the entire
structure and then close the Define Finite Element Loading form.
10-45
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
63. The next step is to define the dead load compilations. In the
navigation window, click on the button and choose
“Dead Loads at Stage 1”. Set the Limit State field to “ULS STR/GEO” and then
click on the Find and Add to Table button to populate the table. The gamma
factors for the Steel dead loads will need changing to “1.2”. Set the name to
“DL ULS” and close the form.
64. This process needs to be repeated for SLS. Click on the button and
choose “Dead Loads at Stage 1”. Change Limit State to “SLS Characteristic”
then click on the Find and Add to Table button. Set the name to “DL SLS” and
then close the form.
65. The next step is to define the superimposed dead loads. In the
navigation window toolbar click on and select “Bridge
Deck Patch Load”. Change Define Loading by to “coordinate” and Load per
unit area to “2kN.m2”. Change Snap mode in the graphics window to
“Intersection” and click on the four corners of the deck to define the patch (the
original point needs selecting again at the end). Change Name to “Surfacing”
and then close the form.
66. In the navigation window click on the toolbar button

and select “Superimposed Dead Loads”. Set the Limit State field to “ULS
STR/GEO” and then click on the “+” button to add a new line. Click in the Load
Name drop down list and select “L5: Surfacing”.. Set the name to “SDL ULS”
and close the form.
67. Right click on “C3: SDL ULS STR/GEO” on the Navigation Pane and select
“Copy”. Change Limit State to “SLS Characteristic” and answer “Yes” when
prompted to change the factors. Change the name to “SDL SLS” and close the
form.
68. Use the Member selection filter function to select all members. Save the file as
“My EU Example 10_2 Dead and SDL.sst”.
Automated loading using influence surfaces

The next step is to create a bending moment influence surface for a particular
point on the south girder and generate a live load pattern that will produce the
worst effect.
69. To do this, select the Data | Influence Surface menu item. Set the Pick Mode
to “Virtual Member Element”. Change the graphics view to plan and click on
the location indicated by the arrow below:
10-46
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
This will add virtual member element 2-11 to the list of influence surfaces to be
generated. Set the Method field to “(1) Smoothed”.
70. Click on the  Analyse button to create the influence surface. When the
analysis is completed the influence surface will be displayed on the graphics.
Click on the “Done” button.
71. Set Type to “Road Traffic” and then click on the Run Optimisation... button to
open the Road Traffic Load Optimisation to BS EN 1991-2-2003 (UK Annex)
form. In the Groups and Limit States list ensure that only “gr5” in both the ULS
STR/GEO (B) and SLS Characteristic sections are ticked. In the Load Model 3
10-47
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Special Vehicles field tick “SV80”. Click on the  Compile Loading Patterns
button to run the load optimisation.
Details of the load optimisation run will be shown together with the loads
created both on the form and in the graphics window.
Click on ✓ OK on the load optimisation and influence surface generation forms

to save the loads that have been created.
72. It is now necessary to analyse the load cases that have been created. In the
main menu select Calculate | Analyse Structure, which will open the Activate
Loading Sets form. Each run of the load optimisation will create its own
loading set, so this form can be used to select which load optimisation runs we
10-48
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
want to produce results for. In this case there is only one run so leave the form
as it is and click ✓ OK which will start the analysis and progress will be
displayed in a status box. When the analysis is complete click on the ✓ Done
button.
73. Save the file as “My EU Example 10_2 Dead SDL Influence.sst”
Transfer analysis results to the beam design module

74. The next step is to transfer the results of the analysis to the appropriate design
beam which can be done by selecting the Calculate | Transfer Results menu
item. This will open the Transfer Results form.
75. Click on the graphics window anywhere along the reference axis of the south
girder to highlight the virtual member that will be used to determine what results
will be transferred to the design beam tables.
The selected beam will be highlighted and its details shown in the Transfer
Results form.
76. Click on “+” button at the bottom of the table to create six blank rows of data
The Method field should be set to “(1) Smoothed” for this example.
77. Click in the first row of the Design | Load Case column and select “Construction
stage 1”. Click in the Type column and select “Compilation”. Click in the
10-49
hange E hange E
XC di XC di
F- t F- t
PD
PD
or
or
!
!
W
W
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
U
U
B
B
to
to
ww
ww
om
om
k
k
lic
lic
C
C
.c
.c
w
w
tr re tr re
.
.
ac ac
Structural Analysis | Load Case column and select “C1: DL ULS”. Repeat the
process in the second row, this time setting Structural Analysis | Load Case to
“C2: DL SLS”.
78. In the third row set Design | Load Case “Surfacing 1”, Type to “Compilation”
and Structural Analysis | Load Case to “C3: SDL ULS”. Repeat the process in
the fourth row, this time setting Structural Analysis | Load Case to “C4: SDL
SLS”.
79. In the fifth row, set Design | Load Case to “Traffic gr1b-gr5 +ve Moment 1”,
Type to “Compilation” and Structural Analysis | Load Case to “C5: VM2-11; My
Sagging; GR5 ULS STR/GEO”. Repeat the process in the sixth row, this time
setting Structural Analysis | Load Case to “C6: VM2-11; My Sagging; GR5 SLS
Characteristic”.
The table in the Transfer Results form will now look like this:
80. The Current Set can now be transferred to the EU steel composite design
beam by using the Transfer Results button.
81. The composite Design Beam can then be checked that the beam has sufficient
resistance under all loads in a similar way to the procedures defined in
example 5.1
82. When all design checks have been completed the project file can be saved to a
file named “My EU Example 10_2 Complete.sst” before closing the software.
10-50

EU Examples Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

EU Examples Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

hange E hange E

1. Setup and Configuration

6. Analysis - Model Definition

7. Analysis - Load Definition & Solution

9. Specialist Analysis Techniques

10. Complete Examples

1. Setup and Configuration

1.1. Setup and Templates

We will create 5 templates:

• A design sections template

4. Enter your Organisation Name and your Organisation address.

5. Click on the Load… button to select a bitmap to display as a logo in the

6. Click on ✓ OK and confirm that the changes should be saved.

10. Click on ✓ OK to close this form.

12. Click on ✓ OK to close this form.

13. To create a Design Section Template follow the following steps:

a. Use the menu item File | New | Single Design Section

d. Enter your initials in the Calculations by: field

e. Click on ✓ OK to close this form.

g. Create a concrete material by clicking on the button at the top of the

h. Create a second Parabola-Rectangle concrete material with in the

i. Create a Reinforcing Steel – Inclined material by using the button.

j. Create a Prestressing Steel – Inclined material, setting the Relaxation

relate to strand type Y1860S7 from EN 10138-3 so we will accept all

k. Create a Structural Steel material using the default values. Click on ✓

• File | New | Single Design Beam | Steel Composite (EU Steel

1.2. Templates for Other Design Codes

Alternatively, if a complete structure, beam or section is defined using one design

2. Use the menu item Options | Design Code |

6. Close the program

2.1. Simple Edge Section

4. Repeat this for the Prestressing Steel.

11. Change the coordinates in the table to the following:

13. Click on ✓ OK to close the User Defined Section Element form.

15. Close the program.

2.2. Voided Slab

7. Close this form using the ✓ OK button

9. Create a second parametric component using the button, as before, and

12. Open the Define Reinforcement form by selecting Reinforcement in the

16. Close the Define Reinforcement form using ✓ OK

18. Close the program.

2.3. Reinforced Concrete Column

5. Open the Define Reinforcement form by selecting Reinforcement in the

6. Change the Generate option to “1 bar by 2 covers” and change Diameter to

11. Repeat this with the two top corner bars.

14. Re-open the Define Reinforcement form by selecting Reinforcement in the

20. Close the program.

2.4. Plate Girder

5. Resize the graphics window to a reasonable size by clicking on the corner of

15. Click on ✓ OK to close the Define Section form.

17. Close the program.

2.5. Encased Steel Column

13. Close the program.

A second method, which may be necessary in some circumstances, is to create the

2.6. Composite Section

8. Close the Define Section Element form by clicking on the ✓ OK button.

9. In the Navigation window click on Reinforcement. Set the Generate field to

11. Close the Reinforcement data form using the ✓ OK button.

13. Close the program.

2.7. Pre-stressed section

6. Select Design Section at the bottom of the navigation window

20. Close the program.

2.8. Multiple Sections in a Single Project

16. Close the program

7. Select “Not used” in the Resistance drop down.